JP2022116446A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a display mode which attracts an attention of a player and is easy for a player to recognize a predetermined state for a definite performance indicating that a probability of a transition to a bonus state is extremely high, or for an additional display of an AT.SOLUTION: When a character group indicating a transition to a bonus and so on, or an AT addition is displayed in a predetermined mode as a display mode, each character constituting the character group may be displayed to have multiple colors. In the predetermined mode, a color display is displayed while moving longitudinally in the character group. In a predetermined timing, a color displayed in a predetermined one end side of a predetermined character in a longitudinal direction is made different from a color displayed in the predetermined one end side of an adjacent character in the longitudinal direction.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 71

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

A reel-type game machine (slot machine) starts a game based on the operation of a start lever after a predetermined number of game medals have been inserted, and has a plurality of rows of symbols arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of rotating the spinning drum (reel) and stopping the spinning drum based on the operation of the stop button for stopping the rotation, a predetermined pattern combination (for example, "7 patterns complete" etc. is displayed on the active line. When a bonus combination is lined up, it is common to switch to a special game (a game state in which the lottery probability of a small combination is higher than in normal times), which has a higher profit margin for the player than in a normal game. Here, in the reel-type game machine, in addition to such basic games, various effects are performed to improve the taste as a whole.

In addition, as a pachinko machine in recent years, a special symbol lottery with a predetermined probability is performed when a game ball enters the start winning hole on the game board (game area), and a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. In this case, the pachinko game machine shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a large winning opening provided on the game board surface can be opened to win a large number of prize balls. The pachinko machine thus configured has a probability variation function for increasing the winning probability in the special symbol lottery, a variation time shortening function for increasing the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the special symbol lottery, etc. , and creates a game progress state advantageous to the player by means of a specific game state executed by combining the operating states of these functions, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Among various pachinko machines, when the pachinko machine is not being played, during the execution of the game standby demonstration effect to attract the player to start playing, the high expectation notice effect that occurred during the game is displayed. A pachinko game machine that enables execution is known in the prior art.

JP 2015-181620 A JP-A-2004-215803 JP 2014-171710 A JP 2006-263138 A JP 2015-181620 A

Improvements in performance are desired for this type of game machine.

a display device for displaying a performance;
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Equipped with production control means for performing control related to production,
A character group can be displayed on the display device to indicate that a predetermined game state can be entered or that the predetermined game state will continue,
When the main control means determines to shift to a predetermined game state or to continue a specific game state, the display pattern of the character group is determined by the effect control means,
In the predetermined aspect of the display pattern of the character group, each character constituting the character group is displayed with a plurality of colors,
The color display in the predetermined mode is displayed by moving in the vertical direction within the character group,
At a predetermined timing, a color displayed at a predetermined vertical end of a predetermined character in the character group and a specific character adjacent to the predetermined character in the character group at a predetermined vertical end. A game machine that is a different color from the color displayed on the machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the performance of the gaming machine.

It is a figure which shows the housing|casing exterior perspective view of slot machine PS1. It is a figure which shows the back surface of front panel PS2. It is a figure which shows the inner surface of cabinet PS3. It is a figure which shows a functional block. 4 is a flowchart showing program start processing; 4 is a flowchart showing power-off processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart showing power-off recovery processing; It is a flowchart which shows game progress main. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing; FIG. This is an example of a push button effect. It is an example of the display mode of the display device when the push button effect is executed. This is an example of a step-up notice in the normal effect state. This is an example of a dialog announcement in the normal production state. This is an example of a dialogue announcement during continuous production. This is an example of the effect switch image in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open. It is an example of the switch image for production|presentation in a demonstration screen. It is an example of the switch image for production|presentation in a demonstration screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a reel arrangement related to specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; It is a figure which shows symbol combination 1/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 2/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 3/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 4/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows condition device 1/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the condition device 2/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the condition device 3/4 regarding specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention. It is a figure which shows the condition device 4/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing non-RT internal lottery numbers ⅓ for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing non-RT internal lottery placement numbers 2/3 regarding specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing non-RT internal lottery placement numbers 3/3 for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an RT variation opportunity related to specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing RT internal lottery placement numbers ⅓ for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing RT internal lottery placement numbers 2/3 for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the RT internal lottery placement numbers 3/3 for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; It is a figure which shows the advantageous area transition regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where a betting operation is performed by the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed; It is a figure explaining the case where the adjustment|settlement operation by the adjustment|settlement switch is performed after the completion|finish of a payout|payout process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where game medals are not inserted after settlement processing is completed; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where game medals are inserted after settlement processing is completed; It is a figure explaining the case where payout was performed normally. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs); It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen when payout|payout is normally performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a program showing interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission; It is a figure which shows the time chart of an 8-bit counter and timer interrupt processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution timings of timer interrupt processing; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko game machine with the frame member opened. It is a perspective view of the back direction of the state that the frame member of the pachinko game machine is opened. It is a perspective view showing a game board attached to the pachinko game machine assumed. It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the said power-on process. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the success-or-failure lottery table of the pachinko game machine which is assumed. It is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table of the premise pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the low base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the high base state of the pachinko gaming machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referred to during a limited period of the pachinko gaming machine that is assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing an interrupt process of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a game effect of symbol variation display (decorative symbol stop display) during normal game (low probability/low base) of the premised pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the game production|presentation of the situation where the ready-to-win production|presentation with high expectation which becomes a big hit of the premise pachinko game machine is performed. It is a diagram showing a game effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the pachinko gaming machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function, which is a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the premised pachinko game machine. FIG. 10 is an image diagram of a confirmed effect according to the present invention; It is a figure which shows the generation|occurrence|production timing of the fixed effect|action which concerns on this invention, and an error notification. It is a figure which shows the generation|occurrence|production timing of the fixed effect|action which concerns on this invention, and an error notification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen when music can be changed according to the present invention; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the timing of enabling/disabling music change and volume change according to the present invention; FIG. 4 is an image diagram showing the transition between permission/impossibility of music change and volume change according to the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a power supply line in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a power supply line in the pachinko game machine according to the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a power supply line in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a power supply line in the pachinko game machine according to the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a power supply line in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a power supply line in the pachinko game machine according to the present invention.

First, a reel-type game machine and a pachinko game machine, which are the premises of the present invention, will be described. When both the premise reel-type game and the premise pachinko game machine are included, they may be described as "premise game machine", "premise technology", "game machine in the premise technology", and the like.

<< Spindle type game machine (slot machine) >>
<Description of terms>
"Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet", "BET", and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous, and all are acts of betting game media. When representing a hexadecimal value, it is described as "0x00" or "00h", and if there is no particular description before or after the number, it is represented in decimal. A "reel" may be referred to as a "rotating drum", and both have the same meaning. The "storage means" may be referred to as "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", all of which are synonymous. "Giving" used in "giving game media" or "giving points" may be referred to as "payout" and both have the same meaning. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" for each function, but in either case, the same switch is indicated. Note that the "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may be provided as different switches. When a small win with a large payout or a small win with a small payout is stopped depending on the operation mode, the small win with a large payout is called a high bell (same as high bell, high small win), and the small win with a small payout is cheap. It is sometimes called an eye (also synonymous with a cheap bell and a cheap small role). At this time, when the combination of symbols without payout is stopped, it may be called a dropout (same meaning as dropout).

Hereinafter, the premised slot machine PS1 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Description of slot machine PS1>
Components of the premised slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG.

The slot machine PS1 is roughly divided into the front panel PS2 side and the cabinet PS3 side, where necessary parts and substrates are attached respectively. The front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the side of the cabinet PS3 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device. The locking device side can be opened. That is, the front panel PS2 functions as a door for the cabinet PS3.

<Front panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as the front door PS2, the front door PS2, or the front door PS2) is made up of a plate member with a design. A number display lamp 25, a credit number display 26, a winning number display 27, an operation panel 11, a lower panel 5, an upper or both side production lamp, etc. are provided, and a medal selector 34 (hereinafter simply referred to as "selector") is provided on the back side. ), display device 32, sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., setting display LED (hereinafter referred to as setting value display LED, setting display device, setting value display device, setting display device, setting value display device There is) is provided.

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided on the front panel PS2, and the symbols drawn on the reel can be visually recognized when the front panel PS2 is closed. The patterns printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reel tapes fixed to the reel rims of the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are configured to be visible through the display window 4 from the front side (player side). It is When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of the 21 symbols (20, 16, etc. may be freely designed according to the specifications) are visible. That is, from the display window 4, 3 [symbols]×3 [reels]=9 patterns in total can be visually recognized. Here, among the stop positions where the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is the upper stage, the center stop position is the middle stage, and the lowest stop position is the lower stage. and

<Valid line>
The active line is a symbol combination line that is subject to winning determination processing (to be described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are stopped. The activated line in the premised slot machine PS1 is visible from the display window 4, and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) passing through the middle of each reel. When it is determined that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line corresponds to any combination by the prize determination process, the process corresponding to the stopped symbol combination is performed. As an example, when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to a small winning combination such as a bell has stopped, game medal (hereinafter may be referred to as medal, game medium, or game value) payout process or credit addition process is performed. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped, automatic bet processing is executed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, the effective lines may be set to five lines, namely, an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, an upward right line, and a downward right line. (upper stage, lower stage of right reel 8c), approximately valley type (upper stage of left reel 8a, lower stage of middle reel 8b, upper stage of right reel 8c), approximately L-shaped (upper stage of left reel 8a, lower stage of middle reel 8b, lower stage of right reel 8c) It can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1, such as setting 6 lines or more, or setting the effective line so that it changes depending on the number of bets. A straight line other than the valid line may be called an invalid line.

<Operation instruction lamp 24>
The operation instruction lamp 24 is provided around the display window 4, and instructs the player to operate the stop switch 13 (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are rotating. It indicates the order. That is, when the left operation instruction lamp 24a is lit (the middle operation instruction lamp 24b and the right operation instruction lamp 24c are extinguished), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, and the middle operation instruction lamp 24b is lit. When (the left operation instruction lamp 24a and the right operation instruction lamp 24c are turned off), it indicates that the middle stop switch 13b should be operated, and the right operation instruction lamp 24c is lit (the left operation instruction lamp 24a and the middle operation instruction lamp are turned off). 24b is extinguished), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bet number display lamp 25>
The bet number display lamp 25 (bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25) is provided on the operation panel 11, and the number of bets by the player's operation is displayed. It has a function to display. It is also composed of a 1-bed lamp 25a (not shown), a 2-bed lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3-bed lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is betted, the 1-bet lamp 25a lights up, when two medals are betted in total, the 1-bet lamp 25a and 2-bet lamp 25b are lit up, and when three medals are betted in total, the 1-bet lamp 25a is lit. , the 2 bed lamp 25b and the 3 bed lamp 25c are turned on. Also, although not shown, after the symbol combination relating to the replay is displayed, when the automatic betting process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the bet number used in the game in which the replay was won is lit. At the same time, the replay lamp is turned on. The lighting timing of the bet number display lamp 25 and the lighting timing of the replay lamp may be the same, or one of them may be lit first.

<Credit number display 26>
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). It is composed of a segment display 26b (not shown) that mainly displays the lower digits of the credit amount, which is composed of segments and dot points (DP). The number of credits means the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and up to 50 can be stored. Also, when a normal game cannot be played, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

<Acquisition number indicator 27>
The acquired number display 27 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). It is composed of a segment display 27b (not shown) which mainly displays the lower digits of the number of acquired sheets composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). The number of won medals means the number of medals paid out to the player according to the game result in the slot machine PS1 (including the number of medals stored in the credit number display 26). Also, when a normal game cannot be played, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired number display 27 display respective information by means of segment indicators 26a, 26b, 27a and 27b. It is also conceivable to display different information. For example, information indicating that the user is staying in an advantageous section (to be described later) or information indicating that a predetermined external signal is being output can be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. mentioned. In addition, it may have the capability of notifying the pressing order using the upper digit display section and the lower digit display section of the acquired number display 27 . When the winning number display 27 is used to notify the pressing order, the winning number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation panel 11>
The operation panel 11 is provided substantially in the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped manner with a substantially horizontal horizontal portion and a vertical portion extending substantially vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal portion. The horizontal part includes a medal slot 17, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a checkout switch, and an effect. A switch is provided for

<Start switch 12>
A start switch (also called a start lever) 12 is provided on the vertical portion of the operation panel 11 . It consists of a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and it is determined that the start switch has been operated by turning off the start switch sensor when operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes effective when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process, a process related to the instruction function, a reel rotation process, or the like is executed. In addition, in the premised slot machine PS1, the input signal is low active, so if the start switch sensor is ON during non-operation, the start switch input signal is OFF, and the start switch sensor is ON during operation. is turned off, the start switch input signal is turned on. The configuration is not limited to this, and the start switch input signal may be turned on when the start switch sensor is turned on.

Hereinafter, simply referring to "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated" means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and that the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON. represents what happened.

<Stop switch 13>
A stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11 . In the premised slot machine PS1, the left reel 8a corresponds to the left stop switch 13a, the middle reel 8b corresponds to the middle stop switch 13b, and the right reel 8c corresponds to the right stop switch 13c. Also, when the stop switch 13 is operable, the color of the lamp provided in the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamp around it is changed to suggest that the stop switch 13 is effective. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it lights up in blue, and when it cannot be operated, it lights up in red. Further, for example, the light is turned on when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and the light is turned off when the operation is impossible.

<Medal slot 17>
A medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11 . It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion slot, and restricts the insertion of medals of a standard size or larger. A plurality of types of medal insertion slots 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of a plurality of types of medals. are the same.

Regarding the input of game media, the game media are not limited to the medals described above. is input to the game machine, and based on the input game medium information, the number of bets may be set, or addition may be made at the time of winning.

<Bet switch (MAX bed switch 18, 1 bed switch 19)>
A bed switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . When the bet switch is operated when there are stored medals in the credit, the bet processing is executed and the bet number setting processing equivalent to the act of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 17 is performed. However, even if the bet switch is operated when medals are not stored in the credit, the bet processing is invalidated (the bet switch operation is not accepted). In addition, the MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a pressing portion operated by the player, a detecting portion for detecting the operation of the pressing portion, and a light emitting portion (also referred to as a MAX bet lamp) for lighting the pressing portion. The switch 19 is composed of a pressing portion operated by the player and a detection portion detecting the operation of the pressing portion (the 1-bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting portion).

When the MAX bet switch is operated, the MAX bet lamp informs the player that the betting process can be executed. Various modes are conceivable, such as blinking periodically. Conversely, when the bet processing cannot be executed even if the MAX bet switch is operated, it is conceivable to light the MAX bet lamp in a specific color or not to light the MAX bet lamp.

In addition, there are provided a MAX bet switch 18 for betting the maximum number set for each slot machine PS1 (three for the premised slot machine PS1) and a 1 bet switch 19 for betting one. When the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is received, the MAX bet process is executed, and when the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 is received, the 1 bet process is executed. The MAX bet process can be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently placed is 3 or more, and the number of bets currently placed is less than 3. and the sum of the number of bets currently betted is less than 3 (in other words, the situation where the number of bets is less than 3 even if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated), and in the situation where 3 bets have already been made It is not possible. The 1-bet process can be executed when the number of credits is 1 or more and the number of bets currently bet is less than 3, and cannot be executed when 3 bets have already been made.

Also, every time the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, 1-bet processing is executed, and if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated 3 times from the state where no bet is made, it becomes a 3-bet, and the 1-bet switch 19 is operated 3 times. This corresponds to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18 .

Also, the 1-bet switch 19 is disabled when 3-bets have been made, but if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated once in the situation where 3-bets have been made, the 1-bet state is entered and credits are awarded. You may be comprised so that two sheets may be returned.

Also, although the embodiment has been described in which the MAX bet process executed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 is not executed when the number of bets is less than 3, the process of betting the maximum number that can be bet at present is also conceivable. In other words, if no bet is made and the number of credits is 2, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, 2 bets may be made.

The maximum number of bets that can be betted may differ depending on the game state. good too.

<Sub switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a pressing portion made of a translucent member for direct operation by the player, and a detecting portion for detecting that the pressing portion has been operated. and a sub-switch lamp for lighting the depressed portion of the sub-switch. This sub-switch 20 is a switch for mainly displaying a menu screen on a display device 32, which will be described later. As input means managed by the sub-control board 1000, in addition to the sub-switches 20, sub-cross key switches 21 (upper switch, lower switch, left switch, right switch) and performance switches (operated by instructions during the game) switch) is provided. Also, the sub-switch 20 can function as a trigger for activating an interlocking system with a mobile terminal (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile interlocking system), which will be described later. Although the sub-switches 20 are used for the menu display function and the effect switches are used for operation during the game, they may be used as common switches.

The menu screen displays winning combination items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light amount adjustment items, and mobile interlocking system-related items. The cursor that selects is controlled to move up and down. When the subswitch 20 is operated while the cursor is on any of the items, the details of the item are displayed. For example, if the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted with the left switch or right switch of the sub cross key switch 21. there is

Further, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 after the game is finished and no bets have been placed. At this time, the effect state can be normal effect, continuous effect, AT effect, or demo screen (a screen that is displayed 60 seconds after the end of the game, and displays the manufacturer name and effect introduction as a moving image). Even in this situation, the menu screen is displayed by operating the subswitch 20. - 特許庁However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous production or AT production.

<Direction switch>
The effect switch is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a pressing portion made of a light-transmitting member for direct operation by the player, and a detecting portion for detecting that the pressing portion has been operated. and an effect switch lamp for lighting the pressing part of the effect switch. When the switch for performance is operated in a situation where the operation of the switch for performance is valid, the performance based on the operation is executed. For example, the display device (hereinafter also simply referred to as "liquid crystal") 32 displays "success" (hereinafter referred to as "success effect") indicating that a privilege is given in the final game of the continuous effect when the continuous effect is being executed. ) or a "failure" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a failure effect), which means that the benefit is not given, is displayed by operating the effect switch. A mode of displaying "success" or "failure" is conceivable.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the switch for effect is effective, the effect switch lamp lights up so that the player can be informed that the operation of the switch for effect is effective. As a lighting mode of the performance switch, it is conceivable that the performance switch is turned off when the performance switch operation is invalid, and is lit when the performance switch operation is valid. In addition to the lighting mode in which the operation of the effect switch is effective, a mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated at a constant cycle may be used.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the effect switch is effective, the fact that the operation of the effect switch is effective is notified by performing a display imitating the effect switch on the liquid crystal. In the case of displaying on the liquid crystal the effect switch, the display is performed based on the command received from the main control means 100 . For example, it is conceivable that a display imitating a switch for effect is performed based on the start switch reception command, or a display imitating a switch for effect is performed based on the all reel stop command.

<Payment switch>
A settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . By being operated after the game is over, the number of bet game media or the number of game media stored in credits is paid out to the player (settlement process). note that. In the premised slot machine PS1, when a settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet is placed and game media are stored in credits, the betted game media are paid out first, and then the credits are played out. However, it is not limited to this, and the process of paying out the game media stored in the credit is executed only when the number of betted game media is 0. good too. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated in a state where a bet is placed, only the game media that are bet are paid out, and when the settlement switch is operated again after that, the game media stored in the credits are paid out. may

<Bottom panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. A design sheet is sandwiched between two sheets of transparent resin, and the design sheet is printed with a characteristic color of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout port 45>
A medal payout port 45 is provided below the lower panel 5 . This is an exit for ejecting medals paid out from a hopper 44 (also referred to as a hopper) to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (receiving tray 28). It also serves as a return opening for releasing medals removed from the medal selector 34, which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Saucer 28>
A receiving tray 28 is provided below the lower panel 5 . It has a substantially recessed structure so as to receive and store medals discharged from the medal payout port 45, and protrudes toward the player side so that the stored medals can be checked by the player.

In addition, the receiving tray 28 has other functions such as a cigarette ashtray 29 and a resin sheet to which a union license seal, a patent stamp seal, and a model seal are attached, and seal storage having an opening for displaying to the player side. A section 30 is also provided.

<Speaker S>
The speakers S are provided above and below the front panel PS2. It is connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and the speaker S outputs an error sound and a warning sound informing that an error has occurred, in addition to sound effects in accordance with the production.

<Display device 32>
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and in addition to various effect images, a game instruction image that instructs the pressing order of the stop switch 13 and the position of the eyes during the game (pressing order navigation image when only the pressing order is displayed). (Also called push order image, operation order image, or operation order image), push navigation image (also called push image or operation position image) when only the push position is displayed, or push order and push position are displayed. It may be referred to as an operation mode navigation image (also referred to as an operation mode image) as a broader concept of pressing order and pressing position), an error image when an error occurs, and the like. Also, depending on the model, there is a slot machine PS1 in which the display device 32 is not mounted.

<Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories>
Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories are provided at arbitrary positions on the front panel PS2 such as the periphery of the display window 4 and the upper and lower panels. Other production devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and in addition to various production images and production operations, game instruction images and operations for instructing the pressing order and position of the stop switch 13 during the game, and error generation. Display an error image or perform an action when an error occurs. Other effect devices are arbitrarily mounted according to the model of the slot machine PS1. Various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can also be used as production devices. In particular, in a game machine having a liquid crystal as an additional effect device, the display device 32 may be referred to as a main display device, and the liquid crystal as another effect device may be referred to as a sub display device. In this case, the display area of the main display device is larger than that of the sub display device.

<Medal Selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the back side of the front panel PS2 and is provided in the downflow passage below the medal slot 17 . The medal selector 34 has a medal count function of counting the number of medals inserted by the player with a sensor provided on the flow passage, a medal rejection function of guiding the inserted non-standard medals to the receiving tray 28, and a front panel PS2 front surface. An eject function that ejects medals stuck in the medal selector 34 by operating the eject switch provided in the , and an electrically driven blocking member (also called a blocker) that blocks medals that are inserted other than when accepting medals. It has a blocker function that removes it from the downflow passage. Also, if the medals inserted at the time of medal reception are legitimate medals, the medal selector 34 discharges the medals to the hopper 44 located downstream.

Various sensors in the medal selector are composed of a path sensor, an insertion sensor 1, an insertion sensor 2, and a shoot sensor. The path sensor is a sensor that first detects medals inserted from the medal slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. The throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 are positioned downstream of the passage sensor and the blocker, and are used to determine the passage time of the medals passing through the throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 to determine normal passage or abnormal passage. is provided. Note that the input sensor 2 is located downstream of the input sensor 1 . The shoot sensor is located downstream of the throw-in sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of thrown-in medals and ejected medals. Since the passage sensor and the shoot sensor have overlapping functions, only one of them may be provided.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it permits passage of game medals, and when it is OFF, it prohibits passage of game medals. Permitting the passage of game medals means that the game medals inserted from the medal slot are led to the hopper 44, and disallowing passage of the game medals means that the game medals inserted from the medal slot are not allowed to pass through the hopper. It is not to be led to 44.

Components of the slot machine PS1 on the side of the cabinet PS3 will be described below.

<Cabinet PS3>
The cabinet PS3 is a rectangular box with an opening on one side, and contains reel unit 6, hopper 44, auxiliary tank 46, setting key switch 37, reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter simply "reset switch"). or a "setting switch"), a power supply device 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, and the like.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are put together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover cannot be easily opened and closed by caulking. (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to the main control board case bracket in cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6>
The reel unit 6 mainly includes a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a middle reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3 and fixed by a locking member (screw or rivet).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, right reel 8c) consist of a reel base, a reel tape with a plurality of patterns attached to the outer circumference of the reel base, and a stepping shaft supported by the reel base. It consists of a motor and a motor fixing base that fixes the stepping motor and is neglected as a reel unit. A pattern arrangement different for each reel is drawn on the reel tape.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 revolutions/minute), the constant speed rotation state is maintained by moving the stepping motor one step for each interrupt. (constant speed rotation), according to the operation of the stop switch 13 by the player, the corresponding reel is moved to the stop position determined for each stop operation reception position at constant speed rotation, and the reel is moved to the stop position. After that, the brake is applied (the four-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the rotation of the reel and the excitation output is terminated.

In addition, an index is provided on the spoke portion provided on the reel base of each reel, and the index sensor provided on the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index, which is a reference during rotation for each lap. The position of the pattern (also called the initial pattern) is determined. The number of steps of the stepping motor, which is the driving source of the reels in the premised slot machine PS1, is 336 steps, and one cycle is performed by timer interrupt processing 336 times during constant-speed rotation. During constant-speed rotation, the rotation failure detection counter is incremented each time the timer interrupt process is executed twice. In other words, if the reel does not make one rotation even after 360 times of timer interrupt processing, it is determined that the rotation is defective. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that the rotation failure detection counter becomes 0 before it reaches 180 if the constant speed rotation process is normal.

In the premised slot machine PS1, it is determined whether or not the index has been detected during constant speed processing, and it is not determined whether or not the index has been detected during acceleration processing. It may be determined whether or not the index is detected during the fast processing and the acceleration processing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to bring the player into a state in which it is possible to accept the stoppage more quickly.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixed base of each reel, and it is lit to emphasize the stopped pattern after the reel stops, or to improve the visibility of the pattern while the reel is rotating. I'm letting you

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals thrown in by the player. The hopper 44 is placed in engagement with a rail provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3, and can slide back and forth along the rail. The hopper 44 includes a storage tank portion that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 into the game machine, a hopper motor that is driven by input of a drive signal from the hopper driving means, and a hopper motor that is pivotally supported. A rotating disk for aligning the medals in the part, a medal dispensing part provided with a discharge mechanism for discharging the medals one by one to the tray 28 by rotating the rotating disk, and a medal discharge port for discharging the medals by the medal dispensing part. , and a payout sensor for detecting medals ejected from the medal ejection port.

<Auxiliary tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and the medals stored in excess of the allowable amount of the storage tank portion of the hopper 44 pass through the downwardly inclined rail portion provided in the storage tank portion. is stored in the auxiliary tank 46. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-like structure, and when installed in the cabinet PS3, two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are connected to the auxiliary tank through through holes provided on at least one side surface. 46 is exposed, and when a certain amount or more of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are stored, two full detection electrodes are energized through the medals, and the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. We judge that it is. The number of fullness detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of fullness detection electrodes may be changed, such as providing three. Further, the method of fullness detection is not limited to the method of using the fullness detection electrode, and may be configured to enable fullness detection by detecting medals with a sensor provided at a predetermined position.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit provided inside the slot machine PS1 and provided with an opening/closing door on the front surface thereof. After opening the front panel PS2, the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit is opened to allow access. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it clockwise by 90 degrees. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in a state in which tokens can be accepted, the current set value can be confirmed. Executes setting change processing (described later).

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply device 39 is provided on the lower left side of the cabinet PS3 when viewed from the front. The power supply device 39 has a rectangular box structure, is provided with a power switch 40 on the outside, and is provided with a power supply board for generating a voltage inside. The power supply device 39 is individually connected to the rotary device board and the sub-control board 1000 via a harness (not shown). Power is supplied to the control board 100 .

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 takes in power from the outside of the slot machine PS1 and then generates predetermined voltages for the main control board 100 and the sub control board 1000 respectively. It is configured to take in voltage, and is configured not to take in power from the outside of the slot machine PS1 when the power switch 40 is turned off.

<External output terminal plate 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally mounted inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and outputs a signal related to the game result output from the main control board 100 in a predetermined format. , and transmitted to the outside of the slot machine PS1. Contents of game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), the door open signal, and the like. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside are when the main control board 100 is controlled by the AT state, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, when the value of the game-related counter reaches a predetermined value, etc. It can be set based on the information determined in advance.

<Functional block diagram>
A functional block diagram of the premised slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Main control board 100>
The premised slot machine PS1 operates from a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) that governs general game flow, to a sub control board 1000 (sub control means 1000, Sub-control board 1000, sub-control means 1000), door relay board (also called central display board), rotary device board, reset/setting switch 38, setting key switch, etc. Enables data communication. However, the main control board 100 and the sub control board 1000 are not capable of two-way communication, and one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 1000 enables data communication.

A main control chip is mounted on the main control board 100 . In the main control chip, a main control CPU, a main control ROM, a main control RAM, etc. are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. In addition, the main control chip has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate with each other via a bus. Furthermore, the main control chip includes general-purpose registers (for example, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that can be used by the main control CPU for calculation, etc., and call instructions ( For example, a PC register for storing a program (return address) after a return instruction (for example, RET instruction) after execution of a program by CALL instruction), an interrupt register (for example, IFF1 register, IFF2 register).

Under the control of the main control chip, the winning lottery (also called internal lottery), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc. are appropriately communicated to various boards. In addition, for the sub-control board 1000, as a result of the internal lottery, the selected role (AT role, AT target role, pushing role, pushing role, and operation procedure role including both pushing and pushing roles) ), and when the main control means 100 side notifies the information (push order, operation timing) regarding the display of the choice hand, the choice hand information (choice hand group information, selection By transmitting the information regarding the display of the combination), it is possible for the sub-control means to notify the information regarding the display of the selected combination. It should be noted that all the processes related to AT, such as shifting to AT, extending the number of AT games, and notifying the pressing order, may be referred to as processes related to (related to) the instruction function. It should be noted that the push order role is a conditional device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the order of the reels to be stopped (push order), and the push order role is the operation of the stop button. This is a condition device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the timing of acceptance.

The storage capacity of the main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 is "16 KB or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first program area) of "7.5 KB or less" and other areas outside the use area ( Also called a second program area). In the usable area, there is only a control area of "4.5 KB or less" (also referred to as a first control area) in which the program executed by the main control board 100 is stored, and information other than the program (for example, internal lottery table information). is stored or will be stored in a data area of "3.0 KB or less" (also referred to as a first data area). Outside the use area, there are a control area (also referred to as a second control area) and a data area (also referred to as a second data area) like the use area. A program relating to the progress of the game is stored in the usage area, and a program relating to anti-fraud measures and a program used for gaming machine testing are stored outside the usage area.

The storage capacity of the main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 is "1024B or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first work area) of "512B or less" and the other outside the use area (second (also referred to as a work area). The first work area is a rewritable storage area according to the progress of the game, and the second work area is a rewritable storage area during the execution of anti-fraud measures and game machine test programs.

The storage areas of the main control RAM built into the main control chip include storage areas for switch state flags indicating the ON/OFF state of the stop changeover switch and the ON/OFF state of the automatic settlement switch, which are set 1 to 6. A storage area for set value information indicating any value of RT status information storage area indicating which RT status among a plurality of RT statuses, a specific condition device indicating the winning status of a specific condition device such as a bonus , other game information storage areas where information necessary to progress the game is stored, unused unused storage areas, stack area storage areas where data saved from registers are stored, There is a temporary stack area storage area that is set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized at the time of setting change processing by the setting change means, at the time of power failure recovery processing, and at the start of each game. The range is different.

During the setting change process, if power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, or if recovery is not possible, data 0 is set (initialized) in the RAM area excluding the switch status flag storage area. In other words, only the switch state flag is taken over the state before the setting change. For example, the RT state and the condition device flag are cleared and not taken over.

Also, during setting change processing, either when the power failure recovery can be performed normally or when the state is not recoverable, that is, when the setting change processing is performed normally, the storage area of the switch state flag , set value information storage area, RT status information storage area, and the storage area of the specific condition device are stored. In other words, the RT state, the set value data, and the condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the set values after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and new setting values are set in subsequent setting change processing.

In addition, during power-off recovery processing, at the start of each game, data is stored in the stack area storage area excluding the unused storage area of the RAM area and the maximum use area at the time of power-off recovery when the RAM is initialized. Set to 0.

The main control built-in register built in the main control chip is for setting the operation of each peripheral circuit (eg, timer circuit, etc.) built in the main control chip and controlling its function.

For example, by writing (also referred to as setting or storing) data to a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in register by a program stored in the main control ROM, one of the programs stored in the main control ROM, the maskable Settings (timer circuit settings) relating to interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) can be performed.

<Sub-control board 1000>
A sub-control chip is mounted on the sub-control board 1000 . In the sub-control chip, the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data designating the performance to be output to the speaker S, the LED lamp, the sub-switch 20, the performance switch, and the like. Information to the display device 32 is transmitted to the image control board. Further, the sub-control board 1000 is directly supplied with power from the power supply board.

<Bolt device board>
The reel device board is a relay board that performs data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also called external collective terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. . A reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when the protruding piece (also called an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether or not the front door PS2 is opened. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether or not medals are properly passed when they are paid out from the hopper 44 . The external collective terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the game machine. Further, power is supplied directly from the power supply board to the rotary drum device board.

<Door relay board>
The information input to the door relay board includes various sensor information in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, chute sensor), bed switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and information to be output. They include blocker information, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board includes a selector, bed switch, stop switch, checkout switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, 3 bed lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, It is electrically connected to the advantageous section ramp.

<Production control board>
The production control board (also referred to as production control means) includes a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, a production switch, a movable accessory, a speaker S, a back lamp, an LED lamp provided on the front panel PS2, and a display device 32. is electrically connected to an image control board that controls the display contents of the .

The effect control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the output of effects to the effect device based on the effect command received from the sub-control means 1000. - 特許庁

The effect control means selects the contents of the effect based on the lottery result of the combination by the internal lottery means. In the premised slot machine PS1, a plurality of types of performance contents are provided in advance, and the performance control means uses software random numbers after the internal lottery means draws a winning combination at the start of the game or the like. The performance contents are selected by lottery.

In addition, a plurality of types of effects are provided according to not only the result of the combination lottery but also the result of the freeze lottery, the game state (RT state, freeze state), and the like. More specifically, a plurality of types of presentation contents are provided corresponding to bonus wins, small win wins, replay wins, non-win wins, and the like.

As the game progresses, the content of the production is at what timing (when the start switch 12 is operated, when each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) and what kind of production is output (how the lamp is lit, It determines whether to flash or turn off, what kind of sound to output from the speaker S, what kind of image to display on the display device 32, etc.).

Also, it is possible to generate an effect output by the effect control means according to an operation by the player. For example, the start switch 12, the stop switch 13, the medal insertion slot 17, the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), the settlement switch, etc., for which operation signals are input to the main control board 100, are operated according to the operation signals. It is conceivable that an effect is generated by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on the sub-control command transmitted from the control board 100, and the sub-switch 20 and the sub-cross key for inputting the operation signal to the sub-control board 1000. It is also conceivable to directly generate an effect from the sub-control board 1000 according to the sub-input switch operating means such as the switch 21 and the effect switch. Also, although the sub-control board 1000 and the performance control board are separate boards, they may be configured as one board. In that case, the sub-control board 1000 has the functions and processes of the production control board, and the sub-control board 1000 includes the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the production switch, the movable accessory, the speaker S, the back lamp, and the front panel. An LED lamp provided in the PS2 and an image control board for controlling display contents of the display device 32 may be electrically connected.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as image control means) is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, and the like for specifically displaying the effect content on the display device 32 .

<Power board>
The premised slot machine PS1 supplies electric power from the power board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40 . The power supplied to the reel device board supplies power to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. Then, the supplied electric power is supplied to each component to establish an electrical connection. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 supplies power to the performance control board and power to the image control board. The supplied electric power is supplied to each component and electrically connected.

The control of the main control board 100 that controls the game of the gaming machine will be described.

<Error type>
Errors are roughly classified into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable error>
Errors that can be recovered include selector errors (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper 44 errors (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness disconnection error, etc. When a restorable error is set, after removing the factors of various restorable errors, if the operation of the reset switch is accepted, the game can be returned to the game without turning on the power again. During the restorable error, the display device 32, payout amount indicator, and various lamps display information about the error in order to notify the player of what error has occurred.

When a recoverable error is detected during a game, progress of the game may be stopped at the time of detection, or may be stopped after completion of the game in which the recoverable error is detected. By stopping the progress of the game during the restorable error, even if the restorable error occurs due to fraud, damage to the game parlor manager can be suppressed. As a condition for recovering from a recoverable error state, it may be configured so that recovery is automatically performed by removing the cause of the error, and an error that can be recovered without turning on the power again is called a recoverable error. ing.

<Unrecoverable error>
In the premised slot machine PS1, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the progress of the game is restricted by clearing the output of the output port, etc., and the credit number indicator 26 displays according to the type of error. , etc., to notify that it is in a non-recoverable state.

In addition, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is cleared when the operation of the reset switch (not shown) is accepted. An unrecoverable error cannot be cleared simply by turning on the power again. In this case, the unrecoverable error is canceled by performing the setting change process. When the power is turned on again in the event of an unrecoverable error, after a part of the power failure recovery process is executed, the unrecoverable error display is repeatedly executed so that the subsequent game processes are not executed.

As non-recoverable errors, if the number of bets at the lottery is out of the specified number, if the value is not within the normal range in the setting value error check, it is determined that the power supply shutdown processing was not performed normally when the power supply was restored. In some cases, when it is determined that there is a random number abnormality such as an abnormality in the frequency of the crystal oscillator, the symbol combination corresponding to the combination that has not been won on the active line is stopped in the winning determination process.

Further, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the progress of the game is stopped regardless of whether it is during the game or during the game standby (from the end of the game to the start of the next game).

<Game method, game flow>
In order to play a game in the slot machine PS1, first, medals are inserted from the medal slot 17, or pre-stored medals are betted (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Set the number of medals to bet (also referred to as the prescribed number). Note that the premised slot machine PS1 is set to three as a specified number. By setting the number of medals to be bet, the activated line is set to be effective and a game can be played.

When medals are inserted from a new medal insertion slot in a situation where the number of medals to bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals stored in the credit increases. The maximum number of cards stored in the credit is 50. If medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of bets (3) and the upper limit of the accumulated amount (50) are inserted from the medal slot (54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (when medals are inserted into the gaming machine) in a state to prevent it) and returned to the receiving tray. That is, when the number of bets is the upper limit and the number of accumulated credits is the upper limit, the blocker is turned off (the path to the hopper 44 in the selector is not formed).

A situation in which the number of bets is added when medals are inserted is when the number of bets is less than 3 (less than the maximum number of bets in the game state when the medals are inserted). In addition, as a situation in which credits can be stored when medals are inserted, the number of bets is 3 (the maximum number of bets in the game state when medals are inserted) and the credit is less than 50 (credit is less than the maximum number that can be stored). That is, when the sum of the number of bets and the number of stored credits is less than 53, medals are inserted into the gaming machine when inserted from the medal slot. As a condition for inserting medals into the gaming machine, it is also possible that the player is waiting for a game (a period from the end of the game to the start of the next game). For example, a symbol combination related to replay is displayed, and the medal insertion requirement is satisfied even during game standby after the automatic betting process is executed. In this case, since three coins are automatically betted, if the number of accumulated credits is less than 50, the token insertion requirement is satisfied.

Next, when the operation of the start switch 12 is received, the internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also referred to as the result of the internal lottery process, the condition device number), the minimum game time (wait time (period), or 4.1 second timer) has passed, and if the wait time has passed, the rotation of each reel is started, and if the wait time has not passed, the wait time has passed. Wait without spinning each reel until

Next, when the operation (stop operation) of any stop switch of the stop switch 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, according to the timing of accepting the combination lottery result and the stop operation The reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 operated by is stopped. When all the reels are stopped (also called full stop), it is determined whether or not each stop symbol determined at the time of accepting the stoppage of each reel is normal. Search, and pay out medals (including addition to credits), set replay (automatic bet processing), set bonus status, end bonus status, set RT status, Processing such as termination of the RT state is performed, and one game is terminated.

<Freeze processing>
The freeze process (also referred to as a freeze effect) that delays the progress of the game by suspending the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time includes, for example, accepting game media, which are functions related to the progress of the game, and controlling the number of pre-credited game media bet. For example, the function related to acceptance of operation of the bet switch for setting, acceptance of operation of the start switch 12 for starting the game, or acceptance of stop operation of the reels may be temporarily stopped. Note that the freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100 .

As the freeze effect, all the functions related to the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped, or only some of the functions may be temporarily stopped.

Modes for pausing the progress of the game include control processing based on the operation of the player (processing for forming a path through which medals are guided to the hopper 44 by blocker control, processing for setting the number of bets based on the operation of the bet switch, For example, reel rotation processing or internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12, and reel stop processing based on the operation of the stop switch 13) are not performed.

When an input signal based on the player's operation is issued during the period in which the progress of the game is paused by the freeze effect, control processing based on the input signal is not performed, the input signal is not accepted, or the input signal is not received. By performing processing such as delaying the transmission until a predetermined period elapses, the game end timing in one game is delayed as compared with the case where the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels are not rotated for a predetermined period and the reels are rotated after a predetermined period. When is operated, internal lottery and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period of time, and internal lottery and reel rotation are performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or when start switch 12 is operated, internal lottery is not performed for a predetermined period of time. However, the reels are not rotated and the reels are rotated after a predetermined period of time has passed, or the predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated and the internal lottery is performed, and the reels are rotated or stopped during the predetermined period. , or after the start switch 12 is operated to perform internal lottery and reel rotation, a predetermined period is set and stop acceptance of the stop switch 13 is disabled for the predetermined period.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, as a result of the freeze effect performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the operation of the stop switch 13, a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel. In the freeze effect performed based on, the control processing of the freeze effect is different.

As the control processing of the freeze effect performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13, for example, when the left stop switch 13a is operated during all reel rotations and freezes, the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a is stopped. Afterwards, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c is invalidated. As a result, the player cannot stop the rotating middle and right reels for a predetermined period of time. , the timing until the end of the game in one game can be delayed.

As a result of accepting the operation of the stop switch 13, the operation of the stop switch 13 other than the stop switch 13 to be stopped last is accepted as the control processing of the freeze performance performed based on the stop display of the specific symbol on the reel. When a specific pattern is stopped and displayed on each reel as a result, the stop acceptance of the stop switch 13 to be stopped last is invalidated, or the operation of the stop switch 13 to be stopped last is accepted. Based on the fact that a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel, the bet number setting process based on the operation of the bet switch to start the next game, the process of detecting the insertion of game media by the passing sensor, or replay is enabled. For example, control processing or the like based on the automatic betting processing that is performed when the player stops on the line is not performed.

During the predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily stopped, but the game machine operation irrespective of the progress of the game can be executed. For example, even if the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the rotation mode of the reel can be arbitrarily set such as rotating in a normal rotation mode, rotating at a lower speed than usual, or rotating at a higher speed. can do.

As the rotation mode of the reels during a predetermined period, the reels are rotated in a direction opposite to the normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), the reels are rotated a predetermined number of symbols and a specific combination of symbols is stopped, and a predetermined number of reels are rotated. For example, stopping a reel and rotating another reel, changing the rotation speed of a reel, or changing the operation of a reel due to a player's operation.

The predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to predetermined conditions. Here, the predetermined condition is the detection of a signal based on the operation reception status of various switches by the player (the operation status of the start switch 12, the bet switch, the stop switch 13, or the settlement switch, etc.), and the result of the freeze lottery. are mentioned. In addition, changing includes shortening or lengthening a predetermined period of time during which a freeze effect is performed in which the progress of the game is temporarily stopped, or switching the rotation mode of the reels.

Control processing for shortening the suspension period includes forcibly ending the suspension period or rewriting the suspension period to a period shorter than the suspension period. As control processing for lengthening the suspension period, another period is added after the suspension period, or the suspension period is rewritten to a longer period. Further, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not have to be set with an upper limit time, and may continue until a certain result is obtained based on the result of operation acceptance.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set including the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period and the freeze effect period are compared, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period, and the freeze effect ends during the wait period. If not, the freeze effect period may be set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period may be resumed after the freeze effect ends. In addition, if there is only a freeze performance period longer than the wait period in advance, the processing of comparing the wait period and the freeze performance period is omitted, and the freeze performance is started after the start switch 12 is operated (after internal lottery processing). It is also possible to

As a freeze effect, it is also possible to perform a freeze effect (also referred to as a pseudo-game) as if a normal game were progressing during the acceleration process. In the pseudo-game, the start switch 12 is operated, a pseudo-game period is set during the reel acceleration process after the internal lottery is performed, and reel rotation control is performed like a normal game during the pseudo-game period (pseudo-game The reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch based on the start of the game), and the reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13 . Also, it may be configured to rotate the reels again by operating the start switch 12 during the pseudo-game period. However, the internal lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12, the winning determination process or the payout control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In the pseudo-game, when the reels are stopped by operating the stop switch 13 or when the reels are automatically stopped as a reel performance, the stopped reels are swung up and down (so-called swing fluctuation). As a result, when the player operates the stop switch 13, it can be determined whether the game is a normal game or a pseudo game.

<Symbol combinations that do not require technical intervention>
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention is a symbol combination that can stop and display the winning combination of symbols on the active line regardless of the timing at which the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning. means For example, when bell symbols are arranged at intervals of 3 symbols on all reels, the bell-bell-bell always stops (attraction rate is 100%), so it can be said that the symbol combination does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, a winning combination with a pull-in rate of 100% may be referred to as PB=1, and a winning combination with a pull-in rate of all reels of 100% may be referred to as PB=1.

On the contrary, PB≠1 means that the symbol combination of the winning combination does not stop depending on the stop timing of the stop switch 13 while the reels are rotating. For example, if there is a place where there is no symbol related to the winning combination (eg, separated by 5 symbols) within the pull-in range, PB≠1, and the winning combination is sometimes called a PB≠1 combination.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control>
Minor win priority control means that when a minor win and a bonus are won in duplicate, or when both the symbols relating to the minor win and the symbols relating to the bonus can be drawn in when winning a minor win within the bonus, the symbols relating to the minor win are drawn. .

The bonus priority control is to attract the bonus symbol when both the symbol related to the minor symbol and the symbol related to the bonus can be drawn in when the minor symbol and the bonus are won in duplicate or when the minor symbol in the bonus is won.

In addition, replay has the highest priority and cannot be missed, so when replay and small winnings, or replay and bonus condition device flags are turned on at the same time, patterns related to replay are always drawn.

<Normal section>
A normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When the pressing order is won in the normal section, a process of transmitting to the sub-control means 1000 masked information (effect group number) indicating which pressing order was won is executed. In addition, when winning the pushing order in the normal section, notification of the pushing order (both the correct pushing order and the incorrect pushing order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the pushing order even if the pushing order is won. I don't know.

<advantageous section>
The advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and the advantageous section is provided in order to suppress excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous section transition lottery executed in the normal section, you can shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, a lottery to transfer to AT can be held, but in order to suppress the above-mentioned excessive medal acquisition, it is designed so that the advantageous section ends based on certain conditions and shifts to the normal section. ing.
In particular,
1) When 1,500 games have been played from the next game after shifting to one advantageous section 2) When more than 2,400 medals have been obtained from the next game after shifting to one advantageous section 3) When any condition is satisfied are mentioned. By these means, excessive acquisition of medals can be suppressed. Incidentally, the arbitrary condition of 3) includes, for example, when one AT is finished, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, and the like.

<advantageous section ramp>
An advantageous section lamp is provided as information indicating on the main side that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section. As a result, when the player confirms whether or not he/she is staying in the advantageous section, he/she can easily judge by lighting/non-lighting of the advantageous section lamp. Specifically, when the DP on the credit display 26 is lit, it indicates that the player is staying in the advantageous section, and when the DP on the credit display 26 is off, the player is not staying in the advantageous section. It is shown that. The lighting timing of the advantageous zone lamp is after all reels have stopped, after accepting the bet switch operation, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, and when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected. Examples include when the second medal is detected, after receiving the start switch, or after winning a winning combination by internal lottery. In addition, as a condition to always light up, if you are staying in an advantageous section, and if you notify the operation procedure information of the choice hand and the ball output rate (maximum ball output rate) of the information game exceeds 1 ( increase).

In addition, it is configured to light up the advantageous zone lamp even when announcing the RT transition pushing order to an RT with a high replay probability although the ball payout rate does not exceed 1 because the pushing order small combination is not installed in the specifications. ing. This is to inform the player that the state is advantageous to the player by means of the advantageous section lamp, and is intended to prevent the player from suffering damage due to ignorance of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Note that if the condition for always lighting the advantageous section lamp as described above is not satisfied, there is no problem even if the timing for lighting the advantageous section lamp after the transition to the new advantageous section is arbitrary.

In addition, when the advantageous section lamp is lit once, it will continue to be lit until the advantageous section ends, and before accepting the operation of the start switch for the next game after the advantageous section ends (after all reels stop, After accepting the bet switch operation, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected), the advantageous section lamp will not light up. to

With this configuration, even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, it may be an advantageous section, and even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player can feel the expectation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed. can be given to As a result, conventionally, if it is a normal section, it has become a game that just waits to shift to an advantageous section, but if it is a slot machine PS1 as a premise, it is possible that an AT transition lottery etc. will be done even in a normal section. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the game.

Further, when the advantageous section type is 1, it is not necessarily an advantageous section. This is a normal section (advantageous section type is 0), and in a game where the advantageous section type is 1 after winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section type is 1 but before the transition to the advantageous section. This is because the game state is in the normal section. When executing processing to transmit whether the test signal is an advantageous section or a normal section, if the advantageous section type is referenced, the signal for the advantageous section will be sent even though it is a normal section. send a different signal.

In order to prevent this situation, the test signal is configured to refer to the value of the advantageous interval clear counter when transmitting either the advantageous interval or the normal interval. When the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, processing is executed to output a test signal indicating that it is a normal section. ), a process for outputting a test signal indicating the advantageous section is executed. With such a configuration, the process for outputting the test signal can be performed by simply determining whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 or not, and the state can be accurately specified. , and the program execution speed can be improved. As described above, even when the advantageous interval is terminated under an arbitrary end condition, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1. Therefore, in the processing for outputting the test signal, even in the game where the advantageous interval ends, the advantageous interval can be output correctly.
<AT>
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also called a notification period, and is a period for facilitating the winning of a winning combination by a winning combination lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). In general, means for notifying in the AT include stop switch operation timing, stop switch operation order, stop switch operation timing and stop switch operation order, and are also referred to as an operation procedure or operation mode.

<Grouping of selected roles>
The main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 the performance group number indicating that the choice hand is won when the choice hand is won during non-AT, and the performance group number and operation procedure information when the choice hand is won during AT. to the sub-control means 1000. In other words, since the operational procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during non-AT, the sub-control means 1000 cannot notify the operational procedure. As a result, on the side of the sub-control means 1000, it is unclear which operation procedure is used to display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during non-AT, and a symbol combination advantageous to the player is displayed during AT. Since the operation procedure information that can be performed is transmitted, the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device or the operation instruction lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. As a result, the player can easily recognize the operation procedure, and can suppress illegal acquisition of the operation procedure information during non-AT.

<Processing related to instruction function>
The processing related to the instruction function is not only AT related lottery such as AT transition lottery, AT additional lottery, AT end condition update (addition / subtraction of AT game number, addition / subtraction of AT execution notification number of times), but also AT state management It is a concept that includes processing related to Processing related to this instruction function can be executed with a predetermined number of bets for each gaming state, and when a plurality of bets is set as a prescribed number in a certain gaming state, only one bet number is set. configured to process. For example, when a 2-coin bet and a 3-coin bet are possible in the middle state of the bonus, the processing related to the command function can be executed only in the game with the 3-coin bet, and the processing related to the command function can be executed in the game with the 2-coin bet. is infeasible. That is, in a game with two bets, the AT lottery is not executed even if the AT lottery target role is won, or the AT game number is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if SB or CB, which ends in one game, is dedicated to 2-bet games, and the game after SB or CB ends is 2-bet or 3-bet, replay is won with SB or CB. If the number of automatic bets is 2, the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in the game after the SB or CB is finished (it is possible to execute the processing related to the instruction function when betting 3). ), the number of bets to be automatically inserted when a replay is won in SB or CB is set to three. By doing so, it is possible to execute the processing related to the instruction function even in the game after the replay is won in SB or CB, so that the game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. As described above, the processing related to the advantageous section is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

<Instruction monitor>
During the AT, when announcing the information on the operation procedure for the winning hand, the operation procedure information may be announced using the win number indicator. Specifically, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor in the case of pushing order A (left, middle, right correct), and "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor in the case of pushing order B (left, right, middle, correct). In the case of push order C (middle left right correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order D (middle right left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and push order E (right left In the case of a middle correct answer), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of a pushing order F (right middle left correct answer), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With such a configuration, the player can know the correct pressing order by checking the instruction monitor. In addition, since the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it is possible to accurately notify the pressing order even if the sub-control board is illegally modified.

Also, when the indication monitor is used also as the acquired number display, the above-described numbers (1 to 6) may be displayed in the lower digits, and "=" may be displayed as the identifier in the upper digits. In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the winning number indicator displays the winning number or the pressing order, so that the player's recognition is not hindered.

Also, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a 3-digit 7-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, in the case of push order A (left, middle, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order B (left, right, middle, correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the push order is displayed. In the case of C (middle left right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of , "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of pushing order F (right, middle, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to intuitively grasp the pressing order of the instruction monitor, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the display of the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the pushing order on the instruction monitor is any period from when the pushing order is won by an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch to when the stop switch becomes operable. is preferably the timing of With such a configuration, the pressing order can be notified before the player operates the stop switch, so it is possible to prevent the stop operation from being performed in an incorrect pressing order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)>
The role ratio monitor is the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio (selectable according to the specifications of the game machine), the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, and the role ratio among the latest 6000 games. It is a display device that switches and displays the ratio, the cumulative continuous role ratio, the cumulative role ratio, and the cumulative role object state ratio every 4800 ms. number can be displayed. The upper two digits of the four digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs are called an identification segment, and the lower two digits are called a ratio segment.

"Role" in the role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), the second type special role (so-called CB), and the ordinary role (so-called SB). ” is a ratio calculated by payout during operation of accessory/total payout×100. In addition, the payout in the operation of the type 1 special role product continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the type 2 special role product continuous operation device (so-called MB) is also included in the "payout during operation of the role product", but during the BB Payouts in general games and general games during MB are not included in the “payout during operation of the accessory”.

The "continuous role" in the continuous role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), and the "continuous role ratio" is the payout during operation of the first type special role / total payout It is a ratio calculated by ×100. Note that the payout in the operation of the type 1 special accessory continuous operation device (so-called BB) is also included in the "payout during the operation of the accessory", but the payout in the general game during the BB is the "payout during the operation of the accessory". not included in

The "instruction-inclusive role" in the instruction-inclusive role ratio includes the payout in the game (so-called AT) in which the instruction function is activated in the above-mentioned "accessory", and the "instruction-inclusive role ratio" , (payout during operation of instruction function or payout during operation of accessory)/total payout×100. Here, (payout while the instruction function is activated or payout while the accessory is in operation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is in operation and the accessory is activated, but the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated. It refers to the sum of the payouts of the game in which the number and the accessory are activated. If the game in which the instruction function was activated was the game in which the accessory was activated, instead of adding the two payouts, the payout during product operation). If the player makes a mistake in operating the stop switch in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained. In this case, the payout is calculated based on the actual payout.

Among the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the identification segment is the cumulative advantageous section ratio, the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio in the latest 6000 games, and the role ratio in the latest 6000 games. It is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the ratio, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio, the cumulative accessory ratio, and the cumulative accessory state ratio, and is indicated by "7U." and "7P. ”, “6Y.”, “7Y.”, “6A.”, “7A.”, “5H.”. For example, if "7U." It shows that it is a character ratio.

Of the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment is information for visually recognizing the calculation results of various ratios, and is displayed in two-digit numbers using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, when the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that the calculated results are rounded down to the nearest decimal point and displayed. Also, when the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. Also, when the total number of games is less than 400, the ratio segment is displayed as "00".

The identification segment is displayed in a flashing manner when the cumulative number of games is less than the reference number of games. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, 175,000 games in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 175,000 games in the case of the cumulative instructed accessory ratio, and the latest 6000 games. 6,000 games in the case of the continuous role ratio, 6,000 games in the case of the latest 6,000 games, and 17,500 games in the case of the cumulative continuous role ratio, In the case of the cumulative role item ratio, the number is 17,500 games, and in the case of the cumulative role item, etc. state ratio, the number is 175,000 games.

The ratio seg is displayed in a blinking manner when the displayed numerical value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 70 in the case of the cumulative instructed role ratio, and 70 in the case of the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games. 60 in the case of the latest 6000 game character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative continuous character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative total character ratios, etc. 50 for state ratios. If the total number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold value but "00" is displayed in the ratio segment, the ratio segment is displayed in a lighting mode.

In order to confirm whether the role ratio monitor can operate normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification seg and the ratio seg for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt processing is started. As a test pattern, all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs constituting the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking manner. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. The test pattern may be displayed at any timing during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM (RAM) abnormal error, in addition to the timing after power-on.

When the cumulative number of games in the identified segment is less than the reference number of games, when the displayed numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, and when the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment, the segment is displayed in a blinking manner. However, more specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between lighting and extinguishing at every 300 ms such as lighting 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→lit 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→ . . . Also, when the various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, thereby preventing the display period of various ratio information from becoming longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, the role ratio among the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous The character object ratio, the cumulative character object ratio, and the cumulative condition ratio of the character object, etc. are configured to switch the display contents every 4,800 ms, and this 4,800 ms is set to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking. By doing so, it is possible to configure so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit at the switching timing of the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor even when displaying in a blinking mode. becomes.

By configuring in this way, even at the timing when various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, so that it is possible to continuously display a display that does not give a sense of discomfort due to the fact that the blinking period does not deviate.

In addition, since the test pattern display period after the power is turned on is also set to 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED is turned off when the test pattern is displayed for 4800 ms. It is possible to display information about the instructed accessory ratio from lighting.

Next, a control method for blinking display on the role ratio monitor will be described.

In order to blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and lighting. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is a 2-byte storage area, and performs processing for adding 1 for each timer interrupt processing. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and then circulates between 0 and 299 each time timer interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the next value after 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is set to "0" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to " 1”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "0-299").

Example 2) If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off is "298" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off will be set to " 299”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "298-299").

Example 3) When the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is "299" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to " 0”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 0 (the carry flag is set to 0 because no carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "299-299").

As described above, if the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is any value from 0 to 298, the carry flag is set to 1, and the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to 1. If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for management is 299, carry flag=0. In other words, the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag becomes 0, the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated. The flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stored to 0) when the power is turned on. When 0 is stored in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, _FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, the display mode of the role ratio monitor changes between the lighting mode and the extinguishing mode every 300 ms. can be repeatedly displayed (blinking display).

When the display of the role ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode, if the total number of games in the identification segment is less than the reference number of games, if the display numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. Since it is one of the cases of displaying, in cases other than these cases, it is displayed in the lighting mode without referring to the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, regardless of whether or not the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referred to, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is updated for each timer interrupt process. ) is also updated as needed, and even when the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is switched from a non-referencing state to a referencing state, the timing of turning on and off and the switching timing of various ratio displays are displayed without deviation. becomes possible.

<Program start processing flow>
A program start process executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1, which is assumed, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it performs RAM check processing for setting the interrupt mode, setting the functions of the main CPU, and creating power failure recovery data. In the RAM check process, it is determined whether or not the checksum of all RAMs is normal. If the condition is satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be normal, and if the condition is not satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the states of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal are checked to determine whether or not the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

When the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is normal or whether the recovery is possible. If the power failure recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, the first initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the setting change process in FIG. 10 is performed. If the power failure recovery data is normal or not in a recoverable state, the second initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the setting change process in FIG. 10 is performed. Then, after the setting change process, the game proceeds to the main game shown in FIG.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not turned on, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power-off recovery data is abnormal or unrecoverable, an unrecoverable error is notified and the process shifts to unrecoverable error processing for stopping the progress of the game of the slot machine PS1. On the other hand, if the power-off recovery data is not abnormal or in an unrecoverable state, the power-off recovery process shown in FIG. 8 is performed. Then, after the power-off recovery process, the main game progress shown in FIG. 9 is entered. It should be noted that, after the power-off recovery process, the game returns to the saved state when the power-off is detected, so the process is not always executed from the beginning of the main game progress.

In the non-recoverable error processing, interrupts are prohibited, and the output of the output port (output of sub-control command, output of excitation signal to stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the display (announcement) of the error is repeated on the obtained number display 27 .

<Power off processing>
Power-off processing executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1, which is assumed, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the premised slot machine PS1, when the power switch 40 is turned off or when an event such as a power failure occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted (also referred to as a power failure), the operating voltage for operating the slot machine PS1 drops. Then, when the operating voltage falls below the threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power cutoff, generates a power cutoff detection signal, and the power cutoff detection signal is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the judgment processing for judging whether or not the power interruption detection signal of the timer interrupt processing is inputted, the power interruption processing is executed when it is judged that the power interruption detection signal is inputted. When determining whether or not the power-off detection signal is input in the timer interrupt process, the determination may be made by one timer interrupt process, or by two or more timer interrupt processes. good too. In other words, when judging whether or not the power supply has been turned off by multiple times of timer interrupt processing, even if it is judged that the power supply interruption detection signal has been input at the first time, the power supply interruption detection signal has not been input at the second time. If determined, the power-off process is not executed. This is to prevent power-off processing from being executed when noise or an instantaneous interruption (a state in which the voltage falls below the threshold for a moment but immediately rises above the threshold) occurs.

In the power-off process, the output port is cleared, interrupts that are periodically executed are prohibited, and the interrupt disable/enable state at power-off is saved. Next, the used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. When the data is saved, the power-off processing completed flag indicating that the power-off processing has been performed is turned on and saved, and the checksum data of all the RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then, writing to the RAM is prohibited, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the stored stack pointer, the presence or absence of a power-off processing completion flag, and whether or not the checksums of all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1, which is assumed, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The premised slot machine PS1 is configured such that timer interrupt processing occurs periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When the timer interrupt processing starts, the necessary data stored in the register is compared, and when the power-off detection signal is received, the power-off processing is executed, and the inputs of various sensors and operation switches are determined. , and measure various timers (freeze period measurement timer, wait period measurement timer, etc.), and as reel drive control, each reel is accelerating, rotating at constant speed, decelerating, decelerating, stopping Control and update of the driving state are performed according to any driving state. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data (such as an excitation signal for the stepping motor and a drive signal for the hopper 44) to be output for each output port, and it is checked whether or not various abnormalities have occurred. Various kinds of abnormalities include whether or not the current set value is a normal value, and whether or not the operation pattern of the input/discharge sensor is normal. Next, an external signal is output to set (on/off control) an external signal such as a bonus signal, an ART signal, a security signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal to be output to an external system such as a hall computer (S304).

Next, if there is a sub-control command set in the control command transmission process, it outputs the sub-control command to the sub-control board 1000, controls the lighting of various LEDs, and sub-controls such as stop switch operation sound and medal insertion sound. The notification data to be transmitted to the board is output, the signal related to the performance test is output, the register is restored, and the interrupt permission flag is turned on, thereby completing the timer interrupt processing.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the result of an internal lottery, a reel rotation start command when the reel starts accelerating, and a rotating reel. There are various commands such as a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and an all reel stop command by operating each stop switch for stopping.

Also, the timer measurement process may be performed in the timer interrupt process.
In the timer measurement, control processing is performed to update the information on the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, the process of updating the value stored in the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) that monitors (manages) the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) per game (for example, the process of subtracting 1) )I do. In addition to the RWM storage area for monitoring the minimum playing time, the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) for monitoring (managing) the insertion of game medals by the insertion button, and the output time of the external signal are monitored. It may have an RWM storage area related to a plurality of timers, such as an RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as a timer area C) to be (managed).
In this case, in the timer measurement, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area B, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area C, etc. A process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area) that stores information about the timer is executed. Further, when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0" and timer measurement is performed, the value stored in the certain timer area becomes "0". .

As the control process for updating the information about the timer stored in the RWM, the process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area has been exemplified. It can be processed.

Here, monitoring (management) of insertion of game medals by the insertion button will be described.
Monitoring (management) of insertion of game medals by the insertion button is a timer that counts after the bet processing is executed based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19, and the value of the timer becomes "0". It is a timer for not executing the process of determining whether or not the next 1-bet switch 19 has been operated until the next 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

For example, under a predetermined situation where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1-bet switch 19), the 1-bet switch 19 "20" is stored in the timer area B after the bet process is executed based on the operation of . After that, the value stored in the timer area B is subtracted by "1" by timer measurement in timer interrupt processing. Then, when the timer interrupt process is executed 20 times, the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0". If the value stored in the timer area B is not "0" (if the value stored in the timer area B is any of "1" to "20"), the game progress main process It is not judged whether or not the bed switch 19 has been operated. That is, even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in the timer area B is not "0", no bet processing is executed. After that, after the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0", the bet processing can be executed when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the bet processing from being executed a plurality of times due to an erroneous operation even though the 1-bet switch 19 is operated once. Further, when a malicious player repeatedly hits the 1-bet switch 19, the bet processing based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is executed a plurality of times, and commands based on the execution of the bet processing are continuously issued to the sub-control means 1000. You can prevent it from being sent to

<Power failure recovery process>
Power-off recovery processing executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1, which is assumed, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the premised slot machine PS1, when the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 40, the main control board 100 executes power-off recovery processing for restoring various data to the state before power-off.

In the power-off recovery process, the stack pointer is recovered, and the output data related to the sub-control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 1000 is recovered. After that, it is determined whether or not the set value data is within the normal range. As a result of the judgment, if it is abnormal (the value is out of the defined range), it shifts to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if normal (within a defined range of values), an unused RAM area is initialized, a periodically executed interrupt is activated, and the input port is read. After that, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, the used registers are restored, and the interrupt prohibition/permission state at the time of power-off is restored, and the power-off recovery processing is completed. It should be noted that when the power failure return processing is completed, the state before the power failure occurs is restored, and if it does not return (at the time of setting change), the game progress main control processing is performed from the beginning.

In the premised slot machine PS1, an interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing during the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may be activated after the power-off recovery process of the program start process.

<Description of main game progression>
A game progress main control process executed by the main control board 100 of the premised slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze effect number stored before the previous game, and executes the freeze effect when the stored freeze effect number corresponds to the number to execute the freeze effect, and saves the freeze effect. If the freeze effect number provided does not correspond to the number to execute the freeze effect, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the freeze effect. It may be configured so that the freeze effect number is not saved when the freeze effect is not executed. may be configured.

Next, when game medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (game medal insertion process). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of bets enabling the game to be executed has been placed, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 has been operated, and it is determined that no bet has been placed. In this case, it waits for the reception of operation of the bet switch if it is in the state of inserting game medals or in the state of being stored in credits (in the case of being in the state of being stored in credits). If the number of bets that makes the game executable has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (it is determined that the start switch signal is ON), internal lottery processing is performed and the start switch 12 has not been operated ( If it is not determined that the start switch signal is ON, the reception of the operation of the start switch 12 is waited.

In the internal lottery process, the internal lottery random numbers are generated and acquired, and a predetermined arithmetic process is executed to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After determining the winning combination, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and stop control is executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after allowing the stop switch operation acceptance after reel rotation. Prepare as much as possible.

The types of winning combinations provided in the slot machine PS1 are roughly classified into bonus, minor combination, and replay.

A bonus means a feature that is activated in a predetermined case. Generally, it is activated when the symbol combination of "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display window 4. FIG. Depending on the operation of the bonus-related accessory, the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number is changed, or the conditional device activation probability of the symbol combination related to winning for each specified number is changed. The bonus is divided into RB, BB, CB, MB and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called a first-class special bonus. RB is generally set as an end condition of obtaining 8 small wins or 12 game results, and during RB, RB middle win set higher than normal win lottery table winning probability of small win. A role lottery is performed using a lottery table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device for first-class special bonuses. BB is set as a termination condition of paying out more than 285 game medals related to winning a small role, and during BB, a BB medium role lottery table in which the probability of winning a small role (to be described later) is set higher than that of a normal role lottery table. Perform a role lottery using It should be noted that the BB middle winning lottery table may not be provided during the BB. For example, the BB middle winning lottery table may be referred to as a BB middle winning lottery table that continuously operates an RB middle winning lottery table, which will be described later, until the end condition of the BB is satisfied.

CB is an abbreviation for challenge bonus, and is also called a second type special accessory. The CB can be set in such a state that at least all minor winning combinations have been won regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery. Further, during CB, stop control different from normal stop control is performed for a predetermined reel. For example, it is conceivable to control the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds.

Since the CB is in a state where at least all of the small wins have been won as described above, the symbol combination that can be displayed according to the operation procedure may not be displayed (also referred to as a dropout). For example, during CB, by controlling the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds, if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific pattern can be placed on the effective line at any operation timing. Although it could be displayed, if it stops within 75 milliseconds, there may be a case where a specific pattern cannot be displayed at a specific operation timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device related to the second type special bonus. The MB is set as ending conditions such as payout of more than 153 medals associated with winning a small winning combination, winning of RB, or winning of SB, which will be described later.

SB is an abbreviation for a single bonus, and is also called an ordinary accessory. The SB is set as an end condition that the result of one game is obtained. During SB, a combination lottery is performed using an SB medium combination lottery table in which the probability of winning a small combination is set higher than that of a normal combination lottery table.

The BB in the premised slot machine PS1 uses the BB medium winning lottery table to draw a winning combination, but is not limited to this. A game may be played using a BB general role lottery table in which the winning probability of RB is increased and a RB medium role lottery table in which the probability of winning a minor role is set higher than that of the normal role lottery table. Even in this case, the BB still sets a payout exceeding 285 medals for winning a small winning combination as an end condition. In addition, what governs the control of these bonuses is generically called special game control means.

A small combination is a winning combination in which a combination of symbols based on the winning minor combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and medals are paid out based on the combination of symbols stopped and displayed when it is determined that a prize has been won by the winning determination process (described later). be.

In replay (also called replay role), the symbol combination based on the winning replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when it is determined as winning by the winning determination process, replay (automatically without inserting new medals) This is a combination that gives a game that allows the next game to be played by betting. Since the replay is never missed in the winning game, the next game after winning the replay is always a replay.

In the lottery result of the combination lottery, when none of the bonus combination, the minor combination, and the replay combination are won, the winning process described later is not performed because the winning combination is lost. When the player loses, the combination of symbols that does not relate to any combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Of the roles that are drawn by lottery, if the combination of symbols for BB, RB, and MB is not stop-displayed on the active line in the winning game, the winning flag can be carried over to the next game or later. It can be done (special role carryover means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role lottery may be performed using the role lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the carry-over medium role lottery table (also referred to as the internal lottery table or the internal medium lottery table) according to the winning flag. ) may be used to draw a winning combination. When the combination of symbols based on the winning BB, RB or MB is stop-displayed on the active line while using the carryover middle role lottery table, it is determined that the shift condition of the role lottery table is satisfied, and the carryover middle role is determined. The lottery table is shifted to the combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

Winning probabilities for a plurality of types of winning combinations are determined in the winning combination lottery table, and a plurality of types of winning combination lottery tables are provided according to the game state. For example, it corresponds to a BB middle winning lottery table used during BB, an MB middle winning lottery table used during MB, and the like.

In the combination lottery table, there are lotteries for single winning combinations in which one type of symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, and multiple winning combinations in which multiple symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on one or more activated lines. Set according to the result.

A plurality of symbol combinations set as overlapping winning hands may be set so that one winning hand can be stopped and displayed according to the operation mode of all the symbol combinations, or some of the symbol combinations cannot be stopped and displayed. can be set to Of the multiple winning combinations, the combination corresponding to a part of symbol combinations that cannot be stopped may be referred to as a control combination.

As for the role of the control service, even if the same symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line as a result of multiple lottery wins, the display will be stopped according to the type of control service set as a duplicate winning combination. It plays the role of being able to control the effective line to be different.

Winning flag control means turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination when any combination is won in the lottery result of the combination lottery. Then, when all the stop switches 13 are operated by the player to end the winning process for the winning combination, the flag corresponding to the winning combination is turned off.

As for BB, RB and MB mentioned above, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but when all the stop switches 13 are operated, the winning BB, RB or MB symbol combination is the valid line. If it is not stop-displayed above, the flag is carried over to the next game onwards, the above-mentioned carry-over middle role lottery table is set, and the symbol combination of BB, RB or MB that wins is stop-displayed and won. The flag corresponding to BB, RB or MB is turned off by completing the prize winning process for the role.

In addition, an RT combination lottery table is provided in the combination lottery table. RT is an abbreviation for replay time, which is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is different in a role lottery than in a normal role lottery table.

As a specific usage example of RT, the winning probability of replay may be increased by replacing the losing area of the normal combination lottery table with replay, or the replay area of the normal combination lottery table may be replaced with losing and replayed. You may make it reduce the winning probability of.
Further, although the area of the normal combination lottery table and the replay are the same, the type of replay to be won in the area of the replay may be made different.
The slot machine PS1 is provided with a plurality of RT combination lottery tables, each of which is configured to shift to another RT state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

The transition conditions for the RT combination lottery table are as follows. Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won, and transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, BB, RB, etc. Or when MB is finished, transition condition 4 is when a specified number of games have been played after a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, and transition condition 5 is when BB, RB, or This is when the specified number of games have been played after the MB is finished. These RT combination lottery table transition conditions can be appropriately set according to game characteristics.

The number is the winning number of each lottery result determined in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means. Also, the sum of the respective numbers is 65536. For example, the winning probability of the lottery result of the number 4 is 1/16384.

In addition, when any one of transition conditions 1 to 5 of the above-described RT combination lottery table is satisfied, the set number relating to replay can be changed. For example, the replay probability of RT1 is 1/7.3, and when the game shifts from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability of RT2 may be changed to 1/1.5. As a result, by shifting to a state where the replay probability is high, it is possible to suppress the decrease in medals and add interest to the game.

Next, it is checked whether the minimum playing time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has passed. If it is determined that the minimum playing time has passed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum playing time timer is 0), the minimum playing time is newly set, and if it is determined that the minimum playing time has not passed ( If it is not determined that the value of the minimum game time timer is 0), it is checked whether or not the minimum game time has passed after decrementing the value of the minimum game time timer. This minimum game time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, and other processes are executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum game time and the process of newly setting the minimum game time. configured not to. As a result, since the minimum game time is not extended by other processes, the game time of the player can be made available as soon as possible. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed without making the player wait.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another process may be executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum playing time and the process of newly setting the minimum playing time. Other processing in this case may be processing for clearing the RWM address, processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other instructions with short processing times. Since the processing time for these processes is extremely short, the user cannot experience the extension of the minimum playing time. After newly setting the minimum playing time, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed.

In the reel rotation start preparation process, the data relating to the spinning reel stop saved in the previous game is initialized, the stop table used in the current game is set, the rotation start output of all reels is requested, and the reel rotation start is started. Set the sub-control command (reel rotation start command) shown.

The stop table is provided corresponding to the symbol control number determined by the result of the combination lottery by the internal lottery means, and predetermines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13 .

After the reel rotation start preparation process is completed, a process relating to a freeze effect (for example, a reel effect before reel rotation) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are slightly moved or reversely rotated, mainly to indicate the degree of expectation of the winning combination.

When the freeze effect is not executed, or after the freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect is completed, the reel rotation process (also referred to as reel rotation process, reel rotation start process, or reel rotation start process) is performed. Run. There are four reel rotation states: an acceleration state, a constant speed rotation state, a stop preparation state, and a stop state. When the reel is to be rotated, the acceleration state is set. In the acceleration state, the stepping motor is gradually rotated by timer interrupt processing.

Acceleration processing executed in the acceleration state is processing executed from a state in which reel rotation is stopped to a constant speed rotation processing. In the constant speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step each time the timer interrupt is processed. become more sexual. Therefore, an acceleration process is required to gradually rotate the reels. In the assumed acceleration process in the slot machine PS1, the stepping motor is first moved by one step after 50 timer interrupts are processed, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after 30 timer interrupts are processed, and then 10 times. The stepping motor is moved by one step after the timer interrupt processing of , then the stepping motor is moved by one step after the timer interrupt processing is performed five times, the stepping motor is moved by one step after the timer interrupt processing is performed twice, and then the stepping motor is moved by one step. After one timer interrupt process, the stepping motor is moved by one step. After that, it is connected to a constant-speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each timer interrupt process.

When the constant-speed rotation process is being executed, the value of the above-described rotation failure detection counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process to detect rotation failure. Since the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing. It is decremented, and it may be determined that the rotation failure is detected at the timing when it becomes 0.

In addition, in the constant speed rotation state, the stop reception of the stop switch is permitted, and the operation of the stop switch is waited. When the stop acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, the lamp of the stop switch is lit in blue to inform the player that the stop switch is valid (when the stop acceptance of the stop switch is not permitted, the red light is lit). The lighting control of the stop switch lamp may be performed by the main control means 100 or by the sub-control means 1000 . Further, as lighting control of the lamps of the stop switches, when executing push order navigation, the lamps of the stop switches may be flashed so that the player can easily recognize the stop switch to be stopped. .

Also, a command indicating that the reel has started rotating is transmitted to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives the command, a reel rotation time measurement timer for measuring the rotation time of the reel is set and counted. Start. Then, when the value of the reel rotation time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (time equivalent to 3 minutes), the message "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) is displayed on the liquid crystal to prompt the player to rotate the reels. encourage rotation. The reel rotation time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and if there is a reel that is still spinning, it counts again. In this way, the reel rotation time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels are stopped.

In addition, if the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, by displaying it in front of the push order navigation, when the display area of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlaps Also, the visibility of the reel stop warning image is ensured, and the player can be clearly urged to operate the stop switch. Also, at this time, the push order navigation becomes difficult to see and there is a risk that you will not know which reel to stop. The warning image may be made smaller or moved) so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling reception of operation of the stop switch in the game progress main processing, determination processing of reception of operation of the stop switch (reel stop reception check processing) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. When it is determined that one of the stop switches has been operated, stop control (also referred to as slip control) of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch shifts from the constant speed rotation state to the stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel is rotated to the target stop position while rotating at a constant speed. Then, when it reaches the target stop position, it shifts to a stop state, and all the four-phase excitations are turned ON to apply the brakes. Slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch 13 is operated. In the premised slot machine PS1, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, it is possible to pull in symbols up to four symbols ahead.

Here, the target stop position is determined by whether or not the pattern number currently passing and the pattern number saved as the stop position match. All 4-phase excitation is turned ON as a position. Also, the pattern number currently passing means that the initial pattern number is set at the moment the index sensor detects the index (when the index signal rises), and the initial pattern number is moved by one pattern by timer interrupt processing. It is judged by setting the pattern number next to the pattern number.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it is checked whether all the reels are stopped. When all reels are stopped, winning judgment processing is executed and then winning processing is executed, and when all reels are not stopped, stop operation reception waiting processing of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is executed. . Then, after all the reels have stopped, the contents displayed on the status display monitor are updated, and the process proceeds to advantageous section clear counter management processing. Then, a game end check process for updating the RT status, etc. is performed, and a series of main flow of the game progress is finished. Note that the software random number update process may be performed during the period from when the reel starts to rotate until the stop operation is received.

Winning judgment processing is processing for judging whether or not the combination of symbols forming a winning combination has been stopped on the activated line. In order to determine whether or not the stop symbol determined when the operation of the stop switch is abnormal, the symbol combination actually stopped on the active line is not used for determination. After it is determined by the prize determination process that the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination has been stopped and displayed on the activated line, the winning process is performed, and it is not determined by the winning determination process that the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. If it does, perform processing based on the loss.

Winning process is a process of awarding a privilege to a player based on a combination of symbols to be stopped on an activated line. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a minor combination is stopped includes payout of medals based on the stopped symbol combination, processing of shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination, and symbol combination based on replay. As the winning process when the is stopped, it is the process of giving the right to replay and the process of shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination, and the winning process when stopping the symbol combination based on the bonus is a process of shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. In addition, in the case of a loss, the winning process is not performed.

However, without being limited to this, when the result of the winning determination process is a loss, the winning process based on the losing process may be performed, and as a result of the winning process, no benefit may be given to the player. Further, as the winning process based on the loss, the game state may be shifted according to the operation mode when the game is lost. For example, when all the stop switches 13 are operated in accordance with a predetermined operation order when losing, a transition to a game state with a different freeze winning probability can be mentioned. In addition, even in the case of an apparent loss due to the omission of a small winning combination, it is possible to carry out a prize winning process such as controlling the transition of the game state such as the transition to the RT state without paying out. Furthermore, as a winning process based on a bonus, payout of medals based on the stop-displayed symbol combination or giving the right to replay may be added.

The process of transitioning the game state includes setting the combination lottery table according to the game state to be shifted, setting the reel control according to the game state to be shifted, and setting the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be shifted. or a combination thereof.

In the winning determination process, when the winning symbol combination is determined, the winning symbol combination information (stopped eye information) stopped and displayed on the active line and the winning lottery result information are transmitted to the sub-control board 1000 . On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives these pieces of information, it can use the display device 32, the lamp, or the speaker S to output an effect according to the winning symbol combination information and the combination lottery result information.

In the winning determination process, winning is determined on all active lines, and as a result of the determination, when a plurality of symbol combinations based on overlapping winning hands are stopped and displayed on a plurality of activated lines, the stop-displayed multiple symbol combinations are displayed. Winning processing is performed for each.

For example, when a small winning combination with a payout number of 2 and a small combination with a payout number of 10 are stopped and displayed on a plurality of active lines, the winning processing is performed as a small winning combination with a payout number of 2. 12 coins are paid out by summing the number of coins to be paid out based on 10 and the number of coins to be paid out based on the set minor combination.

An upper limit is set for the number of payouts for one time, and when the upper limit of the number of payouts is exceeded when the combination of symbols based on a plurality of small wins is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the number of payouts of the upper limit is paid out. .

For example, when the upper limit of the number of payouts is set to 15, and the small winning combination with the number of payouts set at 12 and the small combination with the number of payouts set at 10 are stopped on a plurality of active lines. As the winning process, when the total value of the small winning combination of 12 coins and the small winning combination of 10 coins exceeds the upper limit value, the upper limit value of 15 coins is paid out.

The premised slot machine PS1 is set to pay out medals only for small wins, but as winning processing based on replays, medals equal to the number of bets may be paid out, or winning processing based on bonuses may be performed. You may pay out the number of medals preset as .

<Advantageous Section Clear Counter Management Processing>
Among the processes executed by the game progression main of the slot machine PS1, the advantageous zone clear counter management process relating to the management of the advantageous zones will be described with reference to FIG.

Set the advantageous interval clear counter RWM address.

Subsequently, a 2-byte subtraction process is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, and if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, a process of determining whether or not the advantageous section type is 0 is executed. Then, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is 0 or not. Advantageous section type = 0 means that the section is not an advantageous section and that it is a normal section, and advantageous section type = 1 means that it is an advantageous section.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is 0. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to RWM initialization processing. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0, the process proceeds to the process of acquiring the value of the MY counter.

Subsequently, in the process of acquiring the value of the MY counter, the current value of the MY counter is acquired.

Subsequently, after executing the processing for acquiring the value of the MY counter, it is determined whether or not the regame operation symbols are stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the regame operation symbols are stopped and displayed, the value of the MY counter is determined. has exceeded the upper limit value (2400), and if it is determined that the replay operation symbol is not stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to the process of acquiring the payout number buffer data. The data of the payout number buffer is data indicating the number of payouts related to winning, and no payout (the number of payouts is 0) when a win or a small winning combination is missed.

Subsequently, in the process of acquiring the data of the payout number buffer, the number of payouts for the game is acquired.

Subsequently, a process of adding the acquired payout number buffer data (OUT number) to the MY counter is executed.

Subsequently, a process of acquiring game medal count data is executed. The data on the number of game medals is data corresponding to the number of inserted medals.

Subsequently, a process of subtracting the IN number (the number of inserted sheets) from the MY counter is executed.

Subsequently, when it is determined that the value of the MY counter is less than 0 as a result of subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter, an initial value is set in the MY counter and stored in the MY counter. If it is determined that the value of the MY counter is not less than 0 as a result of subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter, the value obtained by subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter is stored in the MY counter. Note that the initial value of the MY counter is 0, which means that when the value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, it is corrected to 0. Whether or not the value of the MY counter is less than 0 is determined by whether the carry flag is 0 or not. The carry flag is a flag that becomes 1 when the subtraction process results in a negative value, and becomes 0 when the subtraction process does not result in a negative value.

Subsequently, after saving the value of the MY counter, the process of determining whether or not the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit (2400) is executed. If the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit (2400), the RWM initialization process is executed and the process shifts to the advantageous section type determination process. The section clear counter management process is ended, and if the advantageous section type is not 0, the initial value (1500) is set to the advantageous section clear counter, and the advantageous section clear counter management process is ended. Further, if the value of the MY counter does not exceed the upper limit (2400) in the process of determining whether the value of the MY counter has exceeded the upper limit (2400), the advantageous section clear counter management process ends.

Judging whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, and if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0 and the advantageous section type is not 0, the processing that is passed at the start of the advantageous section , and this process is not passed except at the start of the advantageous section. The number 1500 stored in the advantageous interval clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in the advantageous interval. This is to prevent addiction, suppress the state in which the number of medals continues to increase throughout the day, and prevent the gambling spirit from being remarkably aroused.

As for the timing of setting the advantageous section type to 1, it is executed in the advantageous section transition lottery process between the reception of the start switch and the start of rotation of the reels. Advantageous section transition lottery processing is a process that is passed when the condition device number to be the target of the lottery is selected. set the advantageous section type to 0 (normal section).

In the RWM initialization process that is executed after the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit, all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function are updated to zero. The parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games and the game state related to AT. Then, by updating the advantageous section type to 0, it becomes a normal section that is not an advantageous section, and when the value of the MY counter is 2400 or less, the advantageous section is maintained and the process ends. In addition, when the replay is won in the advantageous section, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of replay, OUT-IN is always 0 because the same number of bets as the inserted number is automatically betted. However, there is a possibility that the value of the MY counter will be updated at a timing different from the original processing due to noise or fraud, so it is determined whether or not the MY counter has reached the upper limit even during replay.

In addition, the advantageous interval can be terminated at any timing for each gaming machine other than the lapse of 1500 games or exceeding MY2400. For example, when winning a final lottery when a predetermined combination is won, or when an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games) are executed. In this way, when the advantageous interval is terminated with an arbitrary termination opportunity, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1 before the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is executed (it is desirable that the AT-related processing is executed after all reels are stopped). By setting , when the advantageous interval clear counter management process is executed, the advantageous interval clear counter is 1 before subtraction, the advantageous interval clear counter subtraction result is 0, and the advantageous interval clear counter management processing can be terminated. That is, after setting the value of the advantageous interval clear counter to 1, by subtracting 1 from the counter value, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter becomes 0 and the advantageous interval can be terminated. This makes it possible to perform processing within the same module without using a separate advantageous section termination module when an arbitrary termination condition is achieved.

Also, the advantageous interval clear counter subtraction processing in the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is configured to be executed in any gaming state in any number of bets (when a plurality of prescribed numbers are set for the gaming machine). there is

<Setting change processing>
Setting change processing executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1, which is assumed, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting change mode starts, it determines whether the current set value is within the normal range.If it is within the normal range, the current set value is obtained. Save "1" and get the setting value "1".

After obtaining the set value, save the set value display data. After saving the set value display data, the set value display data is referenced every 5 interrupts and lighting control is performed by dynamic lighting control, which is timer interrupt processing.

After that, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 has been turned on from off. When it is determined that the start switch 12 has not turned on from off, it is determined whether or not the setting switch has turned on from off.

Here, when it is determined that the setting switch has not turned on from off, it is determined again whether or not the start switch 12 has turned on from off, and when it is determined that the setting switch has turned on from off, Determine whether or not the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than the maximum value, increment the current set value. conduct. After the set value is incremented, the updated set value is displayed, and the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the start switch 12 has been turned on from off.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has been turned from off to on, the setting value is confirmed, and the setting key switch is waited until it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off from on. When it is determined that is changed from on to off, the determined set value is stored in the main control RAM, the setting display LED is turned off, and the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned on (because the medals flow down to the hopper 44 ) to end the setting change mode.

Here, the setting change mode is means for determining one of setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6 on display). After any setting value is determined, the internal lottery table (also referred to as a winning lottery table) corresponding to the determined setting value is continuously set until the setting value is changed by the setting change means. A combination lottery table is provided in which the determination probability of the lottery result by the internal lottery (the winning probability of the combination) differs for each set value.

The setting change means holds the setting key at a rotational position where a setting key switch signal is turned on when the setting key used for setting change is turned on by the manager of the game arcade while the power of the slot machine PS1 is not turned on. When the power of the slot machine PS1 is turned on in this state, the setting key switch signal is turned on with the turning on of the power of the slot machine PS1. In the premised slot machine PS1, turning on the setting key switch signal means rising on (turning from off to on). Since the ON state of the rising edge is not detected after the power is turned on, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode. Even if there is, if the setting key is on when the power is turned on again, the setting change mode may be entered.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door opening signal is on, and the setting changeable flag is on, the setting change means can change the setting value of the slot machine PS1. start mode.

The setting changeable flag switches between ON and OFF according to the game state. For example, it is conceivable that the setting changeable flag is turned off during the period from when the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and the setting changeable flag is turned on during the rest of the period. However, the configuration is not limited to this mode, and the setting changeable flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game is started or when a specific bonus is in progress. It may be configured so that the setting can be changed in any state.

When the setting change mode is activated, a blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off so that the game cannot be started by inserting medals. There are 6 levels of set value data that can be changed in the setting change mode: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Set a high winning lottery table.

After starting the setting change mode, the setting display LED provided on the rear surface of the front panel PS2 is turned on to indicate that the setting change mode is activated. Then, set value display data for displaying the set value data is set, and the credit number display 26 arranged on the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the credit amount display device 26 arranged on the rear surface of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are displayed. A setting display LED (not shown) is turned on to display the setting value. When the set value data is "1", the set value display displays "1", when the set value data is "2", the set value display displays "2", and when the set value data is "3". If the set value data is "4", the set value display will display "4", and if the set value data is "5", the set value display will display "5". ” is displayed, and when the set value data is “6”, “6” is displayed as the set value display.

In addition, when the set value data stored in the set value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5", the set value display when the set value data is "0" is "1". When the set value data is "1", the set value display displays "2", when the set value data is "2", the set value display displays "3", and the set value data is " When the set value data is "3", the set value display displays "4", when the set value data is "4", the set value display displays "5", and when the set value data is "5", the set value display displays "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether or not the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on. The setting value is determined and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. In other words, when it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting switch signal has been turned on without determining that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on, the setting switch start-up data is cleared and the current set value is the maximum set value. (set value data "6") or more, and if it is determined that the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "6"), the set value data is cleared (set value data to "1"), and if it is determined that the current set value is less than the maximum set value (set values "1" to "5"), the current set value is incremented. As for the processing of the setting change mode when the set value data is set in six stages from 0 to 5, it is determined whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the maximum set value (set value data "5"), When it is determined that the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "5"), the set value data is cleared (the set value data is set to "0") and the current set value becomes the maximum set value. When it is determined to be less than the value (set value "0" to "4"), the current set value may be incremented.

As a setting value display mode of the setting display LED when it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is ON after the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED indicates that the setting value cannot be changed. 0", or "_X" ("X" is the set value after confirmation) on the setting display LED, etc. may be displayed.

<Control corresponding to power off during pressing of various switches of slot machine PS1 assumed>
The front panel PS2 is in a closed state, the game has ended, 3-bet has not been made (including situations where automatic betting has not been made), and the number of credits equal to or greater than the number of 3-bets is stored ( For example, the number of credits is 3 or more when no bet is placed, or the number of credits is 2 or more when 1 bet is placed. ) When the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bed lamps and 3 bed lamps are off).

Note that not only when the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, but also when the front panel PS2 is in the open state, the game is over and 3 bets have not been made (situation where automatic betting has not been made). ), and a credit number greater than or equal to 3 bets is stored (for example, the number of credits is 3 or more when no bet is made, or 2 or more when 1 bet is made). Under the circumstances, when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (depressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit ( The 1-bed lamp, the 2-bed lamp, and the 3-bed lamp are turned off before the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed). In the following, unless otherwise specified, when the power is turned on, the front panel PS2 is in a closed state, but the same behavior may be performed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open. .

In addition, the MAX bet possible state includes a situation in which no bet is placed, a situation in which one bet is placed, and a situation in which two bets are placed. When the lamp is newly lit, it is a state where no bet is placed, that is, when the maximum bet is possible. 2 bed lamps and 3 bed lamps are lit, and in the MAX bed possible state, which is a situation where 2 bed lamps are already lit, the 3 bed lamp is newly lit in the situation where the 1 bed lamp and 2 bed lamp are already lit It has become.

In addition, in the MAX bet possible state, the MAX bet lamp is lit to inform the player that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. When the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the MAX bet lamp is on in the MAX bet possible state (when the sensor for detecting the MAX bet switch 18 turns from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp is extinguished. In other words, even while the MAX bed switch 18 is being pressed (a state in which the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 is kept ON), the MAX bed lamp lights out.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed. When it is done (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed. Further, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed, a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be performed. In other words, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is ON), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet processing cannot be performed.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the MAX bet switch 18 when the power is turned on after a power failure (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18, etc.), the bet will be accepted. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bed lamp. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, releases the MAX bet switch 18 that has been pressed (after the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 turns from ON to OFF), By pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (by turning the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 from OFF to ON), it is possible to place a MAX bet (perform a MAX bet process).

Also, for example, when the return spring or sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 malfunctions before and after the power is turned off, and the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed down and the MAX bed lamp is lit, MAX It is possible to inform the administrator that the bet processing is not possible, but that the software is not malfunctioning.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed. When it is done (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed, but the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed). (When the sensor for detecting the 1-bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1-bet process can be executed.

As a result, for example, even if the MAX bed switch 18 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as when the hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18), the MAX bed lamp The lighting mode of indicates that bet processing is possible, and suggests that the 1-bet switch 19 can be operated. Also, even in such a case, since the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is valid, the game can be progressed.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bed lamp may or may not be on after the power is turned on. If the MAX bet lamp is lit after the power is turned on, it suggests that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the 3 bet state becomes the 1 bet state, and credits The difference "2" is returned (if the number of credits is 50 in the 3-bet state, the difference cannot be returned to credits, so even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, the 1-bet state does not occur and 3 In order to maintain the bed state, the MAX bed lamp does not light up (turns off) after the power is turned on). When the MAX bet lamp is turned off after the power is turned on, it is possible to suggest that the MAX bet process has been executed. In addition, even if the MAX bet lamp is on or off after the power is turned on, a 3 bet sound (1 bet sound for 3 times) is output when the power is turned on to inform that the MAX bet process has been executed. It becomes possible to

Subsequently, when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated (depressed) in the MAX-bet possible state (situation where no bet is placed), 1 is stored as the bet number and the 1-bet lamp lights up. In addition, since the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is still valid, the MAX bed lamp is also lit.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and If the power is turned on while the is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the 1-bet switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the 1-bet process is completed. It is no longer running. Further, since the 1-bet switch 19 is being pressed, a new 1-bet process by pressing the 1-bet switch 19 cannot be performed.

As a result, even if there is an unintended operation of the 1-bet switch 19 when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where a hand is placed on the 1-bet switch 19), the bet will be accepted. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to notify that the bet processing is possible by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp, and to suggest that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated. ing. For this reason, the player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 or the 1 bet switch 19 is effective, releases the pressed 1 bet switch 19 (the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 changes from ON to OFF). After becoming), press the 1 bed switch 19 again, or without releasing the pressed 1 bed switch 19 (the sensor of the 1 bed switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed (by turning the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 from OFF to ON), 1 bet processing or MAX bet processing can be performed.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and When the power is turned on while the is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the 1 bet process is not executed, but the MAX bet switch 18 is newly activated By operating (pressing), the MAX bet process can be executed.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the 1 bed switch 19 when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the 1 bed switch 19), the MAX bed lamp , it is possible to notify that the bet processing is possible and to suggest that the MAX bet switch 18 can be operated. Also, even in such a case, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, the game can be progressed.

In addition, in the state where the maximum bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the 1-bet switch 19 is being pressed. 1-bet process may be executed when the power-off recovery process is executed). In this case, the MAX bet lamp lights up after the power is turned on, suggesting that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the 1 bet state changes to the 3 bet state. Further, by outputting a 1-bet sound when the power is turned on, it is possible to notify that the 1-bet process has been executed.

In addition, in a state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 It may be in a situation where it is not open or already open), when the power is turned on while the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open (power off When the return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed, but under the condition that the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, a new 1 bet switch 19 can be operated (depressed) to execute the 1-bet process. In addition, in a state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 It may be in a situation where it is not open or already open), when the power is turned on while the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open (power off When the return processing is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet processing is not executed, but the MAX bet switch 18 is released and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (depressed) again. Thus, the MAX bet process can be executed. In this case, even if the 1-bet switch 19 or the MAX-bet switch 18 is newly pressed and the 1-bet process or the MAX-bet process is executed, the 1-bet sound and the 3-bet sound are not output. Alternatively, the 1-bet switch 19 or the MAX-bet switch 18 is newly pressed, and the 1-bet process or the MAX-bet process is executed, so that a 3-bet is made and the front panel PS2 is open. Below, when the start switch 12 is operated (depressed), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel rotates, but the start sound may not be output.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the MAX bet switch 18 when the power is turned on after a power failure (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18, etc.), the bet will be accepted. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bed lamp.

Also, for example, when the return spring or sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 malfunctions before and after the power is turned off, and the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed down and the MAX bed lamp is lit, MAX It is possible to inform the administrator that the bet processing is not possible, but that the software is not malfunctioning.

In addition, even if the front panel PS2 is open, by enabling the 1-bet processing by the 1-bet switch 19, the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, setting confirmation and administrator menu , etc.), it is possible to check whether or not the 1-bet process can be performed normally. In games at amusement arcades, it is not normal to play a game with the front panel PS2 open. Become.

In addition, in a state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 It may be in a situation where it is not open or already open), when the power is turned on while the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open (power off When the return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp is not lit, the MAX bet process is not executed, and even if the 1-bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1-bet process is not executed. When the front panel PS2 is closed (closed is detected) while the MAX bed switch 18 is being operated (pressed down), the MAX bed lamp lights up, and when the 1 bed switch 19 is newly operated (pressed down) A mode in which 1-bet processing is possible may also be possible.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the MAX bet switch 18 when the power is turned on after a power failure (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18, etc.), the bet will be accepted. In addition, by not lighting the MAX bet lamp, the player can be made to recognize that the game cannot proceed. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the operation (pressing) of the MAX bet switch 18 continues, by validating the bet operation with the 1 bet switch 19, the progress of the game is not hindered as much as possible. It becomes possible to

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage drops below the threshold value and the gaming machine cannot operate. When the power is turned on while the bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet process and the 1 bet process are not executed. Further, in this case, when the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is being continuously pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is newly operated (depressed), the MAX bet processing can be executed. Similarly, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, When the power is turned on while the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed (when power-off recovery processing is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet processing and 1-bet processing are not executed. When the 1-bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed, and the 1-bet switch 19 is newly operated (depressed), the 1-bet process can be executed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on after a power failure, the MAX bed switch 18 and the 1 bed switch 19 are unintentionally operated (a situation where the MAX bed switch 18 and 1 bed switch 19 are placed on etc.), and even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bed lamp. can be done. Also, even in such a case, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 is effective, the game can be progressed.

The front panel PS2 is in a closed state, the game has been completed, no bet has been placed (replay is not activated), and normal effects are being displayed (states other than continuous effects and AT effects) or demo When the sub-switch 20 is operated (depressed) (when the sensor that detects the sub-switch 20 changes from OFF to ON) while the screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a menu screen displayable state), the menu screen is displayed. is executed, and a menu screen is displayed on the display device 32 .

In addition, in the state where the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub-switch 20 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. When the sub-switch 20 sensor is kept ON and the power-off recovery process is executed, the sub-switch lamp lights up and the menu screen is not displayed.

As a result, for example, even if the sub-switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as when a hand is placed on the sub-switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power failure, the unintended menu screen is displayed. Instead of displaying the sub-switch lamp, the lighting mode of the sub-switch lamp indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, thereby suggesting that the sub-switch 20 can be operated. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the sub-switch 20 is valid releases the depressed sub-switch 20 (after the sensor of the sub-switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then the sub-switch is activated again. By pressing 20 (by turning the sensor of the sub switch 20 from OFF to ON), display processing of the menu screen can be performed.

In addition, in the state where the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub-switch 20 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. In this case (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the sub-switch lamp may be lit and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the intention to press the subswitch 20 is reflected, and the menu screen can be displayed immediately after the power is turned on. Further, by turning on the subswitch lamp, the decision operation of each item on the menu screen is valid. can be suggested.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are in a state in which the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and the gaming machine cannot operate. When the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are being pressed (when the power failure recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and the sub switch 20 is pressed. The switch lamp lights up and the menu screen is not displayed. Further, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed, a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be performed. In other words, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is ON), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet processing cannot be performed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on after a power failure, the MAX bed switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18 and the sub switch 20, etc.) It is possible to prevent unintentional bets and display of the menu screen even if there is a bet, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp lights up to indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective. In addition, the lighting mode of the sub-switch lamp informs that the menu screen display process is possible, thereby suggesting that the sub-switch 20 can be operated.

Also, for example, when the return spring or sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 malfunctions before and after the power is turned off, and the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed down and the MAX bed lamp is lit, MAX It is possible to inform the administrator that the bet processing is not possible, but that the software is not malfunctioning.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are in a state in which the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and the gaming machine cannot operate. When the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are being pressed (when the power failure recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and the sub switch 20 is pressed. The switch lamp may be turned on and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the intention to press the subswitch 20 is reflected, and the menu screen can be displayed immediately after the power is turned on. Further, by turning on the subswitch lamp, the decision operation of each item on the menu screen is valid. can be suggested. In this case, even after the menu screen is displayed, the MAX bet lamp continues to light up to notify that the MAX bet process can be executed.

The front panel PS2 is in a closed state, the game has been completed, no bet has been placed (replay is not activated), and the number of credits is 1 or more (hereinafter referred to as a settlement possible state). Then, when the settlement switch is operated (depressed), the settlement process is executed, and the medals stored in the credit are paid out to the receiving tray 28 .

In addition, in the settlement possible state, when the power supply is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and the game machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON), and the settlement is made. When the power is turned on while the switch is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the settlement switch is ON), the MAX bed lamp lights up and the settlement process is not executed. Further, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is pushed while the settlement switch is being pushed, the MAX bet processing is not executed.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the checkout switch when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as when a hand is placed on the checkout switch), the unintended checkout process can be executed. In addition, since it is possible to notify that there are medals left in the credits by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the seat with the credits left.

Also, in the settlement possible state, if the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (power When the disconnection return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the settlement process is not executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX bet process is executed. good.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the checkout switch when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as when a hand is placed on the checkout switch), the unintended checkout process can be executed. In addition, since the operation of the MAX bet switch is effective, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered as much as possible, thereby not reducing the interest in the game.

Also, in the settlement possible state, if the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (power When the disconnection recovery process is executed), the MAX bed lamp may be turned on and the settlement process may be executed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on before the opening of the amusement arcade, if the power is turned on while the checkout switch is being operated (such as when a hand is placed on the checkout switch), the power is turned on. Since the settlement process can be executed immediately after the opening, the work of turning on the power before opening the store and the work of settlement of the medals remaining in the credit can be simplified.

Also, in the settlement possible state, if the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (power When the disconnection recovery process is executed), the lamp of the sub-switch 20 is lit and the operation of the sub-switch 20 is valid regardless of whether the settlement process is executed or not. (The menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the sub-switch 20).

As a result, for example, even if the settlement switch is operated unintentionally when the power is turned on after a power failure, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the subswitch 20, and the game history can be confirmed and the volume can be checked on the menu screen. It is possible to view and change information useful for the game, such as adjustments. Also, by validating all the operations related to the progress of the game at this time, all the games other than the payment can be executed. The settlement process is used only at the end of the game, and adjusting the number of inserted medals without executing the settlement process does not put the player at a disadvantage, thus hindering the progress of the game as much as possible. It is possible to run without

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible and the settlement is possible, power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed, When the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet processing and settlement processing are not executed. there is Also, in this case, when the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is being pressed down, and the MAX bet switch 18 is newly operated (depressed), the MAX bet processing can be executed, and the MAX bet switch is activated. When the settlement switch is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is being continuously pressed, and the settlement switch is newly operated (depressed) while the MAX bet switch 18 is being continuously pressed, settlement processing can be executed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on after a power failure, there is a situation where the MAX bed switch 18 and the settlement switch are unintentionally operated (a situation where a hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18 and the settlement switch, etc.). However, it is possible to prevent being betted and to prevent settlement processing. In addition, it is possible to accurately notify that there are medals remaining in the credit and that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective, by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp.

When the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, the game has been completed, and 3 bets have been made (including the case where replay is in operation) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotatable state), the start switch 12 is turned on. When operated (depressed), reel rotation processing is executed, and each reel rotates. It should be noted that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum game time has passed.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is cut off while the reels are rotatable and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the start lamp lights up, but none of the reels rotate.

As a result, for example, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the start switch 12), the unintended rotation of the reel is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from using the bet game medium unintentionally, and even in such a case, the start lamp indicates that the operation of the start switch 12 is effective. can be accurately notified by the lighting mode.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is cut off while the reels are rotatable and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light and none of the reels may rotate. In such a case, when the operation of the start switch 12 is finished (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned off), the start lamp may be turned on.

As a result, for example, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the start switch 12), the unintended rotation of the reel is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally using the game medium that has been bet. It is possible for the player to recognize that the reels do not rotate until the operation is finished, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is finished, the start lamp lights up, indicating that the operation of the start switch 12 is valid. can be reported accurately.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is cut off while the reels are rotatable and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed) may be a mode in which all the reels rotate.

As a result, the start switch 12 is operated until the power supply is cut off in the reel rotatable state and the operating voltage momentarily falls below the threshold, and then the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, When the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is being operated (when the power-off recovery process is executed), all the reels rotate after the power is turned on. Even if the start switch 12 is operated at appropriate timing, the game can be progressed (all reels are rotated), and the labor of the player can be reduced and the game tempo can be improved.

In a situation where the front panel PS2 is closed, all the reels are rotating, and the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid (hereinafter referred to as a reel stop possible state), the stop switch 13 is operated. When (pressed down) (when one of the sensors for detecting the left stop switch 13a, the middle stop switch 13b, and the right stop switch 13c turns from OFF to ON), the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stop control processing is executed, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 is stopped. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to the state in which all the reels are rotating, and the state in which any one reel is rotating can also be referred to as the reel stoppable state.

In the reel stoppable state, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is in a lighting mode indicating that it is effective. It has a lighting mode indicating that the constituent LED is invalid.

Here, the unstoppable state of the reel is a state in which the operation of the stop switch 13 is not accepted even though the reel is rotating (during detection of rotation failure or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated). or when the reels are not rotating (such as when all the reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated while the left reel is stopped).

Further, the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is effective is a mode of lighting in white or a mode of lighting in a color such as red, and the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is ineffective. The lighting mode indicating is a mode in which the light is turned off (extinguished) or a mode in which the lighting is performed in a lighting color (for example, blue) different from the lighting color indicating that it is effective.

In addition, in a state where the reel can be stopped, power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the game machine cannot operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed. In the case where the left stop switch 13a sensor is kept ON and the power-off recovery process is executed), the stop control process is not executed for the left reel. Further, when the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is being pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is in a lighting mode indicating that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch corresponding to the final stop operation, and after a power failure occurs in the left reel stop possible state, the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on. Even so, since the rotation of the left reel is not stopped by the operation of the left stop switch 13a, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as missing a small winning combination that requires eye pressing. Also, to prevent the operation of the stop switch 13 from being accepted in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order when an internal lottery result (so-called pressing order role) in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player stops depending on the pressing order is won. is also possible.

In addition, in a state where the reel can be stopped, power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the game machine cannot operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed. In the case where the power-off recovery process is executed), the stop control process may be executed for the left reel. In this case also, when the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is being pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is in a lighting mode indicating that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is pressed during the time when the operating voltage momentarily falls below the threshold when the power supply is interrupted during a game, and the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on. When the power is automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the left reel stops after the power is turned on. Even if the stop switch 13 is pressed at a certain timing, the game can be progressed (the corresponding reel is stopped), and the effort of the player can be reduced and the game tempo can be improved. When stopping the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 pressed after the power is turned on, the reel is stopped even if the reel is accelerating, thereby bringing the player closer to the timing the player originally wanted to stop. becomes possible. However, if there are a plurality of stop switches 13 that are pressed after the power is turned on, none of the reels are stopped.

<Control corresponding to power interruption during slip control of slot machine PS1 assumed>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received, the reel is rotated from the reception position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control). The reel comes to a stop. If the power-off process is executed during the slip control, the slip control cannot be executed and the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is executed based on the determined stop position. When it is determined that a minor winning combination has been won, medals are paid out based on the minor winning combination.

Therefore, in a game in which a small winning combination is won by the internal lottery process, the power cutoff process is executed during the slip control when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received at the timing when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination can be stopped, and the power is turned off. Even if the symbols corresponding to the minor winning combination are not stopped on the effective line after the return, the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning winning combination is determined to be stopped by the winning judgment processing after all the reels are stopped, and the stopped symbol combination is selected. The corresponding medals are paid out.

This is for the following reasons. In other words, it has the effect of preventing the player from being unable to receive the payout of medals even though the player performs the stop operation at the timing of receiving the payout of the medals. There was also the problem of not being able to recognize it. In order to solve this problem, in a game in which a minor winning combination is won by the internal lottery process, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received at the timing at which the symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination can be stopped, the slip control is performed (from the stop acceptance to the slippage). (until control ends), the reel is rotated after the power is restored, the index is detected, the reel is rotated to the stop position based on the detected index information, and then stopped at the stop position. and then pay out the medals.

With this configuration, even if the power-off process is executed during the slip control, the player can determine which symbol combination has been stopped by rotating it to the stop position where it was scheduled to stop again after the power is restored. Since it is possible to visually recognize it, the interest of the player can be improved.

Also, even if the same pattern exists while the power is turned off during the slip control, and the index is detected in the re-rotation process after the power is restored, and it moves to the planned stop position, it will not be possible. stop position. If it stops at the same symbol before the planned stop position, there is a possibility that the stop display will not stop during the game, so it is necessary to determine whether the stop is prohibited or not. , is moved to a predetermined position in order to reduce the processing load during re-rotation processing.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and in re-rotation processing after power recovery, acceleration processing and constant-speed processing are executed in the same manner as normal drum rotation start processing. It should be noted that acceleration processing and constant speed processing that are different from normal processing may be executed without being limited to this. For example, it is conceivable that the acceleration time is shortened, the acceleration time is lengthened, the speed of constant-speed rotation is slowed down, or the speed of constant-speed rotation is increased. By changing the acceleration mode or the constant speed mode in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the rotation is different from the normal one.

Also, if it rotates to the same position as the stop reception position while rotating at a constant speed during re-rotation, it will be considered that the stop operation has been received in the same way as normal rotation processing, and slip control will be performed, and the planned stop position will be performed. When the reel rotates up to , an all-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (in the case of a 4-phase stepping motor, a 4-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the rotating reel.

In addition, the power is turned off during the slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, "re-rotating" is displayed on the liquid crystal so that the player can recognize that it is being re-rotated. Alternatively, it is possible to output a voice message "re-rotating", or display an error on an error indicator. This mode allows the player to recognize that the rotation is unusual.

Further, when the power-off process is executed during the slip control, a flag indicating that the slip control is not completed is stored in a predetermined storage area. If so, execute re-rotation processing. The flag is initialized when the re-rotation processing is stopped as a result of executing the re-rotation processing, so that the re-rotation processing is not executed when the power is normally turned on. In addition, the flag relating to the fact that the slip control is not completed may be an error flag or a game state flag.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, re-rotation processing may be automatically executed after power is restored, or re-rotation processing may be performed after an error occurs after power restoration and is canceled by the reset switch. may be executed. Any aspect is applicable to the re-rotation processing of the subsequent embodiments.

Further, during the power-off process during the slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and constant speed, or during constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 180 as described above), the acceleration process is executed again. In this case, the rotation failure may be caused by the reel being held by hand, the motor being out of step due to malfunction, or the deterioration of the member over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized in the initialization process when the power is turned on, and updating (counting) of the rotation failure detection counter is started along with the execution of the re-rotation process. After the index is first detected after the power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter is started again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after detecting the index for the first time in this way, the position of the reel stopped by the power-off processing is the position immediately after passing the index, and the stop position is the position immediately before passing the index. can stop up to the stop position without detecting rotation failure. In other words, although the reel rotates about two turns after the power is turned on until the reel stops, it is not determined that the rotation is defective.

Although the timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter is assumed to be when the power is turned on, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the rotation failure detection counter is initialized when the rotation failure detection counter occurs.

In this way, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during re-rotation processing after power is restored. It is possible to stop at the stop position where it is. In addition, since rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not executed if step-out or the like occurs during normal slip control.

Subsequently, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and if an error (restorable error) is detected during re-rotation processing after power is restored, error notification is performed after the re-rotation processing is completed. Errors detected at this time include medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error, hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error, door opening error, harness disconnection error, etc. there is In addition to the error code displayed on the acquired number display 27, the error notification can be performed in a liquid crystal notification mode, a speaker S notification mode, an upper or both side effect lamp, and a switch lamp for effect in a predetermined color ( For example, it is conceivable to light up in highly visible colors such as red and blue. Note that the error notification may be performed by only one error notification, or may be performed by combining a plurality of error notifications.

In this way, by giving the error notification after the re-rotation process is finished, it is possible to make it easier for the player or the person concerned with the game hall to recognize whether the notification is during the re-rotation or the notification of the error. If the re-rotation notification is given during the re-rotation, the re-rotation notification is terminated after the re-rotation is completed, and the error notification is switched to. Note that error notification is not performed during re-rotation, and notification regarding re-rotation, which is not error notification, is not performed.

The error mode during the re-rotation process described above is not limited to this, and the error to be detected may be a partial error (for example, the hopper retention error is detected, but the medal retention error is not detected, etc.), and the error notification mode , after an error is detected, the obtained number display 27 notifies the error, and when the re-rotation process is completed and the reel stops, the error is notified by the liquid crystal or the speaker S, or the obtained number display 27 after the error detection, A liquid crystal or a speaker S may be used to notify the error.

Subsequently, power-off processing is executed during the slip control, and during the re-rotation processing after the power is restored, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled, and even if the stop switch 13 is operated, it is supported. The reels are designed not to stop.

As a situation in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on, power recovery after power loss during normal reel rotation is possible in addition to power recovery after power loss during slip control. When the power is restored after the power is turned off during normal rotation of the reels, the reels can be stopped, and the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is an effective mode. Therefore, when the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel re-rotation processing is being performed or the reel is being rotated normally by confirming the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13.例文帳に追加

In addition, as another situation in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is conceivable that the power is restored after the power is turned off during a freeze in which the reel rotates. As types of freeze in which the reels rotate, there are a pseudo game in which temporary stop control is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and a reel performance in which the rotation of the reels does not stop even if the operation of the stop switch 13 is received.

During the pseudo game, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is a valid mode, and when the power is restored after the power is turned off during the pseudo game, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is a valid mode, so when the power is turned on. When the reels rotate, it is possible to determine whether the reel re-rotation processing is being performed or the reels are rotating normally by checking the lighting state of the lamp of the stop switch 13 .

The lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled during the reel performance, and the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled when the power is restored after the power is turned off during the reel performance, so when the power is turned on. When the reels are rotating, it is not possible to determine whether the reel is being produced or is being re-rotated by the way the lamp of the stop switch 13 is turned on. It's becoming Even if the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch is in an invalid mode during the reel effect, if the operation of another main system switch (switch managed by the main control means 100) is to be validated, the other main system switch Since the lighting mode of the lamp is an effective mode, by checking the lighting mode of the lamps of the other main system switches, it is possible to determine whether reel performance is being performed or re-rotation processing is being performed.

Also, during the pseudo-game or during the power restoration after the power is turned off during the reel effect, it may be a mode that does not rotate the reels, in this case, since the reels do not rotate when the power is restored, it is possible to determine whether the re-rotation process is being performed. can be easily determined by the rotation mode of the reel.

Subsequently, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power restoration, rotation is performed until the index is detected after power restoration, and the index is scheduled again. Move to the stop position and stop. If the power is turned off immediately before the index is detected, and if the index is not detected during acceleration after the power is restored, the index cannot be detected and the index is rotated again until the index detection timing. I can say.

Since the re-spin process can be executed even when the power is restored after the power is cut off during the re-spin process, the stop symbol can be displayed to the player even in an unstable situation where the power is cut off multiple times. can be displayed.

Here, the power-off process is executed during the slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored. After detecting the index at .

<Pattern 1>
Power-off processing is executed during slip control, and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery. It is conceivable to rotate until the index is detected in the second re-rotation process, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, since the index is not detected in the first re-rotation process and the reference symbol position is not stored, the second re-rotation process determines that the reference symbol position is not stored and repeats Rotation is performed to detect the index, and it is possible to stop at the planned stop position.

<Pattern 2-1>
In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery. including the timing at the moment when the sensor detects the index. The same shall apply hereinafter.), after the power is restored, up to the planned stop position based on the reference pattern position by the index detected before the power was turned off. A mode in which it is rotated and then stopped is conceivable.

In this case, since the index is detected in the first re-rotation process, it can be stopped at the planned stop position based on the stored reference symbol position. It is possible to shorten the time until restart.

In the pattern 2-1 described above, the power supply is turned off during the period from the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process to the rotation to the planned stop position and application of the brake (until the four-phase excitation is output). If the power-off process is executed, even if the timing at which the power-off process was executed was not rotated to the stop reception position, even if it was rotated to the stop reception position, after the power is restored Re-rotation processing or stop control is executed based on the stored reference symbol position without detecting the index again.

In this way, the same re-rotation processing or stop control can be executed after the power is restored for the second time regardless of the stop reception position received immediately before the first power-off processing. can be realized.

<Pattern 2-2>
In addition, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery, if the index is detected during re-rotation processing, power is restored. A mode is conceivable in which the index is detected again later, and then it is rotated to the planned stop position and then stopped.

In this case, considering the possibility that the reel may have moved between the time the power was turned off and the time the power was restored, the reel will continue to rotate until the index is detected again, so it will reach the stop position more accurately. It is possible to rotate.

In the pattern 2-2 described above, after the index during the first re-rotation process is detected, until the brake is applied after rotating to the planned stop position (until the four-phase excitation is output), the power supply is turned off. If the power-off process is executed, even if the timing at which the power-off process was executed was not rotated to the stop reception position, even if it was rotated to the stop reception position, after the power is restored A re-rotation process is executed to detect the index again, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the same re-rotation processing or stop control can be executed after the second power restoration, regardless of the stop reception position that was received immediately before the first power-off processing. can be realized.

<Pattern 2-3>
In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery. If not, after the power is restored, the index is not detected again, and re-rotation processing or stop control is executed based on the stored reference symbol position, and the power is turned off during the slip control, and the power is turned off. During re-rotation processing after recovery, if the index is detected during re-rotation processing and the rotation has reached the stop reception position, the index is detected again after power is restored. A mode is conceivable in which the symbol is moved to the planned stop position by executing the re-rotation process for the purpose and then stopped.

In this way, since the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process can be finely controlled after the reference power supply is restored, it is possible to execute appropriate processes according to the situation in which the power-off process is executed.

<Control of Effect Mode Using Effect Switch of Prerequisite Slot Machine PS1>
An effect using the effect switch (sometimes referred to as a push button effect) will be described with reference to FIG. 12 . In FIG. 12, the operation of the start switch 12, the operation of the left stop switch 13a, the operation of the middle stop switch 13b, the operation of the right stop switch 13c, and then the operation of the production switch are performed, and the production switch is operated. It shows the process in which the performance is executed. In addition, the portion labeled "PUSH" in FIG. 12 represents a switch for effect (however, the "PUSH" indication on the upper side of the lower middle diagram in FIG. 12 is displayed on the liquid crystal).

In the upper left diagram of FIG. 12, the start switch 12 for starting the game is operated (more specifically, reception of the start switch reception command or reception of the reel rotation start command from the main control means 100). The effect "Win the rock-paper-scissors!" is displayed on the LCD. Since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid at this time, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the upper middle diagram of FIG. 12, based on the operation of the left stop switch 13a for stopping the left reel (more specifically, reception of the left stop switch reception command from the main control means 100) The effect of "Ja~n!" is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the upper right diagram of FIG. 12, it is executed based on the operation of the middle stop switch 13b for stopping the middle reel (more specifically, reception of the middle stop switch reception command from the main control means 100) The effect of "Ke~n!" is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the lower left diagram of FIG. 12, it is executed based on the operation of the right stop switch 13c for stopping the right reel (more specifically, reception of the right stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). The effect of "Pon!" is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Next, in the lower middle diagram of FIG. 12, the effect switch executed based on the fact that all the reels have stopped (more specifically, the reception of the all reel stop command from the main control means 100) is simulated. An image of the switch that has been pressed (hereinafter, may be referred to as an effect switch image, an operation promotion image, or an operation promotion effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal. Also, the effect "Pop!" displayed when the right stop switch 13c, which is the third stop, is operated is dimly displayed (lowered in brightness). Since the operation of the effect switch is valid at this time, the effect switch is lit. When the image is displayed dimly, the luminance may be lowered instead of the brightness, or the image may be superimposed with a semi-transparent gray color. In any case, it is possible to express that the visibility is lowered when the image is displayed dimly.

Subsequently, in the diagram on the lower right of FIG. 12, the image "Victory!" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation response image or an operation response effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal. Since the operation of the effect switch is invalid at this time, the effect switch is turned off.

As shown in the lower middle diagram of FIG. 12, when the effect switch image is displayed on the liquid crystal as an effect to prompt the operation of the effect switch, the effect switch image is larger than the actual effect switch size. make it By displaying in this manner, the effect switches can be effectively displayed on the liquid crystal display that the player is watching, and the player can intuitively be prompted to operate the effect switches.

In addition, in the effect switch image, an image representing the lighting mode of the effect switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a lighting mode image) is also performed. When the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp is lit (not blinking), and the lighting mode image is expressed in a blinking mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated at a predetermined cycle. According to such a configuration, the effect switch image is repeatedly brightened and darkened, so that the effect switch image can be made conspicuous, and the operation of the effect switch can be effectively urged.

Also, when the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp is lit in a blinking mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at a specific cycle, and the lighting mode image is expressed in a blinking mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at a predetermined cycle. It may be in the form of In this case, it is possible to make the lighting state image stand out by making the predetermined period of the lighting state image shorter than the specific period of the effect switch lamp. In this case, the operation (pressing) of the effect switch is valid even at the timing when the effect switch lamp is turned off, and the effect switch is operated at this timing. , dimly displayed "Pon!" The production is switched.

In addition, eco mode (when set to eco mode, the brightness of the upper or both side production lamps is reduced or turned off, or the brightness of the lower panel is reduced compared to when it is not set to eco mode). or turn it off, or lower the brightness of the liquid crystal display or turn it off), when the effect switch is turned on when executing the push button effect during the eco mode. and the brightness of the switch for presentation when the switch for presentation is lit when executing the push button presentation when not in the eco mode. As a result, it is possible to effectively prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect switch.

It should be noted that even when the error notification is performed by lighting or blinking the upper or both sides production lamps or production switch lamps in a predetermined color (highly visible colors such as red and blue), the eco mode and the eco It is preferable to make the brightness of the upper or both side effect lamps and the effect switch lamps the same when not in the mode.

In addition, when displaying an image indicating turning off as a lighting mode image, the brightness of the effect switch image is lowered and displayed, but the brightness is not lowered until it turns black, and the expression is such that it is slightly lit. do. On the other hand, when the production switch lamp is turned off, it is not lit. In this way, by differentiating the expression of the lighting state image from that of the effect switch lamp, it is possible to make the lighting state image stand out. In addition, since the area around the effect switch image is brighter than the area around the effect switch, the brightness of the lighting state image of the effect switch image is not lowered to black, thereby reducing the difference in brightness with the surroundings. making it smaller. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce fatigue during the game while making the effect switch image stand out.

Also, when the effect switch image is displayed before the previous image as shown in the lower middle diagram of FIG. The brightness of the previous image is made lower than the brightness. With such a configuration, even when the lightness of the effect switch image is the lowest, the lightness of the effect switch image is higher than that of the surrounding images, so that the effect switch image can be made conspicuous.

The lower middle diagram in FIG. 12 will be further described with reference to FIG. The effect switch image changes over time until the effect switch is operated. As a mode of change, an effect representing the initial position of the effect switch and the advance/retreat of the pressed position is expressed using the effect switch image.

The leftmost diagram in FIG. 13 shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, the second diagram from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the depressed position, and the third diagram from the left. 4 shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, and the fourth figure from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the depressed position. In this manner, by configuring the effect switch image to repeatedly show the state of the initial position and the state of the depressed position, it is possible to effectively prompt the player to press the effect switch. .

The initial position and the pressed position of the effect switch image change at a constant cycle, and the cycle representing the initial position and the pressed position of the effect switch image is longer than the predetermined cycle representing lighting and extinguishing of the lighting mode image. is configured as By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect switch image stand out, and to prevent the user from being reminded of repeatedly pressing the effect switch. Many of the game machines currently on the market continuously change the performance by repeatedly hitting the performance switch, and if the change mode of the performance switch image is changed too quickly, there is a risk of mistaking it for the repeated hitting performance. , There is a possibility that the interest of the game will be reduced. For this reason, by making the period of change between the initial position and the depressed position longer than the period of the lighting mode, it is possible to intuitively express that the effect switch is not being repeatedly hit while making the user aware that the effect switch is being depressed. becomes.

In addition, in a situation where an effect of repeatedly hitting the effect switch is displayed, by shortening the cycle of changing between the initial position and the depressed position than the cycle of the lighting mode, the player is made to repeatedly hit the effect switch. can be expressed intuitively. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, but the switching cycle of the lighting mode image is set to be shorter than the cycle when the switch image for effect is operated once, although the position of the switch image for effect does not change. It may be an aspect.

Alternatively, the effect switch image may be changed between the initial position and the depressed position in a constant cycle. In this case, since the display area of the liquid crystal can be reduced, it is possible to display characters such as "Press the PUSH button" to the effect that the effect switch should be pressed instead.

When the switch for presentation is operated while the switch image for presentation for operating the switch for presentation is displayed on the liquid crystal, the switch image for presentation is deleted without any effect. In other words, if the effect switch is operated while the effect switch image is displayed, the effect switch image is immediately erased and the effect based on the depression of the effect switch is immediately executed. . In this case, the effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after accepting the operation of the effect switch. It may be configured to erase the effect switch image.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in what result is obtained by pressing the switch for presentation, and the information as to whether or not the switch for presentation has been pressed can be made conspicuous. It is possible to eliminate it.

Further, even if the front panel PS2 is opened while the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal, the display of the effect switch image is continued and the effect switch is operated. When operated, the effect switch image is erased without any effect, and the effect based on the depression of the effect switch is immediately executed. At this time, as described above, the effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after accepting the operation of the effect switch, or may be executed after a predetermined period from immediately after accepting the operation of the effect switch. The effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process.

By executing the performance based on the depression of the performance switch regardless of whether the front panel PS2 is open or closed, the progress of the game is not hindered even if the front panel PS2 is unintentionally opened. becomes possible.

When the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal while the front panel PS2 is open, the lighting mode of the effect switch is the same as when the front panel PS2 is closed. , is configured to be different from the lighting mode of the effect switch when the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal. For example, when the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, it lights up, while in the open state it blinks or turns off. It can be different. In addition, in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open, as shown in FIG. 17, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the effect switch image ( In order to improve the visibility of the effect switch image and the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open, the front panel PS2 is opened at a position where these images do not overlap each other. (You may also display an image showing that Furthermore, in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open, a sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open (for example, "the door is open") may be output. It is also possible not to output the effect sound associated with the display of the switch image or the effect sound associated with the effect based on the depression of the effect switch. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open. On the other hand, even in the situation where the sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open is being output, the effect sound associated with the display of the effect switch image or the effect sound based on the depression of the effect switch is output. good too. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open without hindering the progress of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is opened while the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal, the front panel PS2 must be opened instead of the effect switch image. is displayed to invalidate the depression of the effect switch, and then the front panel PS2 is closed, the image showing that the front panel PS2 is open is erased, and the effect switch image is displayed again. . By displaying an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open superimposed on the effect switch image, the effect switch image is made invisible, and when the front panel PS2 is closed after that, the front panel PS2 is open. It is also possible to erase the image indicating that the effect switch image is visible again. In this case as well, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open by changing the lighting mode of the effect switch before and after the front panel PS2 is opened as described above.

Further, in the case of executing an effect (success effect) meaning that a privilege is given to the player when the effect switch is operated, the effect switch image is erased without any effect. In the case of executing an effect (failure effect) meaning that no privilege is given to the player when is operated, the switch image for effect may be erased along with the effect. Incidentally, the effect in the case of a failure effect may be an aspect in which the effect switch image explodes, or an aspect in which the brightness of the effect switch image is maintained in the darkest state (an aspect in which the brightness does not change periodically).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the failure performance is displayed as a result of operating the performance switch, to foster a sense of satisfaction in the player, and to reduce the interest in the next game and thereafter. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Further, when displaying the effect switch image when all reels (all reels) are stopped, when the start switch 12 of the next game is operated, the image displayed when the effect switch is operated is not displayed. display an image based on your actions. Furthermore, when displaying an image based on the operation of the start switch 12, the effect switch image is erased. At this time, the effect switch image is erased without any effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in response to the player's operation without interfering with the effect executed based on the operation of the start switch 12.例文帳に追加A player who skips the effect switch image by operating the start switch 12 is highly likely to know in advance that the degree of expectation is low, or is not interested in the effect itself using the effect switch, and there is no effect. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by erasing the game without deleting it.

In addition, when the effect switch is operated in a situation where the effect switch image is displayed and the success effect is displayed, the time from acceptance of the effect switch operation until the effect switch image is erased, and the pressing order A time from acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 when the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct pressing order is operated in a situation where the navigation image is displayed and a success performance is displayed until the pressing order navigation image is erased; , the time until the effect switch image is erased is longer.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the time until the reaction effect that is executed when various switches are operated, and it is possible to give different fun depending on the time difference between the various switches and the execution of the reaction effect. becomes. For example, if the push order fails, the profit is lost directly. With the push order navigation image, if the next information is immediately displayed, the player's interest can be heightened. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect whether the success effect will be displayed or the failure effect will be displayed.

When the effect switch doubles as a switch for displaying a menu screen, the effect switch lamp is lit after a certain period of time (for example, T1) has elapsed after all reels have stopped. The lighting mode of the effect switch lamp at this time is different from the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp when the effect is executed by operating the effect switch after all reels are stopped.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest whether the menu screen is displayed or whether the success or failure effect is displayed when the effect switch is operated, depending on the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp. .

In addition, when displaying the effect switch image as shown in the lower middle diagram of FIG. The lighting mode is not the lighting mode when the menu screen is displayed, but the lighting mode corresponding to the effect switch image. Then, when the performance switch operation is received after T1 has elapsed after all the reels are stopped, the performance switch image is erased, the success or failure performance is executed, and the performance switch lamp is kept turned off. Even when T1 has passed since the operation of the switch for presentation is accepted, the switch lamp for presentation is kept off, and even if the switch for presentation is operated, the menu screen is not displayed. Furthermore, even when T2 for the demonstration screen to be displayed has passed after all reels are stopped, the demonstration screen is not displayed and the sound volume is lowered, and the effect switch lamp remains off. In this case, depending on whether the settlement process is executed by accepting the operation of the settlement switch or the game is executed until after the next game (after the end of the game in which the effect switch image is not displayed), after all reels are stopped The menu screen can be displayed after T1 has elapsed, and the demonstration screen can be displayed after T2 has elapsed after all reels have stopped.

With this configuration, when the effect switch is operated in the game in which the effect switch image is displayed, the player wonders whether the menu screen will be displayed or the success or failure effect will be displayed. It becomes possible to prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the elimination of the necessity. It should be noted that the menu screen may not be displayed even after the settlement process is executed. In this case, a failure effect is displayed in the game, but a success effect is displayed in the next game. It is possible to maintain the expectation until whether or not is executed.

Further, when the effect switch lamp is lit in a lighting mode capable of displaying the menu screen, the effect switch image is not displayed on the liquid crystal. In other words, whether or not the menu screen is displayed can be confirmed only by the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the state that the menu screen can be displayed, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, by only the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp. Compared to , it is possible to reduce the possibility that the operation of the effect switch will cause a sense of anticipation, and the menu screen is displayed even though the player has operated the effect switch with a sense of expectation. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by putting it away.

In addition, on the demo screen where the player can easily recognize that the game is not progressing, the effect switch image is displayed in a different position and in a smaller size than the effect switch image displayed in the push button effect. good too. In this case, the player is unlikely to be confused with the push button effect, and the menu screen display can be effectively displayed to the player. This means that the timing of displaying the menu screen is most often when starting a game, and since the game is not being played at that timing, there is a high possibility that the demo screen is being displayed. It is based on

As for the display position of the effect switch image, during the push button effect, the effect switch image is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal, and during the demo screen, the edge of the liquid crystal (for example, as shown in FIG. (e.g., in an inconspicuous position). Further, as described above, the effect switch image in the demo screen is displayed in a smaller size than the effect switch image during the push button effect. In other words, it can be said that at least one of the display area and the size is different between the effect switch image in the demo screen and the effect image during the push button effect. Furthermore, it is preferable that the display modes of the effect switch image during the push button effect and the effect switch image in the demo screen are different (for example, the effect switch image during the push effect repeats lighting and extinguishing at a predetermined cycle). display in a blinking mode, and the effect switch image in the demo screen is displayed in a lit mode, etc.). As a result, the player can intuitively distinguish between a situation in which the player wants to press the performance switch as part of the performance and a situation in which the performance switch may be pressed.

As shown in FIG. 19, the effect switch image in the demo screen may be in the form of a telop such as "PUSH to display menu".

The timing at which the push button effect is executed is after all reels are stopped, but it may be after receiving the start switch 12. - 特許庁When the effect switch image is displayed after the start switch 12 is accepted, the effect switch image may be erased by the first stop operation (operation of any of the stop switches 13), or even after all reels are stopped. The display of the effect switch image may be maintained. When the display of the effect switch image is maintained after all reels are stopped, the effective period of the operation of the effect switch is also maintained, and when the effect switch is operated, the success or failure effect is executed. It should be noted that if the effect switch has not been operated due to either the elapse of the time for shifting to the demo screen, the execution of the settlement process, the execution of the betting process, or the start of the next game. Also, the effect switch image is erased.

Further, whether or not the operation response effect is executed by operating the effect switch is determined by setting a predetermined timer value in a counter based on the reception of a predetermined command from the main control means 100, and timer interrupt processing. etc., the counter value is decremented at predetermined intervals, and when the counter value reaches 0, the operation of the effect switch is enabled (the operation response effect is executed by operating the effect switch). ). At this time, the effect switch image is also rendered after a period corresponding to a predetermined timer value elapses after receiving a predetermined command. Due to a delay in communication with the board, etc., the effect switch may become effective before the effect switch image is displayed. Thus, even if the effect switch is operated before the effect switch image is displayed, the response effect can be executed.

<<Notice, etc. applicable to display devices>>
Next, an advance notice applicable to the assumed gaming machine will be described. A first effect capable of displaying a plurality of display modes in stages as a type of effect (notice type) that can be displayed on the display device 32 of the premised slot machine PS1 (the premised effect display device P80 of the pachinko game machine P). Seed (eg step-up notice) and a second display mode (eg red The point is that it has a second effect type (eg, dialogue announcement) that can suggest the possibility of an advantageous situation when the dialogue is displayed. In a first performance state (also referred to as a normal performance state) in which the possibility of a bonus or an AT is low, at least the first performance type and the second performance type can be executed, but the second performance in which the possibility of a bonus or an AT is high. In a state (for example, a continuous effect or an omen effect), the first effect type is not executed, and the second effect type can be executed. It should be noted that each configuration described below can be appropriately combined as long as there is no inhibiting factor.

[First production type]
The first effect type includes an advance notice that is displayed multiple times in stages. For example, a so-called step-up notice is included. As a specific suggestion mode, a predetermined degree of expectation in the order of step 1 (white) < step 2 (blue) < step 3 (yellow) < step 4 (green) < step 5 (red) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a sign rush, AT rush, bonus winning, etc.), and in one game, multiple times such as step 1 (white) → step 2 (blue) → step 3 (yellow) A notice that can be displayed is included. In addition, in a plurality of games, the case where the notice pattern is displayed step by step like step 1 (white)→step 2 (blue)→step 3 (yellow) is also included. That is, since the advance notice of the first effect type is displayed in stages, it takes a relatively long time for the player to recognize the display mode that can be finally displayed.

[Second production type]
In the second effect type, in one game, display is started in a post-change mode (second display mode) different from the normal mode (first display mode) from the start of display of the notice, or in one game, A notice is included that the display mode can be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode only once. It also includes an advance notice (so-called button advance notice) in which a movable accessory is moved by operating a sub-input button or some kind of advance notice image is displayed. That is, so-called dialogue announcement, so-called title announcement, so-called button announcement, display of character names and technique names in battle effects, and the like are included. As a specific suggestion mode, it is possible to suggest a predetermined degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation for winning a minor combination, entering a sign, entering an AT, winning a bonus, etc.) in the order of white<green<red. More specifically, the lines are displayed in green or red at the start of the notice (they are displayed in green or red from the beginning of the game and do not change), and the character names and technique names in the battle production are white. to red characters (white characters change to red characters in the game). In other words, the time required for the player to recognize the display mode that can be finally displayed in the second effect type in which there is no change in color or the like, or only the color of characters is changed, is determined by the advance notice pattern. It is shorter than the changing first effect type.

[First production state]
The first production state is a production state in which the possibility of winning a bonus or AT is low. This is a rendering state (normal rendering state) that has not developed into a so-called continuous rendering or a so-called precursor.

[Second production state]
The second rendering state is a rendering state in which the possibility of winning a bonus or AT is higher than in the first rendering state. It includes so-called continuous effects and omens.

The first presentation state is a state in which a bonus or winning of an AT cannot be expected so much, and is a state in which a shift to a continuous presentation or a sign is mainly expected. In other words, if the advance notice displayed on the display device 32 is careless, the player will become bored and will not continue the game. Therefore, in the first rendering state, multiple stages of display are required in order to shift to a continuous rendering or an omen. In other words, even if the first performance type, which takes a long time, is executed as an advance notice, the player does not feel so annoyed.

On the other hand, in the second effect state, the main purpose of the game is to show a continuous effect or an indication on the display device 32 that a bonus or an AT win can be expected more than in the first effect state. It is better to avoid interrupting announcements that take a relatively long time as much as possible. In addition, when the announcement is made in the second effect state in which the bonus or winning of AT is expected, the player strongly desires to be informed of the winning of bonus or AT. In other words, as a notice that can be executed in the second effect state, the first effect type that takes a relatively long time for the player to grasp the content of the notice (expectation, etc.) is not appropriate, and the content of the notice (expectation, etc.) etc.) is more appropriate because the time required for the player to comprehend is relatively short.

(Step-up notice in the first production state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the step-up notice, which is the notice of the first effect type that can be executed in the first effect state, will be described. Although t1 to t7 will be described below along the passage of time, it should be noted that these are t1 to t7 in FIG. 14 and are independent of the same symbols in other drawings.

First, at t1, the start lever 12 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "start lever") is operated. Next, at t2, step-up 1 (character A) starts to be displayed. The player can recognize that the step-up notice has started to be displayed at this timing. However, it cannot be grasped whether or not the chance will be increased after this, that is, whether or not step-up 2 and subsequent steps will be displayed.

Next, at t3, step-up 2 (character B) starts to be displayed. At this timing, the player can grasp that the step-up notice has increased the chance. However, it is still not possible to grasp to which stage the chance will finally rise.

Next, at t4, step-up 3 (character C) starts to be displayed. Even here, it is still not possible to grasp the final stage to which the chance will rise.

Next, at t5, step-up notice ends at step-up 3. Here, the player can grasp the final display mode of the step-up notice.

Thereafter, the first stop button is operated at t6, the second stop button is operated at t7, the third stop button is operated at t8, and the game ends at t9.

As described above, the step-up notice, which is the first effect type in the first effect state, requires a period from t2 to t5 until the final display mode of the step-up notice is grasped. Further, the period of displaying in the display mode with increased chances ends before the operation of the first stop button.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the game by lever-on to the start of the step-up notice (period T1 from t1 to t2 in FIG. 14, about 1 second) is the period required for the step-up notice to increase the chance by one step ( It may be longer than the period T2) from t2 to t3 in FIG. 14, about 0.5 seconds), or the period from the start of the game by lever-on to the start of the step-up notice (the above period T1, about 0.5 seconds). 1 second) may be shorter than the period (the period T2, about 1.2 seconds) required for the step-up notice to increase the chance by one step. Note that FIG. 14 schematically shows the latter example.

(Dialogue notice in the first production state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a dialogue announcement, which is an announcement of the second effect type that can be executed in the first effect state, will be described. Although t1 to t8 will be described below along the passage of time, it should be noted that these are t1 to t8 in FIG. 15 and are independent of the same symbols in other drawings.

First, at t1, the start lever is operated. Next, at t2, the dialogue notice starts with the green letters of "It's a chance". From this timing, it is possible for the player to understand that the line notice is in the display form of chance up and the final display form of the line notice. Since it takes some time to actually grasp the display mode of the chance up, in the dialog announcement, the period T2 from t2 to t3 in FIG. 15 is the period required until the final display mode is grasped. I can say.

Thereafter, the first stop button is operated at t4, the second stop button is operated at t5, the third stop button is operated at t6, and the game ends at t7.

Next, when a betting operation for the next game is performed at t8, the display of the advance notice of the dialogue ends.

In this manner, in the speech announcement, which is the second presentation type in the first presentation state, it takes a period T2 from t2 to t3 in FIG. 15 to grasp the final display mode of the speech announcement. Further, when the third stop button is operated and the game ends, there is no point in suggesting an increase in the chance of the game, but the display in the display mode of the increase in chance continues until the betting operation of the next game is performed. is configured as As a result, the chance-up of the previous game can be ended in the betting process in which the process of initializing the effects of the previous game is performed, and the process of erasing the chance-up is not performed in the game end process after the third stop. Therefore, the burden of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in the dialogue notice, for example, after starting with the white "chance" characters (first display mode) at t2, red "chance!" yo" (second display mode) (the first display mode may be changed to the second display mode in the game). In this case, the period from lever-on to the start of the advance notice of the dialogue (period T3 from t1 to t2 in FIG. 15) is required for changing the advance notice of the dialogue from the first display mode to the second display mode. It is shorter than the period (the period TA from t3 to t4 to t8 in FIG. 15).

(Dialogue notice in a certain second production state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a dialogue announcement, which is an announcement of the second effect type that can be executed in a certain continuous effect (certain second effect state), will be described. Although t1 to t14 will be described below along the passage of time, it should be noted that these are t1 to t14 in FIG. 16 and are independent of the same symbols in other drawings.

First, at t1, the start lever is operated, and the first game of continuous effects is started. Next, at t2, the dialogue notice is started with green characters "Atsui". From this timing, it is possible for the player to understand that the line notice is in the display form of chance up and the final display form of the line notice. Since it takes a certain amount of time to actually grasp the display mode of chance up, the final display mode is grasped during the period T2 from t2 to t3 in FIG. It can be said that it is the period required until

After that, the first stop button is operated at t4, the second stop button is operated at t5, and the third stop button is operated at t6, and the game ends at t7 (that is, the payout process is completed and the next game is started). possible).

Next, when a betting operation for the next game (the second game of the continuous effect) is performed at t8, the display of the advance notice of the words ends.

As described above, in the speech announcement, which is the second presentation type in the second presentation state, it takes a period of time from t2 to t3 to grasp the final display mode of the speech announcement. Further, when the third stop button is operated and the game ends, there is no point in suggesting an increase in the chance of the game, but the display in the display mode of the increase in chance continues until the betting operation of the next game is performed. is configured as As a result, the chance-up of the previous game can be ended in the betting process in which the process of initializing the effects of the previous game is performed, and the process of erasing the chance-up is not performed in the game end process after the third stop. Therefore, the burden of control processing can be reduced.

In the second game of the continuous effect, the dialogue notice is not displayed after the start lever is operated.

Next, the first stop button is operated at t9, the second stop button is operated at t10, and the third stop button is operated at t11.

Next, the game ends at t13. Next, when a betting operation for the next game is performed at t14, the display of the advance notice of the dialogue ends.

In this way, the display timing of the second effect type is made different between the first game and the second game of the continuous effect, but it may be displayed at the same timing.

Next, configurations applicable to the assumed game machine will be listed. Each configuration listed below is merely an example, and is not limited to the configuration listed below. In addition, it should be added that the configurations listed below can be appropriately combined as long as there is no contradiction in combining them with each other.
(Configuration 1)
In a first performance state, both the first performance type and the second performance type are configured to be executed, and in a certain second performance state, the first performance type is not executed and the second performance type is executed. Configure.

By constructing in this way, during the continuous performance, by generating only the notice that allows the player to instantaneously determine whether the chance is up, the player can concentrate on the continuous performance. can be executed.

Also, the notice that can be executed in a certain second effect state may be of a plurality of types, or may be of only one type.

For example, in a certain continuous effect, it may be configured such that a title notice and a dialogue notice can be executed.

Even if a plurality of types of the second effect type can be executed, the player can grasp the contents of the notice in a short time, so that the player does not feel troublesome. For example, a character name is displayed at the start of a certain continuous effect (battle effect) (there is an indication of the degree of expectation by color), and a dialogue announcement is executed during the certain continuous effect.

In addition, by allowing only a specific notice (for example, one kind of notice) to occur in a certain continuous effect, the continuous effect and the notice to be generated are clarified, and the player can distinguish between the continuous effect and the notice. Even if attention is paid to both sides, it is possible to easily grasp the aspect indicating the bonus or AT winning.

(Composition 1-1)
Furthermore, there are multiple types of second notices that can be executed in a certain second effect state,
It is configured so that a plurality of types of second notices can be executed in one second effect state,
There is only one type of second notice that can be executed in one game round.

Specifically, in one continuous effect, a plurality of types of second notices (eg, dialogue notice, title notice) are configured to be executed. It is configured so that two advance notices (for example, the first game is the title notice and the second game is the dialogue notice) can be executed.

In this way, during a certain continuous performance (certain second performance state), only one type of notice is executed in one game cycle, so that the notice display becomes complicated and the degree of expectation is prevented from being grasped. be able to.

(Composition 1-2)
Furthermore, if there are a plurality of types of advance notices that can be executed in a certain second effect state, the advance notice that does not require the player to operate the sub-buttons and the button advance notice that requires the player to operate the buttons may be provided. good. In addition, since the second effect state is closer to the bonus and AT winning than the first effect state (the state in which it is expected), the player is highly motivated to operate the sub-buttons. Therefore, in the second effect state, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of button announcements requiring operation of the sub-buttons rather than announcements not requiring operation of the sub-buttons.

(Composition 1-3)
The first effect type may not be executed in all the second effect states, and only the second effect type may be executed.

By constructing in this way, only the second performance in which the contents of the notice can be grasped in a short time is executed in all the second performance states, so that the user feels annoyance with the notice executed in the second performance state as a whole. There is no

In the case where a dialogue announcement is provided as the above-described second effect type, the dialogue announcement in the case where the second effect state is a continuous battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront each other can be configured as follows.
1. Only the Lines of the Allied Character Can Be in the Second Display Mode In this case, since it is only necessary to pay attention to the lines of the allied character, it is easy to grasp the chance increase.
2. Only the words of the enemy character can be in the second display mode In this case, since it is only necessary to pay attention to the words of the enemy character, it is easy to grasp the chance increase.
3. The lines of both the ally character and the enemy character can be displayed in the second display mode. In this case, the timing at which the chance-up is displayed increases, so that the player can have a greater sense of anticipation.

(Configuration 2)
The number of characters used in one notice of the first performance type that can be executed in the first performance state and one notice of the second performance type that can be executed in the second performance state is different.

For example, the first notice of the first effect type in the first effect state is the step-up notice, and the one notice of the second effect type that can be executed in the second effect state is the dialogue notice. Configured to have different numbers of characters.

In the step-up notice, which is the first notice of the first effect type in the first effect state shown in FIG. 14, character A (step 1), character B (step 2), character C (step 3), character D (step 4) and five characters (step 5) are used.

Three types of characters, character A, character B, and character F, can be used in the dialogue announcement, which is one announcement of the second effect type in a certain second effect state (eg, continuous battle effect) shown in FIG.

In this way, in the advance notice of the first effect in the first effect state, by increasing the number of characters, the advance notice variations are increased so that the player does not get bored, and the advance notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state is increased. In the advance notice, only characters related to a certain second effect state (eg, continuous battle effect being executed) are used so that the player can easily grasp the flow of the second effect state.

In addition, since the first effect state is a state in which the user stays in the game for a long time, the frequency of occurrence of the step-up notice, which is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state, is the same as that in a certain second effect state. It is higher than the dialogue notice, which is the notice of 1 of 2 productions. Therefore, the number of characters used is increased as the frequency of occurrence of the notice is increased to enrich the notice variations.

In addition, the number of characters is
A step-up notice that is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state < a dialogue notice that is the first notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state, and
The step-up notice, which is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state, may be the dialogue notice, which is the first notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state.

(Composition 3)
The number of characters used in one announcement of the second performance type that can be executed in the first performance state and one announcement of the second performance type that can be executed in the second performance state is configured to be different.

For example, when the announcement of the second effect type 1 in the first effect state is a dialogue announcement, and the announcement of the second effect type 1 that can be executed in the second effect state is also a dialogue announcement, the character used for each numbers are configured differently.

As shown in FIG. 15, five types of characters, character A, character B, character C, character D, and character E, are used in the dialogue announcement, which is the first announcement of the second effect type in the first effect state.

Three types of characters, character A, character B, and character F, are used in the speech announcement, which is one announcement of the second production type in a certain second production state (eg, continuous battle production).

In this way, in the advance notice of the second effect 1 in the first effect state, the number of characters is increased so that the number of advance notice variations is increased so that the player does not get bored. In the advance notice, only characters related to a certain second effect state (eg, continuous battle effect being executed) are used so that the player can easily grasp the flow of the second effect state.

In addition, since the first effect state is a state in which the user stays in the game for a long time, the occurrence frequency of the dialogue notice, which is the first notice of the second effect in the first effect state, is the second in a certain second effect state. It is higher than the dialogue notice, which is the first notice of production. Therefore, the number of characters used is increased as the frequency of occurrence of the notice is increased to enrich the notice variations.

In addition, the number of characters is
It is also possible that the line notice that is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state < the line notice that is the first notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state,
It is also possible that the dialogue announcement that is the first announcement of the first rendering in the first rendering state=the dialogue announcement that is the first announcement of the second rendering in a certain second rendering state.

In addition, step-up notice that is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state, speech notice that is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state, and one notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state. The number of characters used in the dialogue announcement may be set as follows.
1. Step-up notice that is 1 notice of the first effect in the first effect state > Dialogue notice that is 1 notice of the first effect in the first effect state > 1 notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state Line notice 2. Dialog notice that is 1 notice of the first effect in the first effect state > Step-up notice that is 1 notice of the first effect in the first effect state > 1 notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state Dialogue notice

In any of the above cases, the number of characters is larger in the one with the higher occurrence frequency of the advance notice.

(Composition 4)
A character used for advance notice of one of the first effect types that can be executed in the first effect state, and a character used for advance notice of one of the second effect types that can be executed in a certain second effect state, This is a configuration in which the same characters are used.

A character used in common for the dialogue announcement, which is the first announcement of the first effect in the first rendering state, and the dialogue announcement, which is the first announcement of the second effect in a certain second rendering state, is the main character.

In this way, the developer designs the game so that many main characters are displayed so that the story can be easily grasped, and the player can easily grasp the main characters and the relationships between the main characters according to the display frequency of the characters.

Therefore, the main character is a character that has a long display time (for example, it is easy to continue the continuous effect), has a high display frequency, and has a high degree of expectation.

However, since a high display frequency and a high expectation are contradictory, for example, in step-up notices and dialogue notices in the first effect state with a high notice frequency, the frequency of the main character is increased. It is appropriate to set it to step 1 or the like, and to use it as a character with a high degree of expectation in the second effect state.

As other characters, it is possible to provide a character that is a main character but is a rare character, has a short display time, has a low display frequency, and has a high degree of expectation. For example, when the character is displayed in the first presentation state and the second presentation state, the expectation of bonuses and AT wins is high.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the chances that the main characters are displayed, and furthermore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the degree of expectation for each character.

A character used for advance notice of one of the first effect types that can be executed in the first effect state and a character that is used for advance notice of one of the second effect types that can be executed in a certain second effect state. A character that is commonly used in a game does not have to be the main character. For example, it may be a rare character (high expectation) that is not a main character.

(Composition 5)
configured to output the voice of the character in one announcement (e.g., step-up announcement) of the first effect types that can be executed in the first effect state,
It is configured such that the voice of the character can be output even in one of the second presentation types that can be executed in the first presentation state (eg, speech announcement).

(Composition 5-1)
on the other hand,
In one of the second presentation types that can be executed in the second presentation state (eg, speech announcement), the voice of the character is not output.

By configuring in this manner, the sound of the character is output in the first effect state, so that it is easy to direct attention to the character's lines, while in the second effect state, BGM such as a continuous effect is output. Since it is desired to give a sense of anticipation to the fact that the continuous performance is being performed, it is possible to make it so that the voice of the character's dialogue is not so noticeable.

(Configuration 5 change example)
configured so that the voice of the character cannot be output in one announcement (eg step-up announcement) of the first effect types that can be executed in the first effect state,
It is configured so that the voice of the character cannot be output even in one of the second presentation types that can be executed in the first presentation state (eg, speech announcement).

In this way, in the first effect state, the sound of the character is configured not to be output. , The step-up notice and dialogue notice do not drown out the sound (sound effect) due to other notices.

(Composition 6)
One notice of the second effect types that can be executed in a certain second effect state is configured so as not to overlap with the volume adjustment display,
In a certain second performance state, the sound volume can be adjusted under any situation during the game stop or during the game, and even when the sound volume adjustment display is displayed, the performance display showing the certain second performance state. This is a configuration in which the brightness of the image does not decrease.

Specifically, when the player is configured to be able to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the sub-buttons, the cross button, etc., when the volume is adjusted or the amount of light is adjusted, the set The display device 32 displays a volume adjustment display indicating the volume status of the user and a light intensity adjustment display indicating the light intensity status.

In other words, it is a configuration in which the volume can be adjusted even in the second effect state, and when the dialog announcement, which is the second effect type, is displayed in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect), the volume adjustment display is It is configured to be displayed so as not to overlap.

Therefore, the player can clearly see both the announcement of the dialogue and the volume adjustment display.

Furthermore, in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect), the volume adjustment display is displayed even though the volume can be adjusted both during the game stop (while the reels are stopped) and during the game (while the reels are rotating). Even in such a case, the brightness of the effect display (background image) in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect) does not decrease, so the image (movie) of a certain continuous effect remains easy to see. is.

(Configuration 6 change example 1)
One notice of the second effect types that can be executed in a certain second effect state is configured to overlap with the volume adjustment display,
In a certain second effect state, it is possible to adjust the sound volume under any situation during game stop or during the game, and even when the sound volume adjustment display is displayed, the display screen in the certain second effect state is changed. This is a configuration in which the brightness is not lowered.

In other words, the configuration is such that the volume can be adjusted even in the second effect state, and when the dialog announcement, which is the second effect type, is displayed in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect), the display overlaps with the volume adjustment display. It is configured to be displayed as

However, in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect), the volume adjustment display is displayed even though the volume can be adjusted both during the game stop (while the reels are stopped) and during the game (while the reels are rotating). Even in such a case, the brightness of the display screen (background image) in a certain second production state (a certain continuous production) does not decrease, so an image (movie) in a certain continuous production remains easy to see. is.

In addition, even if the dialogue notice is displayed while the volume adjustment display is displayed, even if the dialogue notice is displayed and the volume adjustment display is displayed, The volume adjustment display is displayed on the front side of the dialogue notice.

(Composition 6-1)
Volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is possible both while the game is stopped and during the game,
The display position of the volume adjustment display or the light amount adjustment display does not change when the operation for adjusting the volume or the amount of light is performed while the game is stopped and when the operation for adjusting the volume or the amount of light is performed during the game.

In the normal game state, it is possible to adjust the volume or the amount of light regardless of whether the game is stopped or during the game. may be configured to

Also, during the bonus or AT, the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is possible both during the game stop and during the game as in the normal game state, and the volume adjustment display or the light amount adjustment display may not change.

Furthermore, the volume adjustment display or the light amount adjustment display may differ between the normal game state and the bonus or AT mode.

(Composition 7)
Equipped with a third effect (effect by operating the sub-input button) that allows the player to operate the operation member,
In the third effect that can be executed in the first effect state (for example, the normal effect state), when the operation member is operated, a plurality of executions indicating a predetermined degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a minor role, the degree of expectation of a sign rush) Among the modes, the ratio of performances performed in a predetermined execution mode is configured to be high,
In the third effect that can be executed in the second effect state (for example, continuous effect), when the operation member is operated, the ratio of whether or not the special game (for example, bonus, AT) will be notified is configured to be high. ing.

In other words, in the button effect in the normal effect state, the pattern indicating the expected degree of entry into a winning combination or an omen in the game is likely to be executed, and the pattern indicating the winning of a bonus or AT is difficult to be executed. On the other hand, in the button performance during the continuous performance, the pattern indicating the winning of the bonus or AT is likely to be executed, and the pattern indicating the expected degree of entry into the winning combination or omen in the game is difficult to be executed.

In this way, it is possible to configure the ratio of the content suggested by the button effects to differ depending on the game situation (whether the game is in the first effect state or the second effect state). This makes it possible to make the content suggested by the button presentation suitable for the game situation.

(Configuration 7 change example)
Equipped with a third effect (effect by operating the sub-input button) that allows the player to operate the operation member,
In the third effect that can be executed in the second effect state (for example, continuous effect), when the operation member is operated, a plurality of execution modes indicating a predetermined degree of expectation (for example, degree of expectation for minor role, degree of expectation for portent entry). It is configured such that the ratio of the notification of whether or not a special game (for example, bonus, AT) will be performed is higher than the ratio of the effect performed in a predetermined execution mode.

In other words, in the button operation during the continuous production, the ratio of being informed whether or not the special game (for example, bonus, AT) is high, and the predetermined degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of the small role, the degree of expectation of the omen rush) It may be configured such that the proportion of the effect performed in a predetermined execution mode among the plurality of execution modes shown is low.

This makes it possible to make the content suggested by the button presentation suitable for the game situation.

(Composition 8)
Equipped with at least a first game state (non-advantageous state) and a second game state (advantageous state),
It is configured such that the second performance state cannot occur in the second game state.

Specifically, during the AT (second game state), it is notified that a special game (bonus) will be performed instead of continuous performance (second performance state). In addition, the first game state is a non-advantageous state, and may be a normal game state or a non-advantageous section, and the second game state is an advantageous state, which may be an AT state or an advantageous section.

Since it is desired to obtain as many balls as possible in an advantageous state (during AT) in a short period of time, it is possible to execute the bonus immediately by adopting a configuration that does not include continuous effects in the advantageous state (during AT). can.

(Composition 9)
A second display device (e.g., a second liquid crystal display device) different from the first display device (e.g., a first liquid crystal display device),
A volume adjustment display is displayed on the second display device,
In the second effect state (during continuous effect) and while the reels are stopped, the volume can be adjusted,
It is configured such that the sound volume cannot be adjusted during the second effect state (during continuous effect) and while the reels are rotating.

In other words, a display device separate from the display device 32 where most of the production is performed is provided, and by displaying the volume adjustment display on the second display device, the volume adjustment display overlaps with the production displayed on the display device 32. Therefore, the visibility of the effect displayed on the display device 32 by the volume adjustment display is not lowered.

The second display device (a display device different from the display device 32) is a liquid crystal display device having a touch panel, and the volume may be adjusted by operating the touch panel. Moreover, not only volume control but also light amount control may be performed in the same way.

(Configuration 10)
Equipped with a first production state (a state in which continuous production etc. does not occur on a normal stage), a second production state (for example, continuous production) and a third production state (for example, omen),
After the first production state, the third production state that can be executed over a plurality of variations is established, and then the second production state can be established,
In the first effect state, the first effect type and the second effect type are configured to be executed,
In the second effect state, only the second effect type is configured to be executed,
moreover,
In the third effect state, both the first effect type and the second effect type are configured to be executed.

In other words, not only the first effect state, but also the third effect state (for example, the precursor state), the first effect type (for example, step-up notice) and the second effect type (for example, dialogue notice) are executed. configured to obtain

The effect contents of the first effect type and the second effect type that can be executed in the first effect state are different from the effect contents of the first effect type and the second effect type that can be executed in the third effect state. good too.

Omens are often not effects that notify whether or not a transition to an advantageous state (bonus or AT) is possible, so by making both the first and second effect types executable as in the normal state , the production variations can be enriched, and the expectation during the omen can be maintained.

(Composition 11)
In the case where the second presentation type is executed in the first presentation state, if the second display mode is not displayed, the rate of the third presentation state within a predetermined period and the predetermined rate when the second display mode is displayed The difference between the ratio of the third production state within the period,
In the case where the second effect type is executed in the second effect state, the ratio of becoming an advantageous state within a specific period when the second display mode is not displayed and the specific period when the second display mode is displayed The difference between the percentage of favorable conditions within
When the second performance type is executed in the second performance state, the rate of becoming an advantageous state within a specific period when the second display mode is not displayed and the specific period when the second display mode is displayed It is configured so that the difference from the ratio of being in an advantageous state within the time period becomes larger.

in short,
Within 32 G (within a predetermined period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the normal effect (first effect state) The difference between the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) and the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) within 32 G (within a predetermined period) after the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) is ,
Within 4G (within a specific period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the continuous effect (second effect state) Rate of bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) and rate of bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) within 4G (within a specific period) after the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) than the difference between
designed to be small.

(Composition 11-1)
moreover,
When the first effect type is executed in the first effect state, the ratio of the third effect state to the third effect state within a predetermined period when the second display mode is not displayed and the predetermined ratio when the second display mode is displayed The difference between the ratio of the third production state within the period,
In the case where the second presentation type is executed in the first presentation state, if the second display mode is not displayed, the rate of the third presentation state within a predetermined period and the predetermined rate when the second display mode is displayed Rather than the difference from the ratio of the third production state within the period,
designed to be small.

in short,
When the step-up notice (first effect type) is executed during the normal effect (first effect state), the chance is not increased by one step (when the second display mode is not displayed) within 32G (predetermined period (inside), and the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) within 32 G (within a predetermined period) by increasing the chance by one stage (when the second display mode is displayed). The difference from the ratio is
Within 32 G (within a predetermined period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the normal effect (first effect state) From the difference between the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) and the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) within 32 G (within a predetermined period) when the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) and,
designed to be small,
Within 32 G (within a predetermined period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the normal effect (first effect state) The difference between the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) and the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) within 32 G (within a predetermined period) after the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) is ,
Within 4G (within a specific period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the continuous effect (second effect state) Rate of bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) and rate of bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) within 4G (within a specific period) after the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) than the difference between
designed to be small.

Expectations for step-up notice are 1 step < 2 steps < 3 steps < 4 steps < 5 steps, and expectations for dialog notice are white < green < red < rainbow color, more concretely as shown in
<During normal production>
Step-up notice, 1st stage, rate of sign production within 32G: 1%
Step-up notice, 2 stages, rate of sign production within 32G: 2%
⇒ Difference: 1%
Dialogue notice, white, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 1%
Dialogue notice, green, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 5%
⇒ Difference: 4%
<Continuous production>
Dialogue notice, white, bonus rate within 4G: 5%
Dialogue notice, green, rate of bonus within 4G: 10%
⇒ Difference: 5%
It may be configured to be

In this way, even when the chance is increased by one stage in the display mode of the production, by configuring the ratio of the degree of expectation to be increased depending on the production state, the expectation for the chance to be increased by one level is enhanced. Players can enjoy themselves more.

(Configuration 11 change example)
The level of expectation for the step-up notice is 1 step < 2 steps < 3 steps < 4 steps < 5 steps, and the expectation level for the dialogue notice is white < green < red < rainbow color, If we show the difference between the second expectation from the bottom and the third expectation from the bottom,
<During normal production>
Step-up notice, 1st stage, rate of sign production within 32G: 1%
Step-up notice, 2 stages, rate of sign production within 32G: 2%
Step-up notice, 3 stages, percentage of sign production within 32G: 10%
⇒ Difference between SU2 and SU3: 8%
Dialogue notice, white, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 1%
Dialogue notice, green, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 5%
Dialogue notice, red, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 15%
⇒Difference between green and red: 10%
<Continuous production>
Dialogue notice, white, bonus rate within 4G: 5%
Dialogue notice, green, rate of bonus within 4G: 10%
Dialogue notice, red, bonus rate within 4G: 22%
⇒Difference between green and red: 12%
It may be configured to be

(Composition 12)
In the case where the announcement of one of the second effect types is executed in the second effect state (continuous effect),
It is configured such that once the certain notice becomes the second display mode, the certain notice will not change to the first display mode thereafter.

In other words, when the dialogue notice is displayed in red letters in the continuous effect, the dialogue notice is displayed in red letters without becoming white letters in the continuous effect.

For example, when red characters are displayed in the first game of the continuous effect, but white characters are displayed in the second game of the continuous effect, the player does not know whether the expectation level is high or low. There is a risk that it will be lost. Therefore, by uniformly showing the expectation level of the dialogue notice during one continuous performance, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the expectation level.

(Configuration 12 change example)
In the case where the announcement of one of the second effect types is executed in the second effect state (continuous effect),
It is configured such that even if the certain notice becomes the second display mode, the certain notice can later become the first display mode.

In other words, even if the dialogue notice is displayed in red letters in the continuous effect, it may be displayed in white letters in the continuous effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the second display mode (eg, chance up: red letters) is displayed for each game.

It should be noted that if the second display mode (eg, chance up: red letters) can be displayed only at a predetermined timing (eg, the first game of the continuous performance) in the continuous performance, the notice The player can concentrate only on the predetermined timing, and can concentrate on the contents of the continuous performance in the other games.

(Composition 13)
One notice of the first effect type (for example, step-up notice) and one notice of the second effect type (for example, dialogue notice) that can be executed in the first production state are
Display is not canceled by operating a predetermined stop button (for example, a second stop button).

In other words, the step-up notice or dialogue notice started to be displayed by operating the start lever or operating the first stop button proceeds without being canceled when the second stop button is operated.

(Composition 14)
The display of the advance notice of the first type of effect or the advance notice of the second type of effect that can be executed in the first effect state is performed when the third stop button is operated, the start lever is operated, or the first stop is displayed. The display started by operating the button is canceled, and the display by operating the third stop button is started,
When it shifts to the game standby state, the standby screen is displayed,
The display caused by the operation of the third stop button is erased when a new bet operation or the start lever is operated (start of the next game) or when the standby screen is displayed.

(Composition 15)
In the second production state (continuous production), when the announcement of the second production type 1 is displayed,
Even when the 3rd stop button is operated, the display of the notice of 1 is not erased,
When it shifts to the game standby state, the standby screen is displayed,
The display of the notice 1 is configured to be erased when a new bet operation or start lever operation (start of the next game) is performed, or when the standby screen is displayed.

In this way, when the speech notice is displayed during the continuous performance, the third stop button is operated, and even if the speech notice is displayed to the end, the display itself is not erased and continues to be displayed. On the other hand, when there is a new bet operation or operation of the start lever, or when the screen shifts to the standby screen, the display of the advance notice of the dialog is erased. Moreover, the display of the continuous effect is also erased.

(Composition 16)
a first notice display start timing when a game is started in the first effect state and the display of the notice of one of the first effect types is started;
The second notice display start timing when the game is started in the first effect state and the display of the notice of one of the second effect types is started,
It is configured to be approximately the same (eg, within 1 second).

In other words, during normal production (first production state), the step-up notice (1st notice of the first production type) starts about 1 second after the start lever is operated, and the dialogue notice (1st production type) 1 notice) is also configured to start in about one second from the operation of the start lever.

Note that the timing for starting the first advance notice display and the timing for starting the second notice display are not substantially the same, and may be different. The display start timing may be configured to be earlier.

Note that both the step-up notice (one notice of the first effect type) and the dialogue notice (one notice of the second effect type) do not necessarily have to be displayed in one game.

(Composition 17)
A first notice display start timing when a game is started in a first effect state and display of an advance notice of one of the first effect types or an advance notice of one of the second effect types is started;
The second notice display start timing when the game is started in the second effect state and the display of the notice of one of the second effect types is started,
It is configured to be approximately the same (eg, within 1 second).

In other words, during normal production (first production state), step-up notice (1 of the 1st production types) and dialogue notice (1 of the 2nd production types) are displayed in about 1 second after the start lever is operated. The advance notice) is started, and even during the continuous production (second production state), the dialogue advance notice (announcement of one of the second production types) is started in about one second from the operation of the start lever. there is

Note that the timing for starting the first advance notice display and the timing for starting the second notice display are not substantially the same, and may be different. The display start timing may be configured to be earlier.

(Composition 18)
It has a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (during AT),
In the second game state,
While the first effect type and the second effect type can occur in the first effect state,
In the second effect state, only the second effect type can occur.

That is, during AT (second game state), in the state where continuous effects etc. do not occur (first effect state), step-up notice etc. (first effect type) and dialogue notice etc. (second effect type) However, during the continuous effect (second effect state), the step-up notice, etc. (first effect type) is not executed, and the dialogue notice, etc. (second effect type) can be executed.

(Composition 18-1)
It has a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (during AT),
In either the first game state or the second game state,
While the first effect type and the second effect type can occur in the first effect state,
In the second effect state, only the second effect type can occur.

That is, in either the normal game state (first game state) or during AT (second game state), in the state where continuous effects etc. do not occur (first effect state), step-up notice etc. (second 1 production type) and dialogue notice etc. (second production type) can be executed, but during continuous production (second production state), step-up notice etc. (first production type) is not executed and dialogue notice etc. ( second effect type) can be executed.

(Composition 19)
Equipped with a third effect (for example, button effect) that allows the player to operate the operation member,
There are cases where the third effect is not executed and the second effect state (for example, continuous effect) is entered, and where the third effect is executed and the second effect state is entered.
When the third effect is executed and the second effect state is entered, the first notice of the second effect type in the second effect state ( It is configured to increase the ratio of the dialogue announcement) displayed in the second display mode (for example, green characters, red characters).

In other words, when there is a button effect that allows the player to operate the button, and the player shifts to the continuous effect without the button effect, it is better to switch to the continuous effect with the button effect. It is configured so that the percentage displayed in red serifs is high.

By configuring in this way, attention is paid to whether or not there is a button effect before developing to the second effect state (continuous effect).

(Composition 20)
When a predetermined error (for example, door open error) occurs, an error display indicating the occurrence of the error is performed on the display device (for example, liquid crystal display device),
The error display is configured so as not to overlap with one notice of the first effect type (for example, step-up notice).

It should be noted that the error display may overlap with one notice of the first effect type (for example, step-up notice).

In addition, the error display may overlap with one announcement (for example, dialogue announcement) of the second effect type that can be executed in the first effect state (a state in which continuous effects, etc., do not occur in the normal stage). It may be configured so as not to overlap with one announcement (for example, speech announcement) of the second effect type that can be executed in the second effect state (during continuous effect).

(Composition 21)
It is configured so that the sound is output in one notice of the second effect type (for example, a dialogue notice),
When a predetermined error (for example, door open error) occurs, an error sound indicating the occurrence of the error is output,
While the error sound is being output, the sound of the second presentation type 1 announcement (for example, speech announcement) is configured not to be output or to be output at a volume of 0. - 特許庁

(Configuration 21 change example)
It is configured such that a sound is output in one notice of the first effect type (for example, a step-up notice),
When a predetermined error (for example, door open error) occurs, an error sound indicating the occurrence of the error is output,
While the error sound is being output, the sound of the first presentation type 1 notice (for example, the step-up notice) is configured not to be output or to be output at a volume of 0. - 特許庁

In this way, when the error sound overlaps with the announcement sound, the player or the hall clerk can easily make the error sound.

(Composition 22)
The type of display mode of the notice with the first performance type that can be executed in the first performance state and the type of display mode of the notice with the second performance type that can be executed in the third performance state are configured to be different. .

Specifically, the display mode of the step-up notice (notice with the first effect type) that can be executed in the state where continuous effects etc. are not occurring in the normal stage (first effect state) In order, it can be displayed in four patterns of blue<yellow<green<red, but display of an accessory notice (announcement with a second effect type) that can change the color of the accessory that can be executed during the sign (third effect state) The mode is configured so that it can be displayed in 7 patterns of white<blue<yellow<green<orange<red<purple in order from the least expected.

In addition, in the state where continuous effects etc. do not occur in the normal stage (first effect state), the small notice etc. (notice with the second effect type) that can be executed will Four patterns of blue<yellow<green<red may be provided in the same manner as the display mode of the step-up notice (prediction with the first effect type) that can be executed in the (first effect state).

In this way, by providing different display patterns depending on the presentation state, it is possible to easily keep the player's interest during the chance during the sign.

<Specifications 1 of gaming machine in assumed slot machine PS1>
The gaming machine specification 1 (hereinafter referred to as specification 1) in the premised slot machine PS1 has a reel arrangement as shown in FIG. The first reel in FIG. 20 corresponds to the left reel 8a, the second reel corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the third reel corresponds to the right reel 8c. As shown in FIG. 20, the symbols drawn on the reel of specification 1 are "red seven", "bar", "moon A", "moon B", "replay", "cherry", "camel", " There are 10 types of "Blank A", "Blank B", and "Blank C".

From the display window of specification 1, 9 patterns of 3 vertical × 3 horizontal are visible, and the effective line is the upper row for the left reel 8a, the middle row for the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c. It is in the middle stage and has one line of bending.

Figures 21 to 24 show the combination of symbols. When the specified number is 3, it is the specified number when the CB is not operating, and when the specified number is 2, it is the specified number when the CB is operating. is a number. 21 to 24, ``2 types of BB'' in the column of ``winning symbols/operation symbols/pattern symbol names'' refers to MB, and ``replay'' refers to replay, and ``winning'' means It's about playing a minor role.

FIG. 25 is a condition device list table for bonuses. For example, the condition device ``2 types BB-A condition device'' with the bonus condition device number ``1'' is composed of the component ``2 types BB01'', and the ``2 types BB01'' is the ``winning pattern/operation It corresponds to "2 types of BB01 operation patterns" in "Design/Pattern Design Name", more specifically "Moon A-Replay-Red Seven", "Moon A-Replay-Bar", "Moon A-Replay- Six symbol combinations of "Monthly B-Replay-Red Seven", "Monthly B-Replay-Bar", and "Monthly B-Replay-Camel" correspond.

26 to 28 are condition device lists for winning or replaying. The item of "winning replay" describes the conditional device number, the item of "conditional device" describes the name of the conditional device, and the item of "common name" describes the common name of the conditional device. The "component" item describes the symbol combinations that make up the condition device, and the "control-related" item describes the order of stop operations for each game state and the winning symbol combinations.

For example, the condition device "replay-A condition device" with the condition device number "1" is composed of the constituent elements "replay 01, 05 to 06", and "replay 01" is the "winning pattern・It corresponds to "replay 01 operation symbol" in "operation symbol/pattern symbol name", more specifically, two symbol combinations of "month A-replay-replay" and "month B-replay-replay". is supported. In addition, "replay 05" corresponds to "replay 05 operation symbol" in "winning symbol/operation symbol/pattern symbol name" in FIG. ” corresponds to one symbol combination. In addition, "replay 06" corresponds to "replay 06 operation symbol" in "winning symbol/operation symbol/pattern symbol name" in FIG. 21, more specifically "replay-bar-red seven". , “Replay-Blank A-Red Seven”, and “Replay-Blank B-Red Seven”. Further, when the stop switch other than the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is first stopped, the replay 01 is stopped and displayed, and when the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is first stopped, the stop acceptance position is reached. It is described that any one of replay 01, replay 05, and replay 06 is stop-displayed according to .

Also, for example, the condition device "winning-A9 condition device" with the condition device number "15" is composed of the constituent elements "winning 03-04, 07-08, 11-12, 15-16, 19, 56" , "winning 03" corresponds to "winning 03 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. B-camel-replay' two symbol combinations correspond. Also, "winning 04" corresponds to "winning 04 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month A-bar-Month A". Also, "winning 04" corresponds to "winning 04 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month A-bar-Month A". Also, "winning 07" corresponds to "winning 07 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. 22, more specifically "month A-blank A-month B". , "Month A-Blank B-Month B". Also, "winning 08" corresponds to "winning 08 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month B-Bar-Month A". Also, "winning 11" corresponds to "winning 11 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. 22, more specifically "month B-blank A-month B" , "Month B-Blank B-Month B". Also, "winning 12" corresponds to "winning 12 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , and "Moon A-Bar-Blank C". Also, "winning 15" corresponds to "winning 15 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month A-Blank B-Blank A". Also, "winning 16" corresponds to "winning 16 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month B-Bar-Blank C" are corresponding. Also, "winning 19" corresponds to "winning 19 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month B-Blank B-Blank A". Also, "winning 56" corresponds to "winning 56 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. The two symbol combinations "Cherry-Replay-Replay" correspond. Furthermore, the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is first stopped, the left stop switch 13a corresponding to the left reel 8a is secondly stopped, and the middle stop switch 13b corresponding to the middle reel 8b is thirdly stopped. , the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is first stopped, the middle stop switch 13b corresponding to the middle reel 8b is secondly stopped, and the left reel is stopped. When the left stop switch 13a corresponding to 8a is stopped thirdly, the win 56 is stopped and displayed. 08 or 11 is displayed in a stopped state, and it is described that a small winning combination is lost at 1/2. In other words, when the stop receiving position of each reel is set at random (so-called appropriate hitting or free hitting), the stop corresponding to the pressing timing of the third operated stop switch. A combination of symbols corresponding to any of winning 04, 07, 08 or 11 is stopped and displayed according to the reception position with a probability of 1/2, and a small winning combination is won. It is described that the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the components of the "conditional device" is not stopped and displayed, and a small winning combination is lost.

29 to 31 are internal lottery data in the non-RT state. "R1" to "R6" in the figure correspond to "set value 1" to "set value 6", respectively. Also, for example, there is a numerical value "3240" at the position corresponding to the second type BB-A in R1 in FIG. Therefore, the winning probability of the two types of BB-A in R1 is 3240/65536. 29 to 31 are the internal lottery data divided for each conditional device, so even if the numbers from "Type 2 BB-A" to "Winning Q" are added, 65536 will not be obtained. This is because "Type 2 BB-A" to "Type 2 BB-I" overlap with other condition devices. It should be noted that the sum of "64788", which is the total number of entries from "Replay-A" to "Winning Q", and "748", which is the number of entries of "lost" (not shown), gives "65536". Become.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing RT start conditions and end conditions. For example, after RWM initialization, it shifts to the "non-RT" state, and in the "non-RT" state, shifts to RT1 when "2 types of BB-A condition device" to "2 types of BB-E condition device" are activated It is stated that In other words, if any one of 2 types BB-A, 2 types BB-B, 2 types BB-C, 2 types BB-D, and 2 types BB-E wins during non-RT, it shifts to RT1.

When the 2 types of BB-A to F operating symbols are displayed, the 2 types of BB-A to F are completed by paying out more than 11 cards, and the game shifts to the non-RT state. Also, when the operating pattern of the 2nd type BB-G is displayed, the 2nd type BB-G is terminated by paying out more than 7 cards, and the state shifts to the non-RT state. In addition, when the 2 types of BB-H and I operating symbols are displayed, the 2 types of BB-H and I are completed by paying out more than one, and the state shifts to the non-RT state. In addition, two types of BB-A to I have PB=1 hand, and can be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop timing.

In specification 1, as shown in FIG. 29, the number of non-RT wins for 2 types of BB is 36620, and the number of non-RT staying games is about 2 games on average. Of the two types of BB, the winning number of the two types of BB-A to E that move to RT1 is 17820, and the possibility of staying at RT1 is high.

33 and 32 are internal lottery data in the RT1 state. Description of each item is omitted because it is similar to that of FIGS.

The transition of the main game state of Specification 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

After the RWM is initialized, the main game state number=0 is entered. Main game state = 0 corresponds to the normal section, and when winning the advantageous section transition lottery, main game state number = 1, main game state number = 2, main game state number = 3, or main game state Go to any of number=4.

Main game state number = 1 is, in specification 1, AC, which is an AT state that notifies the player of an advantageous operation mode when the bell is hit in the pressing order, SAC, which is an AT state different from AC, or AC and SAC This is a premonitory state that produces a sense of anticipation as to whether or not a transition to BB (so-called sub-bonus), which is a different AT state, will occur. When main game state number = 1, transition to a predetermined transition destination (main game state = 0, main game state number = 2, main game state number = 3, or main game state number = 5) do.

Main game state number=2 is a game state corresponding to AC. In AC, when winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, and winning F1-F12, which are the pressing order bell group, are won, the player is notified of the pressing order advantageous to the player. It is in a play state to play. AC is managed by the number of games, and 30 is set in the AC gaming counter as the initial number of games. Then, when the value of the AC game counter becomes 0, the main game state = 1, the main game state number = 3, or the main game state number = 5 according to the game state lottery result during AC. to any of the During AC, the value of the AC game counter may increase (so-called game number addition) according to the result of the internal lottery.

Main game state number=3 is a game state corresponding to SAC. In the SAC, similarly to the AC, when the bell groups of the order of pressing the bells, which are the prizes A1 to A12, the prizes B1 to B12, the prizes C1 to C12, the prizes D1 to D12, the prizes E1 to E12, and the prizes F1 to F12, are won, the player is advantageous. It is in a game state in which the pressing order is notified. The SAC is managed by the number of games, and as the initial number of games, the value won in the AC game counter set lottery is set in the AC game counter. Then, when the value of the AC game counter becomes 0, the main game state is 1, the main game state number is 2, or the main game state number is 5 according to the game state lottery result during the SAC. to any of the During the SAC, the value of the AC game counter may be increased according to the result of the internal lottery (so-called addition of the number of games). In addition, in the AC game counter set lottery, there is a high possibility that a value of 30 or more will be won as an expected value, so it can be said that SAC is in a more advantageous state than AC.

Main game state number=4 is a game state corresponding to BB (so-called sub-bonus). In BB, similarly to AC and SAC, when winning A1 to A12, winning B1 to B12, winning C1 to C12, winning D1 to D12, winning E1 to E12, and winning F1 to F12, which are the pressing order bell group, are won, the player It is in a game state in which the pressing order that is advantageous to the player is notified. The BB is managed by the payout number, and 100 is set in the BB number counter as the initial number. As a result of the game, the number of payouts is subtracted for each winning, and when the value of the BB number counter becomes 0, the main game state=0 and the main game state number=2 according to the game state lottery result during the BB. , or main game state number=3. During the BB, the value of the BB number counter may be increased according to the result of the internal lottery (so-called number addition).

Main game state number=5 is a game state corresponding to the ending. In the ending, like AC, SAC, and BB, if winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, and winning F1-F12 are won. The game state is such that the player is notified of the pressing order that is advantageous to the player. The ending shifts when either the MY counter is 2200 or the advantageous section clear counter is 50, and continues until the MY counter is 2400 or more or the advantageous section clear counter reaches 0. Then, when the MY counter is 2400 or more, or when the advantageous zone clear counter is 0, the main game state is changed to 0.

The main game state number=6 is the game state corresponding to the confirmation screen. On the confirmation screen, when winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, and winning F1-F12, which are the pressing order bell group, are won, a pressing order advantageous to the player is set. It is in a game state in which there is a case where notification is made and a case where notification is not made. This is because when the determination flag is 0 on the confirmation screen, winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, and winning F1-F12 are advantageous to the player. When the pressing order is announced and the judgment flag is 1 on the confirmation screen, even if winning prizes A1 to A12, winning prizes B1 to B12, winning prizes C1 to C12, winning prizes D1 to D12, winning prizes E1 to E12, and winning prizes F1 to F12 are won. This means that the pressing order that is advantageous to the player is not notified. Further, since BB starts after the confirmation screen ends, 1 is stored in the BB flag on the confirmation screen.

On the confirmation screen, when any one of replay-A to F is won, the liquid crystal displays "Aim for the red seven from the right", the instruction monitor displays "7", and the first stop is made on the right reel 8c. Red Seven symbol (No. 4 of the 3rd reel in FIG. 20), Red Seven symbol of the middle reel 8b (No. 4 of the 2nd reel in FIG. 20) for the 2nd stop, Red Seven of the left reel 8a for the 3rd stop It is notified that the symbol (number 4 of the first reel in FIG. 20) is aimed at and operated. Replay-When any one of A to F is won, if the operation is performed as instructed, the replay 05 operating symbol (No. 45 in FIG. 21) is displayed on the active line and the red seven symbol is aligned in the middle row. It will be stopped and displayed. Then, when the replay 05 operation symbol is stopped and displayed, 0 is stored in the determination flag, 0 is stored in the BB flag, and 4 is stored in the main game state number. In addition, 0 is stored as the initial value of the determination flag, and when one of the replay-A to F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen, and the stop operation is performed as instructed, and the replay 05 operation symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, since 0 is stored in the determination flag, the determination flag will not become 1 when the stop operation is performed as instructed.

In addition, when any one of replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, the liquid crystal displays "Aim for the red seven from the right", and when the instruction monitor displays "7", the player If you do not perform the stop operation as instructed (if you did not perform the stop operation as instructed in the push order, or if you did not aim for the red seven symbol even though you performed the stop operation as instructed in the push order), the replay 05 operation symbol does not stop and stores 1 in the determination flag.

When 1 is stored in the judgment flag (when the player does not perform the stop operation as instructed), the main game state number remains at 6 (confirmation screen), and the main game state number = 4 (BB). does not migrate. Therefore, the main game state number=6 (confirmation screen) is maintained until one of the replay-A to F wins again and the replay 05 operation symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, even after the second time on the confirmation screen, when any of the replays A to F wins, the liquid crystal will display "Aim for the red seven from the right" and the instruction monitor will display "7". ing.

By constructing in this way, BB can be started according to the player's eye-pushing skill, so that it is possible to provide the game property of making the player aim at the BB symbol after the BB is won.

Furthermore, while 1 is stored in the determination flag, winnings A1-A12, winnings B1-B12, winnings C1-C12, winnings D1-D12, winnings E1-E12, and winnings F1-F12, which are the pressing order bell group, are won. Since an advantageous operation mode is not notified even if the player wins, the player can obtain a high minor winning combination only with a probability of 1/6. Therefore, when comparing the case where 1 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen and the case where 0 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen, the case where 1 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen This state is disadvantageous to the player. Note that the push order navigation rate when winning the push order bell group may be less than 100%, and the push order navigation rate need not be 0%. For example, the pushing order navigation rate may be set such that the ball output rate is 100% (maintaining the current state).

By configuring in this way, when the replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, it is possible to give an advantage or disadvantage after that according to the skill of the player, and to improve the interest of the game by eye-pushing. It becomes possible.

In addition, the game state (main game state number = 4 (BB)) after the replay 05 operation pattern is displayed when any of replay-A to F wins for the first time on the confirmation screen, and replay on the confirmation screen If you compare the game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the re-game 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of the game-A to F is won for the first time, you can re-start on the confirmation screen. The game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the replay 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of game-A to F is won for the first time is the winning order bell group. Even if winning prizes A1 to A12, prizes B1 to B12, prizes C1 to C12, prizes D1 to D12, prizes E1 to E12, and prizes F1 to F12 are won, an advantageous operation mode is not notified, so it can be said that the player is in a disadvantageous state. . It should be noted that the push order navigation rate need not be 0% because the push order navigation rate when winning the push order bell group may be less than 100%.

By configuring in this way, when the replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, it is possible to give an advantage or disadvantage after that according to the skill of the player, and to improve the interest of the game by eye-pushing. It becomes possible.

Also, while 1 is stored in the determination flag, the winning order bell group of winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, and winning F1-F12 are displayed. If you win, you will be notified of an advantageous operation mode. , a set stock lottery, a loop rate lottery, or a lottery with an added number of games, etc.) may be set at the lowest level to give the lowest advantage during the BB. The lottery level differs in the probability that a result favorable to the player will occur when a predetermined lottery is executed, and the lowest level means the probability that a result favorable to the player will occur when a predetermined lottery is executed. It is low. Also, while 0 is stored in the determination flag at this time, the winning order bell group is winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, winning F1-F12. When is won, an advantageous operation mode is reported, and the predetermined lottery level that can be executed during the BB that starts after the replay-A to F wins and the replay 05 operation symbol is stopped and displayed is not disrespected. (Deliberately not set the lowest level lottery level). Therefore, when comparing the case where 1 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen and the case where 0 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen, the case where 1 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen This state is disadvantageous to the player.

In this case, even if the wins A1 to A12, the wins B1 to B12, the wins C1 to C12, the wins D1 to D12, the wins E1 to E12, and the wins F1 to F12, which are the pressing order bell group, win may not be notified. In addition, when the pressing order bell group is won in a situation where 0 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen, an advantageous operation mode is notified, and then even in a situation where 1 is stored in the determination flag, the pressing order bell group is displayed. In the case where an advantageous operation mode is notified when winning a prize, there is a possibility that the player will intentionally delay the confirmation screen and obtain the push order bell. An advantageous operation mode is notified when the order bell group wins, but after the 11th game from the start of the confirmation screen, an advantageous operation mode is not reported when the order bell group wins regardless of the determination flag. good too. As a guideline for these 10 games, the probability that any one of the replays A to F wins at least once is set at about 80%, but it can be set arbitrarily as long as it is not too long.

By configuring in this way, when the replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, it is possible to give an advantage or disadvantage after that according to the skill of the player, and to improve the interest of the game by eye-pushing. It becomes possible.

In addition, the game state (main game state number = 4 (BB)) after the replay 05 operation pattern is displayed when any of replay-A to F wins for the first time on the confirmation screen, and replay on the confirmation screen If you compare the game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the re-game 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of the game-A to F is won for the first time, you can re-start on the confirmation screen. The game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the replay 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of game-A to F is won for the first time is replay-A. ~ F wins and replay 05 Predetermined lottery that can be executed during the BB that starts after the operation pattern is stopped and displayed (push order navigation rate lottery, set stock lottery, loop rate lottery, or games such as game number addition lottery It is also possible to set the lottery level of the lottery advantageous to the player to the lowest level so that the advantage in the BB is the lowest. In this case, the game state after the replay 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of replay-A to F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen is any of regame-A to F on the confirmation screen. It can be said that this state is more disadvantageous to the player than the game state after the replay 05 operation pattern is displayed when Ka wins for the first time. Also in this mode, when the pressing order bell group wins, an operation mode advantageous to the player may or may not be reported. Further, even when an advantageous operation mode is notified, the notification may be terminated after about 10 games.

By configuring in this way, when the replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, it is possible to give advantage or disadvantage after that according to the skill of the player, and to improve the interest of the game by eye pressing. It becomes possible.

In addition, none of the replay-A to F triggers the shift to RT, and the lottery result (winning result) is a conditional device that cannot be carried over to the next game or later, and the replay 05 operation pattern is stopped and displayed. (In other words, the RT state is maintained even when the replay 05 operation pattern is stopped and displayed, so the operation probability (winning probability) related to the replay also increases. The operation probability related to winning prizes such as A1 to A12 does not change). In addition, the conditional device in which the red sevens are displayed in a straight line is not limited to replaying, but may be a conditional device related to winning. =1 conditional devices are suitable. In addition, the number of payouts in the case of displaying red sevens in a straight line in the condition device related to winning is as small as possible, and one sheet is suitable. This is because if you do not set the conditions for the red sevens to line up in a straight line, you will not be able to align the red sevens on the confirmation screen unless the device is set to a number that is realistically easy to win. This is because unnecessary payouts occur even when it is not desired to align the balls in a straight line, and the freedom of putting out balls is restricted.

By configuring in this way, advantages and disadvantages can be generated according to the skill of the player without using a bonus condition device or a condition device for RT transition opportunity, so that the game can be played by eye pressing without changing the game state. It is possible to improve the quality. In particular, in the specifications for playing the game within the bonus, since the game using the bonus condition device or the RT transition trigger condition device is not possible, it is possible to provide a new game property by eye pressing.

In addition, when one of replay-A to F is won, the replay 05 operation pattern that can be stopped and displayed must first stop the right reel (stop operation in the order of right, middle, left, or right, left, middle) The operation mode for stopping the right reel first is the left-center-right operation order, the left-right middle operation order, the middle-left-right operation order, the middle-right-left operation order, the right-left operation order, and the right-left operation order. Among the six types of operation order, the middle operation order, and the right, middle, and left operation orders, this is the operation order in which the normal base is the lowest.

Here, the normal base is the expected value of the number of payouts for the prescribed number of 3 (the number of inputs of 3). According to FIGS. 26 to 28 and FIGS. 33 to 35, as the expected value of the number of payouts in the specified number 3 of the left, middle, right operation order in RT1 of setting 1, for example, the expected number of 2 types of BB-A (operation pattern Since the number of payouts at the time of display) is 0 and the number of entries is 0, the expected value is 0, and the expected number of replay-A is 3 (replay is the prescribed number of 3, so the number of payouts is calculated as 3). , the number is 864, the expected value is 0.03955, and the expected number of win-A1 is 12 (because left, middle, right is the correct order), and the number is 900, so the expected value is 0.03955. 16479, and since the expected number of pieces to be lost is 0 and the set number is 452, the expected value is 0. The expected value of each conditional device is calculated by such a calculation, and the expected value of all the conditional devices is added up to 1.66857. It is derived that the expected value of the number of payouts in the specified number 3 of the order is 0.55619 (however, the expected value is calculated by obtaining 2 coins for Winning-G and obtaining 1 coin for Winning-M).

In addition, the expected value of the number of payouts in the specified number 3 of the left, right, middle, middle, right, left operation order, or middle, right, left operation order in RT1 of setting 1 is the left, middle, right operation order in RT1 of setting 1. It is the same as the expected value of the number of payouts in Expression 3, which is 0.55619.

Also, as the expected value of the number of payouts in the prescribed number 3 of the operation order of right, left, and middle in RT1 of setting 1, for example, the expected number of 2 types BB-A (the number of payouts when displaying the operating pattern) is 0, and the number is 0 Therefore, the expected value is 0, the expected number of replay-A is 3 (the number of payouts is calculated as 3 because the replay is the specified number of 3), and the number of entries is 864, so the expected value is 0 03955, and the expected number of prize-A1 is 0.5 (left, middle, right is the order of pushing incorrect answers, and one is obtained in 1/2), and the number is 900, so the expected value is 0.5. 00686, the expected number of prize-A11 is 1 (because one is obtained in the right middle left), the number is 900, the expected value is 0.01373, the expected number of losers is 0, and the number is 452 Therefore, the expected value is 0. The expected value of each conditional device is calculated by such a calculation, and the expected value of all the conditional devices is added up to 1.69375. It is derived that the expected value of the number of payouts in the prescribed number 3 of the order is 0.56458 (however, the expected value is calculated by obtaining 2 coins for Winning-G and obtaining 1 coin for Winning-M).

In addition, the expected value of the number of payouts in the specified number 3 of the operation order of right, middle, left in RT1 of setting 1 is the same as the expected value of the number of payouts in the specified number of 3 of the operation order of right, left, middle in RT1 of setting 1, 0.56458.

In this way, the normal operation order for stopping the right reel first (right-left-center, right-center-left) is higher than the other operation orders (left-center-right, left-right-center, middle-left, middle-right-left). base is high. Then, in the operation order for stopping the right reel first, the degree of expectation for winning AT is made lower than in the other operation orders, thereby making the overall ball payout rate lower than in the other operation orders. As described above, although the operation order for stopping the right reel first is usually higher than the other operation orders, the result is a disadvantageous operation order. It is in a situation where it is difficult to operate in the operation order to stop first. In other words, the operation order for stopping the right reel first is the penalty push order, and the player is made aware of this in advance so as not to operate it. With such a configuration, by lowering the possibility that the player operates in the operation order to stop the right reel first, the replay 05 operation pattern is less likely to be displayed even if replay-A to F are won during normal times. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from creating excessive expectations due to the red seven patterns which are not intended in terms of specifications.

<Description of Test Signal Output According to the Present Invention>
The gaming machine of the present invention executes an internal lottery process upon reception of an operation of the start switch 12 for a gaming machine test, and executes a process for outputting a test signal before executing the spinning start process.

The gaming machine sends a first test signal (also referred to as an IF2 test signal) that instructs the player to make the best shot, and a second test signal (IF3 (also called a test signal) and processing for outputting each of them.

As processing for outputting the IF2 test signal, data (operation order, left reel 8a stop reception position, middle reel 8b stop reception position, right Set the reel 8c (stop reception position). For example, if the prize-G condition device shown in FIG. Since 2 payouts cannot be received and only 1 payout is given, the content instructed by the IF2 test signal is that the pressing order is random, the left reel 8a is stopped at the 3rd symbol, and the middle reel 8b is the 10th symbol. , and the right reel 8c is stopped at the 2nd symbol. When operated in accordance with this instruction, the symbol combination "replay"-"cherry"-"red seven" (see FIG. 24) of winning prize 63 is stopped and displayed, and it becomes possible to receive a payout in a 2-card combination.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "00H", which is the push order information stored in the ROM address "2C60H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a stored in the ROM address "2C61H". "03H", which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2C62H", and "02H" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2C63H". , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF2 test signal.

Also, for example, if the prize-A1 condition device in FIG. 26 is won in the AT state (when the instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor), the small combination acquisition rate does not change at any position of the stop reception position, but the pressing order is left. If it is not operated in the order of middle and right, 12 payouts cannot be received and 1 payout or no payout will occur. The stop reception position of the reel 8a is random, the stop reception position of the middle reel 8b is random, and the stop reception position of the right reel 8c is random. When the operation is performed according to this instruction, the symbol combination "Month A" - "Camel" - "Replay" or "Month B" - "Camel" - "Replay" (see Fig. 22) of winning prize 03 is stopped and displayed 12. It is possible to receive the payout of the winning combination. In addition, when the win-A1 condition device in the non-AT state is won, the pressing order and the stop acceptance position are random, and the IF2 test signal is output.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "01H" which is the pushing order information stored in the ROM address "2C64H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a stored in the ROM address "2C65H". "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2C66H", "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2C67H" , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF2 test signal. "7FH" is data stored when the stop reception position is irrelevant, and may be any value (14H) that is greater than or equal to the number of symbols.

Subsequently, as a process for outputting the IF3 test signal, data to be output from the table data stored in the ROM according to the result of the internal lottery process (operation order, left reel 8a stop acceptance position, middle reel 8b stop acceptance position, right reel 8c stop reception position). For example, in the specification 1 described above, since the operation order other than the operation order to stop the right reel 8c first is the lowest at the normal time, the content instructed as the IF3 test signal is the order of pushing left, middle, right, and so on. The stop reception position of the left reel 8a is random, the stop reception position of the middle reel 8b is random, and the stop reception position of the right reel 8c is random. If operated according to this instruction, the normal base will be stopped in the lowest pressing order, and the stop reception position will be random, so it is necessary to press the eyes. There will be a case of winning, a case of obtaining a small winning combination, and a case of missing a small winning combination.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "01H" which is the push order information stored in the ROM address "2D60H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a stored in the ROM address "2D61H". , "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2D62H", and "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2D63H". , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF3 test signal.

Also, for example, if the prize-A1 condition device in FIG. 26 is won in the AT state (when the instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor), the small combination acquisition rate does not change at any position of the stop reception position, but the pressing order is left. If it is not operated in the order of middle and right, 12 payouts cannot be received and 1 payout or no payout will occur. The stop reception position of the reel 8a is random, the stop reception position of the middle reel 8b is random, and the stop reception position of the right reel 8c is random. When the operation is performed according to this instruction, the symbol combination "Month A" - "Camel" - "Replay" or "Month B" - "Camel" - "Replay" (see Fig. 22) of winning prize 03 is stopped and displayed 12. It is possible to receive the payout of the winning combination. In addition, when the win-A1 condition device in the non-AT state is won, the pushing order is left, middle, right, and the stop acceptance position is random, and the IF3 test signal is output.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "01H" which is the pushing order information stored in the ROM address "2D64H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a stored in the ROM address "2D65H". , "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2D66H", and "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2D67H". , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF3 test signal. "7FH" is data stored when the stop reception position is irrelevant, and may be any value (14H) that is greater than or equal to the number of symbols.

Also, for example, when the replay-A1 condition device in FIG. 26 is won in the main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen) (when the instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor), the stop reception position is any position. does not change, but unless the pressing order is operated in the order of right, left, middle, and so on, the "red seven" symbol combination will not be aligned in a straight line. The stop reception position of the reel 8a is random, the stop reception position of the middle reel 8b is random, and the stop reception position of the right reel 8c is random. If the operation is performed as instructed, there is a possibility that the symbol combination "replay" - "red seven" - "red seven" (see Fig. 21) of replay 05 will be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination "red seven" will be displayed. It is possible to align in a straight line. When the replay-A1 condition device in the non-AT state is won, the pressing order is left, middle, right, and the stop acceptance position is random, and the IF3 test signal is output.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "06H" which is the pushing order information stored at the ROM address "2E64H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a which is stored at the ROM address "2E5H". , "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2E66H", and "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2E67H". , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF3 test signal. "7FH" is data stored when the stop reception position is irrelevant, and may be any value as long as it is a value greater than or equal to the number of symbols (a value of 14H or greater for 20 symbols).

After each data is set, the processing for outputting the IF2 test signal is executed in the order of the operation order, the left reel 8a stop reception position, the middle reel 8b stop reception position, and the right reel 8c stop reception position. , the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a, the stop acceptance position of the middle reel 8b, and the stop acceptance position of the right reel 8c in this order.

With this configuration, it is possible to accurately transmit the IF2 test signal and the IF3 test signal toward the test IF board.

<Description of Winning Effect, Settlement Effect and Throwing Effect Applicable to Prerequisite Slot Machine PS1>
Next, the relationship between the winning effect, the settlement effect and the throwing effect applicable to the premised slot machine PS1 will be described.

In the effects applicable to the slot machine PS1, which is assumed to be described below, the winning effects accompanying the payout process of game medals based on winning a small winning combination such as a winning combination, the settlement effects accompanying the settlement process, and the betting operations. By making it possible to output both of the insertion effects at the same time, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that the settlement was not performed normally or that the insertion was not performed normally. The purpose is to make people aware of

A configuration related to the winning effect, the settlement effect and the insertion effect applicable to the premised slot machine PS1 will be described below.

<Main control means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the premised slot machine PS1, but details of the processing omitted in the premised slot machine PS1 will be described below.

<Process when game medals are inserted>
If game medals can be inserted, and if the number of bets is not set to the upper limit, a bet setting (also referred to as a bet) is made for the number of inserted game medals, and the upper limit is set. If it is set to , the number of sheets put into the credit is added. Also, if the number of bets is not set to the upper limit and the number of bets that can be set is stored in the credits, bets are set according to the operation of the bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). . Here, the insertion of game medals means that the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 normally pass through the medal selector 34 .
Before starting a game with game medals set to bet or stored in credits (after setting the required number of bets and before operating the start lever), the settlement switch is operated. After that, the settlement process is possible.
In addition, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control means (sub control board 1000, also referred to as effect control means) when game medals are inserted, and when the bet switch is operated It transmits to the sub-control means a reserve insertion command corresponding to the number of bets set. Based on these commands, the sub-control means is capable of executing a throwing effect such as outputting a game medal throwing sound.

<Winning process (payout process)>
Winning processing (hereinafter also referred to as payout processing) pays out predetermined game medals according to the winning small winning combination (symbol combination displayed stopped) when it is determined by the winning determination processing that the winning winning combination has won. processing. To pay out the game medals means to add the credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting payout based on winning (whether credit addition or payout from hopper 44), and ends payout based on winning. When doing so, a payout end command is transmitted to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting game medal payout sounds and executing back lamp effects (also referred to as BL effects). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are transmitted even when there is no payout (at the time of loss, at the time of replay winning). When the player loses or wins a prize in the replay, information on the number of game medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, and then a payout end command is transmitted.

<Payment processing>
When the settlement switch is operated while the game is not being played, the game medals corresponding to the number of bets set and the number of accumulated credits are paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement processing). Run. When the settlement process is started, the main control means transmits a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process ends, the main control means transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means can execute settlement performance such as output of settlement sound based on the settlement start command and the settlement end command.

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game. A winning effect, a settlement effect, etc. are executed.

<Introduction>
This is an effect executed when game medals are inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on a medal insertion command and a stored insertion command transmitted from the main control means. In the main control means, any one of the accumulation insertion command (1 sheet), the accumulation insertion command (2 sheets), and the accumulation insertion command (3 sheets) is set as the accumulation insertion command according to the number of bets set. The command to put in the storage is transmitted to the sub-control means. When a stored insertion command (one coin) is received, an insertion sound A indicating that one coin has been bet is output once (e.g., a sound of da) is output to inform the player that one coin has been bet. . When the stored insertion command (three coins) is received, the insertion sound A is output three times to inform the player that three coins have been bet. When the medal insertion command is received, if the inserted game medals are set to bet, the insertion sound A is output once, and if the inserted game medals are stored, the insertion sound B is output once to indicate that one medal has been stored. (For example, outputting a sound) to notify the player of the bet or reserve.
In addition, when receiving the stock insertion command (three coins), instead of outputting the insertion sound A three times, an insertion sound C indicating that three coins have been bet may be output. , the same sound as when stored (for example, the input sound A may be output in all states). Also, different sounds (on-on sound D) may be output during normal times (during non-AT) and during AT.

<Prize-winning performance>
This is an effect that is executed when game medals are paid out, and is executed based on a payout start command and a payout end command. executed.

<Output sound>
The game medal payout sounds output during execution of the game medal payout process include a payout sound A and a payout sound B which are different sounds. The payout sound A is a payout sound output when the winning combination is won in the normal time (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout is performed. A payout sound B is a payout sound output when an advantageous payout is made by stopping the combination of correct symbols as a result of the winning of the pushing order during AT and the operation in the correct pushing order. If the operation is not performed in the correct order, the incorrect combination of symbols may be stopped and a disadvantageous payout may be performed. In this case, the payout sound is not output. The payout sound A starts when the payout start command is received, repeats the output of a specific sound (for example, a sound of duo) until the payout end command is received, and after that, after receiving the payout end command, a first specific time (for example, 1 second) is a payout sound that repeats and ends the output of a specific sound. Payout sound A is played during a predetermined payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout period) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed) By outputting the sound over time, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the payout is being performed. Further, by outputting the payout sound over a predetermined payout sound period longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player can feel that the payout is being performed during the period when the payout sound is being output. As a result of being able to expect to delay the start time of the next game, it becomes easier to execute without being canceled in the middle when the performance or the like according to the result of the internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time.

The payout sound B starts when the payout start command is received, repeats the output of a predetermined sound (for example, a sound of de) until the payout end command is received, and after that, after receiving the payout end command, a second specific time (for example, 2 seconds), and ends after repeating the output of a predetermined sound. That is, the payout sound B is output for a specific payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the second specific time to the actual payout period) longer than the actual payout period. , and this particular tone-on-play period is longer than the predetermined tone-on-play period of tone-on A. In this way, the payout sound B is output for a longer period than the payout sound A, so that it can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded. In addition, by outputting the payout sound B different from the payout sound A during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in an advantageous state different from the normal state.
In addition, although the payout sound is output until a predetermined time or a specific time has elapsed after receiving the payout end command, when the payout start command is received, the payout start and payout end are not triggered by the payout end command. The payout sound may be output for a period of time obtained by adding a predetermined time or a specific time to the time (whichever is longer between the addition of credits and the payout of game medals). In addition, although the normal payout sound A and the payout sound B during AT are different, the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp effect>
The back lamp performance includes a back lamp performance A and a back lamp performance B which are different from each other. Back lamp production A is a back lamp production that is output when the winning order is won at normal time (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct pushing order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is performed. be. The back lamp performance B is a back ramp performance executed when a winning combination is won during the AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout is performed. If the operation is not performed in the correct order, the wrong symbol combination may stop, but in that case, the back lamp effect is not executed. The back lamp effect A starts when the payout start command is received, repeats lighting and extinguishing of the back lamp in a specific pattern until the payout end command is received, and after that, when the payout end command is received, a first specific time (for example 1 second), the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off in a specific pattern. The back lamp effect A is executed over a predetermined back lamp effect period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed. , the player can easily recognize that a payout is being made. Further, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance A for a predetermined performance period longer than the period during which the payout is performed, whether the payout is performed during the period during which the back lamp performance A is performed. It can be expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and furthermore, it will not be canceled in the middle, such as when the performance, etc. according to the result of the internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time. easier to execute.

The back lamp effect B starts when the payout start command is received, repeats lighting and extinguishing of the back lamp in a predetermined pattern until the payout end command is received, and after that, when the payout end command is received, a second specific time (for example 2 seconds), the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off in a predetermined pattern, and the operation ends. That is, the back lamp effect B is illuminated over a specific back lamp effect period (a period obtained by adding the second specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, The lights are turned off repeatedly, and this specific back lamp effect period is longer than the predetermined back lamp effect period. In this way, the back lamp effect B is executed for a longer period of time than the back lamp effect A, so that it can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded. In addition, by executing the back lamp effect B different from the back lamp effect A during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that it is in an advantageous state different from the normal one.

In addition, the back lamp effect was executed until the first specific time or the second specific time elapsed after receiving the payout end command, but when the payout start command was received, the payout start was performed without using the payout end command as a trigger. The back lamp effect may be executed for a period of time obtained by adding the first specific time or the second specific time to the time required for completion (the longer one of the addition of credits and the payout of game medals). Also, although the back lamp effect is different between normal time and AT, the same back lamp effect may be executed. Moreover, although the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a fixed pattern, a series of turning on and off patterns may be determined and output from the start to the end of the back lamp presentation. In addition, both the "predetermined back lamp effect period" of the back lamp effect A and the "predetermined payout sound period" of the payout sound A are a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout time. are the same period, but the "predetermined back lamp effect period" and the "predetermined payout sound period" may be different periods. Regarding this, the relationship between the "specific back lamp effect period" of the back lamp effect B and the "specific payout sound period" of the payout sound B is the same. In short, the "predetermined period of sound to be played" and "specific period of sound to be played" of sounds A and B, and the "predetermined period of back lamp effect" and "specific period of back lamp effect" of back lamp effects A and B are respectively , longer than the actual payout period, and "predetermined payout sound period" < "specific payout sound period", "predetermined back lamp effect period" < "specific back lamp effect period" If there is a relationship, these periods can be set as appropriate.

<Payment performance>
This is an effect that is executed when the game medals are settled. It is executed based on the settlement start command and the settlement end command, and the output of the settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out and the settlement. A voice is output to the effect that the processing has ended. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and until the payment end command is received, a sound different from the payment sound (for example, a sound of do) is repeatedly output, and when the payment end command is received, after that, a third specific period For example, in 5 seconds), a voice indicating that the payment has been completed, such as "The payment has been completed," is output, and the process ends. That is, in the settlement effect, the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the settlement process is performed) is longer than the predetermined settlement effect period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the above-mentioned third specific time period).

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. FIG. FIG. 37 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, FIG. 38 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed, and FIG. FIG. 40 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch after the end of the payout process, FIG. 40 is a time chart when no game medals are inserted after the end of the settlement process, and FIG. 41 is a time chart after the end of the settlement process. It is a time chart in the case of throwing in. 37 to 41 are described using ON and OFF for convenience of explanation, but the corresponding processing and effects are described in parentheses. Specifically, payout processing / settlement processing / BL effect / settlement effect, ON indicates a state of execution, OFF indicates a state of non-execution, and when it changes from OFF to ON, processing etc. are started, and ON to OFF, it means that the process ends. With respect to the dispensing sound/insertion sound, ON indicates a state of output, and OFF indicates a state of non-output. The MAX bet lamp/medal insertable lamp ON indicates a lighting state, and OFF indicates a lighting state. The MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation indicates that ON has been operated, and OFF indicates that it has not been operated. Regarding medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed the medal selector 34 (the medal selector 34 detects the game medal), and OFF indicates that the game medal has not been inserted.

<When the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 37, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means generates payout sound A (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) based on the received payout start command. Output and back lamp effect A (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) is started. At the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues the output of payout sound A and the back lamp effect A as the winning effect for the period T1 (first specific time). After the payout process is completed at the timing of time t1, the main control means performs processing such as updating the RT state (game end check processing), and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. . At the timing of time t2, the main control means lights the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. Since the MAX bed switch was not operated, the MAX bed lamp continues to light up. At the timing of time t5, since the period T1 has passed since the timing of time t1, the sub-control means terminates the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be a predetermined payout sound period and a predetermined performance period. As described above, at the timing after time t1, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, and turning on the MAX bed lamp. By continuing the output of the sound A, the player can be made to recognize that the payout has been made and can be made to appropriately recognize that the bet can be set by the MAX bet operation, thereby improving the performance of the game machine. be able to.

<When the input operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 38, until the timing of time t2, the operation is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is operated. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends lighting of the MAX bet lamp (turns off), the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A, and from time t3 to time t4 (During the T2 period) As an effect for throwing-in, a throw-in sound A (referred to as throw-in sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) is output three times. At the timing of transition to time t3, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting dispensing sound A and outputting input sound A, thereby enabling smooth control. It is possible to make the player recognize that the MAX bet switch has been operated and that the bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. At the timing of time t3, the output of the payout sound A continues, but by ending the back lamp effect A, the bet setting is performed visually while the player recognizes the payout by the sound. can recognize that In addition, in FIG. 38, the insertion operation with the MAX bet switch was explained, but the insertion sound is similarly output even if the insertion operation with the 1 bet switch and medal insertion are performed.

<When the settlement operation is performed with the settlement button after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 39, until the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the adjustment button is operated instead of the operation of the MAX bet switch. be. At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends lighting (turns off) the MAX bed lamp. Then, the sub control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the elapse of the T1 period. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement effect. At the timing of time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When receiving the settlement end command, the sub-control means changes the output of the settlement sound to output a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed over a T3 period (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output at the same time, the player will be confused. By ending the payout sound A and the back lamp performance A, the player can be made to accurately recognize that the settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<When game medals are not inserted after settlement processing is completed>
As shown in FIG. 40, the main control means starts settlement processing at the timing of time t8, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the received settlement start command. Here, the back lamp effect is not executed (output) at the time of settlement, and the payout process and the settlement process can be visually different processes. At the timing of time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When receiving the settlement end command, the sub-control means changes the output of the settlement sound to output a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed over the period T3. After the settlement process is completed at the timing of time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker so that game medals can be inserted. At the timing of time t10, the main control means turns on the medal insertion ready lamp based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. Since no medals were inserted after that, the lighted state is continued. At the timing of time T13, the T3 period has passed since the timing of time t9, so the sub-control means terminates the output of the voice indicating that the payment has been completed. As described above, at the timing after time t10, the settlement effect is being executed, but the state is such that medals can be inserted.

<When game medals are inserted after settlement processing is completed>
As shown in FIG. 41, until the timing of time t10, the operation is the same as when game medals are not inserted after the end of the settlement process. Setting is performed, and a medal insertion command is transmitted to the sub-control means. The sub-control means outputs a throwing sound A once as a throwing performance based on the receipt of the medal throwing command, and the output is performed from the timing of time t11 to the timing of time t12. At the timing after time t11, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting the input sound A while outputting a voice indicating that the payment has been completed. While making the player aware that the game has ended, it is possible to make the player aware that the medals have been inserted and that the bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. 37 to 41, an example has been described in which the payout sound is the payout sound A and the BL effect is the back lamp effect A, but in these FIGS. 37 to 41, the payout sound is the payout sound B. , the BL effect may be the back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the period T1 in FIGS. 37 and 38 should be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

<Change in mode>
While the payout process and the settlement process are being performed, the same sound is repeatedly output during the period until the end. A command indicating that one card has been paid out and a command that can identify the remaining number of cards to be paid out are sent to the sub control means, and one card is paid out based on the receipt of these commands sent from the main control means. A payout sound or a settlement sound may be output every time.
Also, although the settlement sound is different from the payout sound, it may be the same sound as the payout sound. By using the same sound, the amount of sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. If the same sound is used, the payout process and the settlement process can be distinguished by the presence or absence of the back lamp effect. It can make you aware of what is going on.
Also, the settlement sound may be the same sound as the error sound. In this case also, the amount of sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity.
In addition, while the payout sound B is output during the AT, in addition to the output of the payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound indicating the correct pressing order such as "get" or "yes" will be output from the start of the payout process. It may be output in a shorter time than the second specific time (2 seconds) after the process is finished. By outputting the sound indicating the correct pressing order, it is possible to recognize that the stop switch has been correctly operated, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct pressing order, game medals can be earned. The player can recognize that the payout has been properly made.
In addition, the MAX bed lamp is turned on and off by the main control means. , the light may be turned off.

In addition, although it has been explained that the input effect is to output the input sound, in addition to the output of the input sound, the display device 32 displays an image indicating the input, or an LED lamp for effect is used to indicate that the input has been performed. Notification may be made.
In addition, as the winning effect, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed. You may notify that you have won a prize. At that time, when executing the throwing effect, the display of the display device 32 as the winning effect may be ended, the notification by the LED lamp may be ended, or the display of the display device 32 as the throwing effect, the LED lamp may not be performed.
In addition, as the effect of the settlement, the output of the settlement sound and the output of the voice indicating that the settlement has been completed are performed. Alternatively, an LED lamp for presentation may be used to notify that the payment is being made. At that time, when executing the throwing effect, the display of the display device 32 as the settlement effect may be ended, the notification by the LED lamp may be ended, the display of the display device 32 as the throwing effect, the LED Notification by the lamp may not be executed.
Also, although the payout appearance is executed in the pushing order role, the payout appearance may also be performed in other small roles (watermelon role, bell role regardless of pushing order, cherry role, etc.). By outputting a payout sound different from that of the winning combination or performing a back lamp performance different from that of the winning combination in the other small combination, it is possible to easily recognize that a winning combination different from that of the winning combination has been won.
Also, the time and the length of the period in the slot machine PS1 which is assumed is an example, and can be changed in various ways.

<Description of Errors and Winning Effect Concerning Hopper 44 Applicable to Prerequisite Slot Machine PS1>
Next, a description will be given of the relationship between an error relating to the hopper 44 applicable to the premised slot machine PS1 and a winning effect.

In the effect applicable to the slot machine PS1, which is assumed to be described below, even if a hopper empty error occurs during the winning effect accompanying the start of the payout process or the effect after the reels stop, The purpose is to make the player recognize the result of the game, the result of the performance, etc.

An error related to the hopper 44 applicable to the premised slot machine PS1 and a configuration related to the winning effect will be described below.

<Main control means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the premised slot machine PS1 and the description of the winning effect, the settlement effect, and the input effect applicable to the premised slot machine PS1. Details of the processing omitted in the description of PS1 will be described below.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The payout process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor combination (symbol combination displayed stopped) when it is determined by the winning determination process that the minor combination has won. To pay out the game medals means to add the credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. In order to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal (ON state) to the hopper motor, and rotates the turntable to collect one game medal. When the game medals are discharged one by one and the payout sensor detects the game medals for a predetermined time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it is determined that one game medal has been paid out. Further, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on winning (whether credit addition or payout from the hopper 44). Then, when ending, a payout end command is transmitted to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as display of the number of wins, display of the accumulated number, and the like. The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are transmitted even when there is no payout (at the time of loss, at the time of replay winning). When the player loses or wins a prize in the replay, information on the number of game medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, and then a payout end command is transmitted.

<Error regarding Hopper 44>
As errors related to the hopper 44, a hopper retention error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected. The hopper retention error is an error when it is determined that game medals are stuck in the payout port of the hopper 44 when the game medals are paid out, and the hopper empty error is an error when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper are empty. The abnormality detection error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the dispensing sensor of the hopper 44 .
When the main control means detects an error and performs error notification, the main control means transmits an error notification start command including error type information to the sub control means, and transmits an error recovery command when the error is cleared. The sub-control means displays error information (error screen) corresponding to the type of error detected on the display device 32 based on the error notification start command, terminates the error screen display based on the error recovery command, and detects the occurrence of an error. Return to the previous display.
Further, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing of detecting an abnormality detection error, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality detection has occurred based on the error detection command.

<Hopper Retention Error>
When the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44, a driving signal is input to the hopper motor, and the game medals are paid out by rotating the rotating disk. It is determined that it is clogged and a hopper retention error is set.
<Hopper empty error>
When the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44, even if a drive signal is input to the hopper motor and the game medals are paid out by rotating the rotating disk, the game medals are not detected by the payout sensor for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds). If not, it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Anomaly detection error>
When the game medals are not paid out, if the payout sensor detects a predetermined time (3 ms) or more, it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the payout sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error display is performed in a state in which no game is played (waiting for insertion of game medals, waiting for acceptance of start lever).

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the lottery result of the role (result of the internal lottery), error notification can be executed, and during AT, the push order navigation effect can be performed. Also, it executes a prize-winning effect, a result screen display, a result notification effect, and the like.

<Award winning performance>
These are effects executed when game medals are paid out, including an acquisition display effect indicating that a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, and an indication that the number of game medals acquired by the player accumulates to a predetermined number. and a cumulative display effect. Acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect are executed based on the receipt of the payout start command by the sub control means.

<Acquisition display effect>
Acquisition display performance is a performance executed when a winning combination is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout is performed. As a form of the acquisition display effect, "GET" may be displayed without specifying the game medals to be paid out, or "12 GET" may be displayed so as to specifically specify that 12 game medals are to be paid out. may be displayed. As a result of winning the pushing order role during AT and not operating in the correct pushing order, the incorrect symbol combination is stopped and a disadvantageous payout (payout of fewer game medals than the correct symbol combination, such as one payout) is performed. However, in that case, the acquisition display effect is not executed.
Acquisition display effect is started when a payout start command is received, and is executed for a predetermined acquisition display effect period (1 second) shorter than the period during which actual payout is performed (period during which payout processing is performed). . Therefore, it is executed even if all the game medals to be actually paid out to the player are not paid out. This is to prevent the performance from being canceled due to the start of the next game or being confused with the result of the next game if the acquisition display performance is executed after all the coins have been paid out. Also, by executing the winning display effect even if all the game medals have not been paid out, the player can be made to recognize the result of the game (that the payout is obtained) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display effect is executed when the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT (also referred to as the total number of game medals) exceeds each predetermined number (500, 1000, 1500, 2000) for the first time. It is a production that Specifically, during one AT, the accumulated number of acquired sheets is counted from the start of the AT, and when it can be determined that the accumulated number exceeds 500 due to the payout of game medals, the cumulative display effect is executed (started). be. After that, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. As a form of the cumulative display effect, a message such as "500 sheets GET" is displayed according to the specified number.
Cumulative display effect is started when a payout start command is received and it can be determined that the cumulative number exceeds the specified number due to the payout, and the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed) is shorter. It is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second). Similar to the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the number of game medals actually paid out to the player does not exceed the specified number. When the accumulated display effect is actually executed at the timing when the specified number is actually exceeded, the timing of executing the accumulated display effect varies, the effect is canceled when the next game starts, and it prevents confusion with the result of the next game. Because. Also, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number is not exceeded, the player can be made aware of the game result (exceeding the specified number) in advance.
Note that the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may be executed in one game, but in this example, in the game in which the cumulative display effect can be executed, the acquisition display effect is basically not executed. Instead, only the cumulative display effect is executed. However, unlike the principle, the case of executing the acquisition display effect will be described later.

<Display of result screen>
The result screen displayed in this example is a screen displayed when the AT ends, and is a screen that displays the total number of game medals obtained during the AT, the number of games indicating the execution period of the AT, and the like. When the result screen is displayed, a display for calling attention (prevention display for immersion) is also displayed. When the final game of the AT is finished (receipt of all reel stop command), the display of the result screen is started, and the display of the result screen is continued until the next game is started. It should be noted that while the result screen is being displayed in the final game, only the acquisition display effect can be executed, and even if any prescribed number is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, as a result of winning the push order role and operating in the correct push order, the combination of correct symbols is stopped, an advantageous payout is performed, and if the prescribed number of cards exceeds 500, the cumulative display effect is not performed unless the final game is played. However, since the result screen is displayed in the final game, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the cumulative display effect. This is because the total number of game medals acquired during AT is displayed on the result screen, and if the cumulative display effect is also executed, similar information will be superimposed and the player will be confused.

<Result announcement performance>
The result notification effect is a effect for notifying the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and is a effect executed in the final game of the continuous effect. Specifically, in order to notify the player whether or not a favorable result for the player has been obtained, such as a bonus win, an additional win such as the number of remaining AT games, or a special zone win that increases the chance of winning. As an example, it is notified whether or not an advantageous result has been obtained in a battle effect or the like. If a favorable result is obtained, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if a favorable result is not obtained, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In the battle effect, when the lever is operated, a screen is displayed in which allied characters and enemy characters face each other, and after all reels have stopped (by receiving a command to stop all reels), allied characters and enemy characters compete. An image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed after the production branch timing after a certain period of time has passed. The effect branch timing is the timing 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result notification effect ends at the timing when the image indicating success or victory or the image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. It is 3 seconds after the start. As a result, the result notification presentation ends before the hopper empty error occurs (detects) and the error screen is displayed, and the player can confirm whether or not there is an advantageous result regardless of the occurrence of the error. Since the command to stop all reels and the command to start payout are transmitted at approximately the same timing, the start of the payout process may be replaced with after all the reels have stopped.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. FIG. FIG. 42 is a time chart when the payout is normally performed, FIG. 43 is a time chart when the payout is not performed normally (when the hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 44 is a time chart when the payout is normally performed 45 is a time chart when dispensing is not performed (at the time of hopper retention error), FIG. 45 is an example of a display screen when dispensing is performed normally, and FIG. 46 is a screen when dispensing is performed normally. FIG. 47 is an example of the display screen when there is no hopper empty error (when the hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 47 is an example of the display screen when the dispensing is not performed normally (when the hopper retention error occurs).
42 to 44, ON and OFF are used for convenience of description, but the corresponding processing and effects are described in parentheses. Specifically, when the payout process is ON, it means that it is in progress, and when it is OFF, it means that it is not in progress. . ON of payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON of the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect indicates that the effect is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (not displayed). The ON state of the result notification effect indicates that it is being executed (the effect is progressing), and the OFF state indicates that it is not being executed (the effect is finished and the display is stopped on the screen announcing the result). . ON of error (hopper empty) and error (hopper retention) indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and an error has been set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. Error display ON indicates a state in which an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates an error code display or an error screen display. is not performed.

45 to 47 show the case where the acquisition display effect is executed, and when the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "12 cards GET" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figure is the cumulative display effect. It becomes the notation of "500 sheets GET" displayed.

The winning effect, the settlement effect and the throwing effect described above can be combined, and the times t0 and t1 in FIGS. 37 to 39 and the times t0 and t1 in FIG. 42 are the same timing. Time t5 in FIGS. 37 and 38 is later than time t1 in FIG. 42 and earlier than time t15.

<If the payment was made normally>
As shown in FIG. 42, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. At the timing of time t14 after one second, the sub-control means terminates the acquisition display effect or the accumulated display effect. After that, at the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. When the payout process is normally executed (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out), it is about 1.5 seconds. The required time varies slightly depending on whether it is only or includes the payout of game medals from the hopper. Acquisition display effect is started at the timing when the payout process is started, and ends at the timing before the payout process ends. As a result, the player can recognize that game medals have been obtained or that the accumulated number of game medals obtained exceeds a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. Since the result notification effect is executed from the start of the game, it is already being executed at the timing of starting the payout process. At the timing of time t15, the result notification effect becomes the effect branching timing, and the display after this timing differs between the case of displaying an image indicating success or victory and the case of displaying an image indicating failure or defeat. At the timing of time t16, the effect of notifying the result being executed is terminated. Time t15 is the timing 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is the timing 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 43, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts acquisition display effect or accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t10, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out and the turntable continues to rotate. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub control means displays an error screen. At the timings of other times t14, t15, and t16, similarly to FIG. 42, at the timing of time t14, the acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect ends, at the timing of time t15, it becomes the effect branching timing, and at the timing of time t16, The performance announcing the result ends. Hopper Empty Error occurs because the period of execution of Acquisition Display Effect and Cumulative Display Effect and the period until the end of result notification effect are set shorter than the period from the start of payout process to the occurrence of Hopper Empty Error. Then, it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect before the error screen is displayed.
In addition, FIG. 43 shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs without paying out even one medal after the payout process is started. The timing at which the empty error occurs is a timing later than time t17 by the amount of payout of a plurality of game medals.

<When dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 44, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since the discharge port of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals, the payout of the game medals is not executed. Then, at time t18, since the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continued to detect for 201 ms or more from the start of payout processing, the main control means determines that the game medals are jammed, ends the payout processing, and sets a hopper retention error. . Similarly, at the timing of time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of the hopper retention error, and the sub control means displays the acquired display effect or cumulative display effect that was being executed. Cancel the result notification effect (end the display) and display the error screen. Since the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the payout process start timing, it is executed before the payout process starts and the hopper retention error occurs, so the acquisition display is performed before the error screen is displayed. It is possible to confirm the contents of the effects and cumulative display effects.
In addition, FIG. 44 shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs after the payout process is started and no medals are paid out. The timing at which the retention error occurs is later than time t18 by the amount of payout of a plurality of game medals, and the period during which the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect are executed becomes longer.

Acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect cancel the execution of the effect itself and do not display it. You may make it invisible. In this case, when the error is canceled during execution of the effect, the effect being executed becomes visible from the timing of the cancellation. However, in order to cancel the error, it is necessary to operate the reset switch, and since the reset switch is inside the housing, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Normally, it takes more than 3 seconds from the start of payout processing to the end of the result notification effect before canceling the error. Also, it does not return during execution of acquisition display effects, cumulative display effects, and result notification effects, and returns on the screen after all effects are completed.

<Display screen when payout is performed normally>
FIG. 45 shows an example of a display screen when payout is normally performed. FIG. 45 shows a scene in which a battle effect (result notification effect) is executed in a game executed with 11 remaining AT games and a total of 230 game medals acquired. The number of remaining games is displayed on the upper left of the screen (Since the game was executed with 11 remaining games, 1 is subtracted and 10G (game) is displayed. On the upper right of the screen, the total number of game medals acquired by AT is 230. Allied characters (characters with round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters with star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

FIG. 45(a) is a screen at the timing when all the reels are stopped during execution of the battle effect (receipt of all reel stop command), and the effect progresses after this timing to announce the result. FIG. 45(b) is the timing of time t0 in FIG. 42, which is a screen showing the timing at which the payout process is started. One game medal is paid out, and the total number of game medals is increased by one from 230 to 231, and "12 GET" is displayed from the right side of the screen so that it can be specified that 12 game medals will be paid out as an acquisition display effect. display is moving toward the center. In the center of the screen, a competition between friendly characters and enemy characters has begun. FIG. 45(c) shows the timing when 3 game medals are paid out, and the display of "12 GET" is displayed as a large win display effect in the center of the screen so as to specify that 12 game medals are paid out. is being done. The competition between allied characters and enemy characters continues.

(d) of the same figure shows the timing when 8 game medals have been paid out, and the large display of "12 medals GET" displayed in the center of the screen moves toward the left side of the screen toward the end of the acquisition display effect. moving. 42(e) is the timing of time t15 in FIG. 42, when the payout of the game medals is completed and the effect branch timing is reached. Since the game medals have been paid out, the total number of game medals is displayed as 242. In the center of the screen, the competition between friendly characters and enemy characters continues. FIG. 4(f) shows the process of displaying an image indicating success at the timing after the effect branching timing. The ally character is enlarged and displayed from the competition between the ally character and the enemy character, and it is in a state where you can recognize that it will be successful. FIG. 4(g) is the timing of time t16 in FIG. 42, which is the timing at which the battle effect ends. "Success" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, clearly indicating that the production was successful. The image displayed in (g) of the figure ends as an effect, but is continuously displayed until the next game starts. FIG. 4(h) shows the process of displaying an image indicating failure at the timing after the effect branching timing. The enemy character is displayed enlarged from the competition between the friendly character and the enemy character, and it is in a state where you can recognize that it will be a failure. 42(i) is the timing of time t16 in FIG. 42, which is the timing at which the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and it is clearly displayed that it was a production indicating failure. The image displayed in (i) of the figure ends as an effect, but is continuously displayed until the next game starts.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when hopper empty error occurs)>
FIG. 46 shows an example of the display screen when the payout is not performed normally (when the hopper empty error occurs). In (a) to (i) of FIG. 45, the flow of acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is the same as in FIG. However, since the payout of game medals has not been performed after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals on the upper right of the screen remains 230 and has not been updated. 43(j) is the timing of time t17 in FIG. 43. Since game medals were not detected for 3.5 seconds after the start of the payout process, a hopper empty error was set in the main control means, and , is the timing at which the error screen indicating the hopper empty error is displayed. The same image is displayed regardless of whether an image indicating success or an image indicating failure is displayed before the hopper empty error occurs.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when hopper retention error occurs)>
FIG. 47 shows an example of the display screen when the payout is not performed normally (when the hopper retention error occurs). In (a) to (c) of FIG. 45, the flow of acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is the same as in FIG. However, since the payout of game medals has not been performed after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals on the upper right of the screen remains 230 and has not been updated. FIG. 4(k) is the timing of time t18 in FIG. 44, when the hopper retention error is set in the main control means and the screen showing the hopper retention error is displayed in the sub control means. When the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continuously detects for 201 ms or longer after the start of payout processing, the main control means determines that the game medals are jammed, and sets a hopper retention error. When the hopper retention error is set, the main control means transmits a command indicating the occurrence of the hopper retention error to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the command indicating the occurrence of the hopper retention error, it displays a screen indicating the hopper retention error on the display device 32 .

<Change in mode>
The period during which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are performed is set to a period (1 second) shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) required when the payout process is normally executed, but it may be set to a longer period. Specifically, the period may be longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period (3.5 seconds) until the hopper empty error is detected. By making the period longer than the period required when the payout process is executed, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the acquisition display effect and the accumulated display effect.
Also, only one of the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect is executed, but when the conditions for executing both effects are satisfied, the cumulative display effect is executed after the acquisition display effect is executed. may Acquisition display performance ends 1 second after the start of payout processing, and cumulative display performance is executed for 1 second thereafter, so that even if a hopper empty error occurs, the player can recognize the contents of the cumulative display performance. .
In addition, the acquisition display effect is performed when the winning order is won during the AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout (12 payouts) is performed. However, it may also be executed when a winning combination other than the winning combination is won. Specifically, winning a winning combination (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (12 coins is paid out) is executed regardless of the pressing order, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the pressing order regardless of the combination is stopped. It can be executed when

The acquisition display effect may have multiple types of modes when an advantageous payout (12 coins payout) is executed. Specifically, the color and font used when displaying "12 sheets GET" may be changed according to the state. More specifically, the colors and fonts are changed depending on whether or not it is easy to win the AT add-on, or the colors and fonts are changed during the sign that a continuous effect will occur or the move to the add-on special zone. . By making the modes of acquisition display effects different, it is possible to inform the player that game medals will be acquired and to make the player expect that an advantageous situation may occur in the next game and thereafter. Also, the color and font used when displaying "12 cards" may be changed according to the setting values set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the game machine can be provided each time the acquisition display effect is executed.
In addition, the cumulative display effect may be provided in a mode in which it can be displayed only when a specific set value is set, in addition to the specified number. Specifically, when the set value "2", "4" or "6" is set and the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "246 medals GET" is displayed. When the number of cards exceeds 246, the cards may be displayed without fail, or may be displayed when a lottery is held and a prize is won. By suggesting settings based on the content displayed in the cumulative display performance, not only is the cumulative number reported to the player, but also information for estimating the set value set in the game machine can be provided. Only when the setting value "6" is set, when the accumulated number of game medals exceeds 666 for the first time, "666 GET" may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. may be provided for each predetermined number, and the setting values set in the gaming machine and the state may be suggested by the displayed display modes.

Acquisition display effect and accumulation display effect can be executed during AT, and even if the accumulated number of game medals exceeds a specified number only during the display of the result screen, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the accumulation display effect. , acquired display effects, and accumulated display effects may not be executed. Specifically, in a so-called pseudo-bonus situation, it is not necessary to execute the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect. Also, in the situation of a pseudo bonus executed during AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the accumulation display effect may be executed. In addition, during the preparation period before starting the AT, the AT start screen, the continuous effects executed during the AT, and the signs of the continuous effects, the acquisition display effects and cumulative display effects must not be executed. good too. In an ending state that can be executed before the end of the advantageous section, it is not necessary to execute the acquisition display effect and the accumulated display effect. To appropriately notify a player of necessary information by providing a case of execution and a case of non-execution according to a game state managed by a main control means and a performance state managed by a sub-control means. can be done.

Whether or not the cumulative display effect is to be executed is determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during AT and the number of game medals to be paid out by the payout process, but the value of the MY counter is used for determination. You may Specifically, a command indicating the value of the MY counter is transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means after the end of the game is checked and when the lever is operated. The value of the MY counter after the game end check indicates the value after the payout process, and the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated indicates the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets. Information on the number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the value of the MY counter at the time of lever operation at the timing of receiving the payout start command as a result of the game, and it is determined whether or not the added total value exceeds a specified number. If a value based on the value of the MY counter is displayed as the accumulated number during AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be obtained by the end of the advantageous section.
The result notification effect is the battle effect executed in the final game of the continuous effect, but it may be the effect executed in one game instead of the continuous effect. In addition, it is not limited to a battle production where friendly characters and enemy characters compete, but it is possible to associate the results of production such as whether to draw the first prize in the lottery, whether to win the Amidakuji, and the results that are advantageous to the player. Other productions may be used.

As for the result notification effect, the result is displayed after the effect divergence timing occurs due to the passage of time from the stop of all the reels, but the result may be displayed by operating the effect button. Specifically, at the production branch timing (timing of time t15), an image of a switch simulating a production switch (also referred to as an operation promotion image or an operation promotion production) is displayed, and the player operates the production switch to achieve success. Display an image indicating failure or an image indicating failure. By displaying the operation promotion image at the production branch timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, the operation promotion image is displayed before the error screen is displayed. can recognize that
Also, after all the reels have stopped (after all the reels have stopped), a PUSH button effect may be executed in order to announce a stage change in the effect or an additional number of AT remaining games. Specifically, after all reels have stopped and before time t17 before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, an image of a switch simulating a production switch is displayed, and the player operates it. , Change the stage of production, and announce the number of additions. Before a hopper empty error occurs (an error screen is displayed), it can be recognized that an image of a switch simulating an effect switch is displayed (PUSH button effect is executed). In addition, before the image of the switch imitating the effect switch is displayed, the image of the switch imitating the effect switch may be displayed or stimulated, and before the error screen is displayed, the effect It can be recognized that an image of an image of a switch simulating a switch is displayed.

In addition to the result notification effect and the PUSH button effect, a comment effect, etc., triggered by the operation of the stop switch of the last reel or the stopping of all reels may be executed. By executing these effects before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, the timing of time t15, the timing of time t1, etc.), the contents of the effects can be changed before the hopper empty error occurs. can recognize.
Also, as a result of winning the pushing order role and operating in the correct pushing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout (12 payouts) is performed. It may also be executed when another role is won. Specifically, winning a winning combination (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (12 coins is paid out) is executed regardless of the pressing order, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the pressing order regardless of the combination is stopped. It can be executed when
Also, the length of time and period described in the above embodiment is an example, and can be changed as appropriate.

Next, various settings for executing timer interrupt processing will be described.
The interrupt mode is set in the initial setting regarding the operation of the game machine shown in FIG. Setting the interrupt mode means making various settings (settings of main control built-in registers) to enable execution of timer interrupt processing.
Therefore, first of all, a description will be given of main internal control registers for enabling execution of timer interrupt processing.

<PTC prescaler setting register>
The PTC prescaler setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation setting of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, a clock to be supplied to an 8-bit counter PTC, which will be described later, can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set "by how many" the frequency of the system clock (SCK) is to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC. For example, when the system clock is 16 MHz and "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, 16 MHz/143=approximately 111.8881 KHZ becomes the clock source for the 8-bit counter PTC.
The initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "250".

<PTC counter setting register>
The PTC counter setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation setting of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC counter setting register, the count value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set how many times the number of clocks from the PTC prescaler setting register is input to execute timer interrupt processing. For example, when the system clock is 16 MHz, the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143", and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", the clock is approximately 111.8881 KHz (one cycle is approximately 8.9375 μs). clock) is input 125 times (when the 8-bit counter PTC times out), an interrupt flag is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in an interrupt wait monitor register, which will be described later. be. When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, an interrupt request notification signal can be output from the interrupt wait monitor register to the CPU, and when the interrupt is enabled. (When the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "1") the timer interrupt can be executed.
In other words, if the system clock is 16 MHz, "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, and "125" is set in the PTC counter setting register, 1/16 MHz x 143 x 125 = about 1.117 ms (millimeters). seconds), timer interrupt processing can be executed.
Also, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC starts to be updated (for example, decremented by 1) based on the clock from the PTC prescaler setting register after setting the value in the PTC counter setting register.
The initial value of the 8-bit counter PTC (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0".

<Interrupt wait monitor register>
The interrupt wait monitor register is one of the main control built-in registers.
The interrupt wait monitor register is a 1-byte (8-bit) storage area. When the 8-bit counter PTC times out and an interrupt request signal output from the timer circuit of the main control chip is received, an interrupt wait monitor register is stored. A predetermined bit (for example, the first bit) of the monitor register becomes "1". Thus, when a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1", it is referred to as storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register. Setting the bit to "0" is referred to as clearing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.

When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes possible to output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. In other words, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt request notification signal can be output to the CPU, and when the interrupt is enabled (described later) When the IFF1 register is "1") the timer interrupt is enabled. When executing timer interrupt processing in response to an interrupt request notification signal (before executing timer interrupt processing, at the same time as executing timer interrupt processing, or after executing timer interrupt processing), an interrupt wait Clear the information stored in the monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

On the other hand, even if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, when the interrupt is disabled (when the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "0"), , outputs an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, but does not execute timer interrupt processing. In this way, when the timer interrupt process cannot be executed because the interrupt is disabled (the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "0"), the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register has been generated. Information indicating is retained (not cleared). Further, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it continues to output the interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. If the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupt was disabled (IFF1 register described later is "0"), the interrupt enabled state (IFF1 register described later is "1") and responded to the interrupt request notification signal. When executing timer interrupt processing (immediately before executing timer interrupt processing, at the same time as executing timer interrupt processing, or immediately after executing timer interrupt processing), the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register clears the information indicating that a
The initial value of the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0" (the interrupt wait monitor register indicates that an interrupt request signal has been generated). is not stored).

Next, the interrupt register that manages the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state will be explained.

<Interrupt register>
The interrupt register is a register owned by the main control chip (eg main control CPU).
The interrupt registers manage interrupt-related states (also called interrupt states), namely the interrupt disabled state (interrupt disabled section or interrupt disabled period) and the interrupt enabled state (interrupt enabled section or interrupt enabled period). do. Specifically, it has an IFF1 register and an IFF2 register as interrupt registers, and manages an interrupt disabled state and an interrupt enabled state according to the value of the IFF1 register. Therefore, description of the IFF2 register is omitted. Also, unless otherwise specified, the interrupt register refers to the IFF1 register.

When the IFF1 register is "0", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. It is viable.
When the IFF1 register is "1", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and even if an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, the timer interrupt Take no action.
In other words, the interrupt disabled state means that the IFF1 register is "0", and the interrupt enabled state means that the IFF1 register is "1".

The IFF1 register becomes "0" when an instruction that disables interrupts (for example, a "DI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "1" when an instruction that enables an interrupt (for example, an "EI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "0" when timer interrupt processing is executed (immediately before timer interrupt processing is executed, at the same time as timer interrupt processing is executed, or immediately after timer interrupt processing is executed).
In other words, the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing refers to the state from the execution of the interrupt prohibiting instruction to the execution of the interrupt permitting instruction, and the interrupt disabled state accompanying the execution of the timer interrupt processing refers to the timer interrupt processing. to the execution of the instruction that enables interrupts.
Note that the initial value of the IFF1 register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0". Therefore, it can be said that the state from when the power is turned on until the execution of the interrupt permitting instruction is also the interrupt disabled state.
On the other hand, the interrupt enabled state indicates a state other than the interrupt disabled state.

Now, let us return to the setting of the interrupt mode in the initial setting regarding the operation of the gaming machine in FIG. When setting the interrupt mode, a value is stored (set) in the PTC prescaler setting register. For example, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. Next, the value is stored (set) in the PTC counter setting register. For example, "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

Thus, in setting the interrupt mode, after "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "125"→"124"→...→"2"→"1". ' → '125' → '124' → . After the interrupt mode is set in the initial settings regarding the operation of the game machine in FIG. 5, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is kept updated even when other programs (processing/commands) are being executed. is configured to Also, the timing at which the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "125" is referred to as "timeout" of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC.

After executing the interrupt mode setting, timer interrupt processing can actually be executed after an instruction to enable interrupts has been issued. Here, the interrupt permission instruction is preferably issued after determining whether or not the checksums of all the RAMs are normal by RAM check processing (after power-off recovery data normal or recoverable state in FIG. 5). For example, it is conceivable to execute an instruction to allow an interrupt by "activate interrupt processing" in FIG. .

In this way, if the 8-bit counter is updated before the RAM check process (determination of whether or not the RAM before power-off and the RAM after power-on is the same), the 8-bit counter will be updated after the RAM check process. The 8-bit counter can be timed out earlier than when starting to update the bit counter (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). Timer interrupt processing can be executed without delay when an instruction to permit an interrupt to be executed is executed.

In the premised slot machine PS1, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register when the interrupt mode is set, but it is not necessary to store the value in the PTC prescaler setting register. Specifically, it is possible to set the interrupt cycle by using the fact that the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250" (the initial value is not "0").

For example, when the system clock is set to 16 MHz, the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250", so by storing an arbitrary value in the PTC counter setting register, the cycle of timer interrupt processing can be appropriately determined. can be done. The cycle of timer interrupt processing according to the value stored in the PTC counter setting register is illustrated below.
a) When "0" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the cycle of timer interrupt processing can be set to 4 ms (milliseconds).
b) When "128" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of timer interrupt processing can be set to 2ms (milliseconds).
c) When "64" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of timer interrupt processing can be set to 1 ms (milliseconds).

In this way, even if the process of storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register is not performed, the updating of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be started by executing the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. can be done. In other words, if it is desired to store a value different from the initial value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is preferable to store the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. For example, if a value different from the initial value is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register after storing a value in the PTC counter setting register, the frequency corresponding to the initial value (250) of the PTC prescaler setting register is first stored. and then stores a value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register, the value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register Based on the obtained frequency, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated. In such a case, the update cycle of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC becomes irregular, leading to failure of the main control chip. Therefore, when executing the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, by storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register, the failure of the main control chip can be prevented. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register will be described using a simple program example.
(A) of FIG. 48 represents a program of the game progress main process. The "DI" instruction is an instruction for disabling maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt disabling instruction). The "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt enabling instruction).
"AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary instructions (programs).

In FIG. 48A, when the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" and interrupts are disabled.
The IFF1 register remains "0" when the subsequent instructions "AAAA", "BBBB", and ".." are executed.
After that, when the "EI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "1" and the interrupt is enabled.
In other words, the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction is in the interrupt disabled state.

However, timer interrupt processing becomes executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "CCCC" instruction, which is one instruction ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. is configured to
For example, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. is configured so that timer interrupt processing can be executed after the "CCCC" instruction is executed. When the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the interrupt processing is not started immediately, the counter value of the 8-bit counter is continuously updated.
With this configuration, even if the instruction "EI" for enabling interrupts is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example) is executed. It is possible to reliably execute the instruction after the instruction "EI" that enables the interrupt. Specifically, a return instruction (an instruction for executing the program at the return address) such as the "RET" instruction may be used as an instruction after the instruction "EI" that enables an interrupt. Even if there is, by not executing the timer interrupt process until the next instruction is executed, the instruction after the instruction "EI" for enabling the interrupt can be reliably executed.

In addition, in the game progress main process, as an example of providing an instruction to prohibit interruption and an instruction to permit interruption,
a) When sending a command from the main control means to the sub-control means, after executing a command to prohibit interrupts, write the command in the storage area of the RAM, etc., and then execute the command to enable interrupts. Case a) When turning on the blocker (medal acceptance enabled state), after issuing an instruction to prohibit interrupts, processing to write information for turning on the blocker to the storage area of RAM and turn on the token insertion ready lamp. If you execute a command to allow interrupts after executing processing such as writing information to the RAM storage area to prevent blockers from being interrupted. Later, after executing the processing of writing the information for turning off the blocker into the RAM storage area and the processing of writing the information for turning off the token insertable lamp into the RAM storage area, etc., the interrupt permission instruction is executed. Cases and so on.
Note that when an interrupt prohibiting instruction and an interrupt permitting instruction are provided, they are not limited to the above-described a) to c), and an interrupt inhibiting instruction and an interrupt permitting instruction may be provided as appropriate.

Such an interrupt inhibited state in the game progress main process is, for example, during the execution of a process composed of a plurality of instructions (instruction A, instruction B, . . . , instruction Z). This is provided in order to prevent the data in the RAM from being changed, and to prevent the execution of processing that causes problems based on the data in the RAM.
The interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is set to an interrupt prohibition state by an interrupt prohibition instruction (for example, a DI instruction) and an interrupt permission state by an interrupt permission instruction (for example, an EI instruction). In addition to the above DI instruction, other instructions may be used to inhibit interrupts, and not only the above EI instructions may be used to enable interrupts.

FIG. 48B shows an interrupt processing program. As in FIG. 48A, the "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt enabling instruction). , “CCCC”, and “..” are arbitrary instructions (programs). The "RETI" instruction is an instruction (return instruction) for terminating timer interrupt processing, and corresponds to, for example, "RETURN" in FIG.

When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the IFF1 register becomes "0". As a result, the next timer interrupt process can be prevented from being executed during the timer interrupt process. Note that the "DI" instruction is unnecessary when starting timer interrupt processing.
When the timer interrupt processing ends, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the interrupt processing, that is, immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to switch from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction sets the IFF1 register to "1". The "EI" instruction corresponds to "save interrupt enable flag ON" in FIG.
Also in the "RETI" instruction after the "EI" instruction, the IFF1 register is "1".
In other words, the period from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction is in the interrupt disabled state.

However, timer interrupt processing becomes executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "RETI" instruction, which is one instruction ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. is configured to
For example, the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. In this case, timer interrupt processing can be executed after the "RETI" instruction is executed. The 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even in this case (when interrupt processing is not started immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter is continuously updated.
In this way, after the "RETI" instruction, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the timer interrupt processing becomes executable, and after the "RETI" instruction, When the interrupt waiting monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the game progress main processing can be executed. Therefore, even if the interrupt enable instruction "EI" is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction "RETI" is executed. It is possible to prevent the process from being executed.

Next, with reference to (1) of FIG. 49, the relationship between the timer interrupt process and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is no interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process will be described.
When "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored in the PTC counter setting register as a value, "m" is stored in the 8-bit counter PTC. , '2', '1', 'm', 'm-1', 'm-2', . . . Thus, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC circulates between "m" and "1".

At the timing of t1, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "m". That is, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t2, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

Further, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. With this configuration, regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so timer interrupt processing can be executed at regular intervals.

Next, with reference to (2) of FIG. 49, the relationship between the timer interrupt process and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is an interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process will be described.

At the timing of t1, an instruction to prohibit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt permitted state) to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Further, even when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At the timing of t3, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state).
At the timing of t3, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, the game progress main processing is started based on the instruction to allow the interruption of the game progress main processing. After one instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing can be executed. When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t4, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

As in FIG. 49(1), the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. there is With this configuration, regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so timer interrupt processing can be executed at regular intervals.

Further, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even if the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state. With this configuration, even if the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so the timer interrupt process can be executed at regular intervals.

Next, the interrupt cycle when the 8-bit counter PTC times out when the interrupt is disabled in the game progress main process will be described using <example (1) showing execution timing of timer interrupt process> in FIG. . A normal period of timer interrupt processing (a period from when the 8-bit counter PTC times out until the next 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T". Note that after the value is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the measurement related to "T" (updating the 8-bit counter PTC) is started.

At the timing of t1, an instruction to prohibit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt permitted state) to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Further, even when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At the timing of t3, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state).
At the timing of t3, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, the game progress main processing is started based on the instruction to allow the interruption of the game progress main processing. After one instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing can be executed. When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t4, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

At timing t5, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t6, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

At timing t7, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t8, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

Here, T is the period from timing t2 to timing t5. Similarly, the period from timing t5 to timing t7 is T. For example, when the timing of t2 is “n×T (“n” is a natural number)”, the timing of t5 can be expressed as “(n+1)×T”. Also, the timing of t7 can be expressed as "(n+2)×T".
Also, the timing of t3 can be expressed as "a specific timing after 'n×T' and before '(n+1)×T'".

First, attention will be paid to the timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t3. Originally, the timer interrupt process executed at timing t3 should have been executed at t2, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process. In other words, the timer interrupt process should have been executed at the timing of t2 if the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main process did not occur at the timing of t2. That is, since the timing of t2 was the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing was executed at the timing of t3 when the interrupt permission state was entered.

Next, attention will be paid to the timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t5. The timer interrupt process executed at timing t5 is executed before "T" elapses from timing t3. In other words, the measurement of the interrupt period "T" is not started from the timing of t3. The timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t5 is configured to be executed when T has passed from the timing of t2. That is, based on the timeout of the 8-bit counter PTC that continues to update the count even if timer interrupt processing is not executed (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). is configured to run).
In this way, let the timing of t2 be "n×T", the timing of t3 be "specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T"", and the timing of t4 be When "(n+1).times.T" is assumed, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t5. In other words, it is configured such that the timer interrupt process can be executed at the timing of t5.

Similarly, the timer interrupt process executed at the timing of t7 is also executed based on the timeout of the 8-bit counter PTC (the information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). ) is configured to run.
In this way, let the timing of t2 be "n×T", the timing of t3 be "specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T"", and the timing of t4 be When "(n+1)×T" is assumed and the timing of t7 is "(n+2)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t7. can be done. In other words, it is configured so that timer interrupt processing can be executed at the timing of t7.

As described above, even if the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed in the original timer interrupt processing cycle (n × T) due to the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing after the timer interrupt processing can be restored to a situation in which timer interrupt processing can be executed when the original timer interrupt processing period arrives (xxT (“x” is a natural number)). As a result, for example, it is possible to reduce the influence (the timing of timer measurement is long) on the timer measurement executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the timer interrupt processing when the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out multiple times under the condition that the IFF1 register is 0 will be described using <example (2) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in FIG. .

<Example (2) showing the execution timing of the timer interrupt process> describes the case where the game progress main process runs out of control or the game progress main process takes an unexpected amount of time while interrupts are prohibited in the game progress main process. It is represented. Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated at normal cycles.

At the timing of t1, an instruction to prohibit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt permitted state) to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Further, even when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At the timing of t3, the 8-bit counter PTC times out again. However, since the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored again in the interrupt wait monitor register. I don't do anything like that. After that, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated.

At the timing of t4, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state).
At the timing of t4, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, the game progress main processing is executed based on the instruction to allow the interrupt of the game progress main processing. After one instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing can be executed. When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t5, the timer interrupt processing ends and the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

At timing t6, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t7, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

Thus, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice (multiple times) between timing t1 and timing t4, the interrupt wait monitor register indicates that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Information is stored once. In FIG. 50, an example in which the 8-bit counter PTC timed out twice during the interrupt disabled state was given. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the wait monitor register once. After the interrupt disabled state ends, the timer interrupt process is executed once based on the fact that the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times during the interrupt disabled state, the times out are not counted.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out "n"("n" is 2 or more) times during the interrupt disabled state, after the interrupt disabled state changes to the interrupt enabled state, the timer interrupt processing is executed as " It is configured not to be executed (repeatedly) n" times in succession.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being continuously repeated a plurality of times after the transition from the interrupt permitted state to the interrupt permitted state, and the game progress main processing being unable to be executed during that time. .

In addition, in <example (2) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in FIG. Similarly, the timer interrupt processing may run out of control while the timer interrupt processing is disabled, or the timer interrupt processing may take an unexpected amount of time. Even if the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out "n" ("n" is 2 or more) times during the disabled state, after the interrupt disabled state changes to the interrupt enabled state, the timer interrupt processing will continue to "n". '' times consecutively (repeatedly) (executed only once).

<Processing time for program design>
A program is composed of a plurality of instructions. At this time, the designed processing time from the start of a certain program to the end of a certain program is an instruction (eg, A instruction) related to the start of a certain program to an instruction (eg, Z instruction) related to the end of a certain program. ) can be calculated from the instruction types.

First, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated from the number of states required to execute one instruction and the frequency of the system clock. Specifically, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated by 1/system clock frequency×number of states. Note that the number of states can be read as the number of clocks.
In the following, the time required to execute one instruction will be described using specific instructions when a 16 MHZ system clock is used.
(a) DI
Contents of instruction: Instruction to disable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(b) EI
Contents of instruction: Instruction to enable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(c) DEC (HL)
Contents of the instruction: 1 is subtracted from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register.
Number of states: 11 states Time required to execute an instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 11 = 0.6875 μS (microseconds)

In this way, even when using the same system clock frequency, the time required to execute one instruction may vary depending on the type of instruction. Moreover, even if the instructions are different, the time required to execute one instruction may be the same. Note that the above instructions are part of a plurality of instructions, and there are many instructions other than the above instructions.
The frequency of the system clock when executing the game progress main process and the number of system clocks when executing the timer interrupt process are the same. Therefore, for example, the time required to execute the "EI" command in the game progress main process and the time required to execute the "EI" command in the timer interrupt process are the same.

In other words, the designed processing time of a certain program can be calculated from the total number of states of a plurality of instructions from the start of a certain program to the end of a certain program. Specifically, it can be calculated by calculating 1/system clock frequency×total number of states. In other words, since the frequency of the system clock is uniform in one game machine, a program with a large total number of states has a longer design processing time than a program with a small total number of states. It will happen.

<Designed processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The designed processing time of the timer interrupt process is the time from the start of the timer interrupt process to its end (for example, until the RETI instruction is executed). However, since the instructions to be executed differ depending on the difference in the information stored in the RWM and the difference in the progress of the game, even if the timer interrupt process is executed normally, the processing time of the timer interrupt process , there is some variation. In other words, since the instructions executed in timer interrupt processing are not necessarily the same for all timer interrupt processing, the total number of states when executing one timer interrupt processing differs. Therefore, when timer interrupt processing is normally executed, the average time from the start to the end of timer interrupt processing is the designed processing time of timer interrupt processing. Note that the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process may also be referred to as the time associated with the timer interrupt process.

<Designed maximum processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The designed maximum time for timer interrupt processing is the same as the designed processing time for timer interrupt processing in that it is the time from the start to the end of timer interrupt processing. Further, as described above, even if the timer interrupt process is executed normally, the processing time of the timer interrupt process varies to some extent. Therefore, the design maximum processing time of timer interrupt processing is defined as the time required for executing an instruction with the largest total number of states from the start to the end of one timer interrupt processing. Note that the designed maximum processing time for timer interrupt processing may also be referred to as the maximum time for timer interrupt processing.

<Designed processing time for interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process, the designed processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process is the time from an interrupt disabled instruction (for example, a DI instruction) to an interrupt enabled state. (E.g., EI command) (also referred to as the processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the main processing of the game progress) (excluding the state from after the power is turned on until the execution of the command to allow the interrupt) . However, since the instructions to be executed differ depending on the information stored in the RAM and the progress of the game, the total number of states may differ even if the main game progress process is executed normally. There is Therefore, the processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing varies to some extent. In other words, since the instructions to be executed in the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress processing are not necessarily the same, the total number of states differs when the interrupt disabled state processing in the main game progress processing is executed. Therefore, when the game progress main processing is executed normally, the average processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing is set as the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing. .

In addition, when at least two interrupt prohibition states are provided in the game progress main processing, the design processing time of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the design interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is calculated. The longest processing time is set as the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing. The designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process may also be referred to as the time associated with the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process.

<Designed maximum processing time for interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, when the instruction with the largest total number of states is executed from the start of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing to the end of the interrupt prohibition state. is the designed maximum processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing.

Further, when at least two interrupt prohibition states are provided in the game progress main processing, the design maximum processing time of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is designed. The longest maximum processing time is defined as the designed maximum processing time of the interruption prohibited section in the game progress main processing. The designed maximum processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process may also be referred to as the maximum time related to the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and designed processing time of interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process is "S'", T>S' is satisfied. It is preferable to configure as follows.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the arrival of multiple timer interrupt cycles while the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed is reduced) due to the effect of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process. be able to.

<Relationship Between Timer Interrupt Cycle and Design Maximum Processing Time of Interrupt Disabled State in Game Progress Main Processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process is "S", T>S can be established. preferable.
By configuring in this way, compared to the case where T>S'(S' is the designed processing time of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing), the interrupt in the game progress main processing can be further improved. It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the occurrence of multiple timer interrupt cycles while the prohibited state is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed is reduced) due to the effect of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process. be able to.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and designed processing time for timer interrupt processing>
It is preferable that T/2>t', where "T" is the cycle of timer interrupt processing (the cycle at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) and "t'" is the designed processing time of timer interrupt processing. In other words, it is preferable to configure the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process to be less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By constructing in this way, the timer interrupt processing is executed when the period of the timer interrupt processing arrives, and then the game progress main processing is performed more than T/2 before the next timer interrupt processing cycle arrives. Can run for long periods of time. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main process can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and design maximum processing time for timer interrupt processing>
It is preferable that T/2>t, where "T" is the period of timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) and "t" is the designed maximum processing time of timer interrupt processing. In other words, it is preferable to set the designed maximum processing time of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, compared to the case where T/2>t'(t' is the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing), when the cycle of the timer interrupt processing arrives, the After that, the game progress main process can be executed for a period longer than T/2 until the cycle of the next timer interrupt process arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main process can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

＜＜Pachinko machines＞＞
Next, a pachinko game machine to which the present invention described below can be applied will be described. The step numbers, symbols, terms, etc. in the embodiment of the pachinko game machine according to this example are different from the step numbers, symbols, terms, etc. in the embodiment of the reel-type game machine according to this example, and are the same. It should be added that even if the step numbers, symbols, terms, etc., are used, they are not the same (processing, functions, members, etc.). In other words, independent step numbers, codes, terms, etc. will be described for the reel-type game machine and the pachinko game machine.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "prerequisite technology") that is the premise of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 51 and 53 show a pachinko game machine as a representative example of the pachinko game machine according to the base technology, and FIG. 54 shows a game board provided in this pachinko game machine. Next, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine will be explained. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 52 are referred to as the front-back direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction.

[Mechanical Configuration of Pachinko Machines]
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the pachinko game machine P is configured in a rectangular outer shell, and is configured in a rectangular shape with a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1, which is fixed in the game facility, in front of the opening of the outer frame P1. The front frame P2 is mounted so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached by means of upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20) disposed on the front left edges of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is assembled and held on the front side of the front frame P2 so as to be able to open and close horizontally and to be detachable using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and configured so that the player can visually recognize a game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. It is In addition, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are rotated in either the left or right direction by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko game machine P, and depending on the direction of rotation. , the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, or the locking of the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 is released. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. By doing so, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

Under the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball trays P340 (upper ball tray P341 and lower ball tray P342) for storing game balls are provided. In addition, the glass frame P3 is provided with a production lamp P350 that emits light according to the progress of the game, and a speaker P370 that can output sounds such as sound effects according to the development of the game. At the bottom center of the glass frame P3, an effect operation means P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached. The button P381 allows the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided on the glass frame, and the operation means itself. is displaced to an upward projecting state (input permission state), operation input is possible (a plurality of operations are possible with one effect operation means).

At the lower right part of the front frame P2, there is provided a handle P204 for performing shooting operation of the game ball and adjusting the shooting intensity. A shooting device unit P240 is further provided at the lower part of the front frame P2. Although illustration is omitted, a ball feeding mechanism P241 for feeding game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one by one, and the ball feeding mechanism P241 feeds out the game balls. A launching device P242 having a launching mechanism (a ball-hitting mallet driven by a rotary solenoid) that launches a game ball toward the game area P501, a launch control board P243 that synchronously controls the operations of the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the launching device P242, and the like. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 54, the game board P5 (game board unit) is constructed with a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using transparent synthetic resin or wood. 51 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5, and FIG. 54 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 54 shows a state in which the production accessories P560 (also called "movable production device", "movable production object", "movable production accessory", "movable production object", etc.) provided in the game board unit are in operation. there is On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 is arranged from the lower left to the upper right, and a circle is arranged from the lower left to the upper left inside the outer rail P502 from near the lower center of the game board. An arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 formed in a curved shape that is arranged between the end of the upper right outer rail P502 and the lower part of the board surface and opens leftward, and the outer rail P502 A substantially circular game area P501 is defined inside surrounded by the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 is divided into a left area P501L (left-handed area), which is an area on the left side of the center role P540, and an area on the right side of the center role P540. and a right area P501R (right hitting area). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and a windmill P511 (not shown), there are a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball entry devices such as a normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation gate device), a large winning prize port P751 (attacker), etc. (referred to as "winning device" when a prize ball is generated) are provided. It should be noted that the number of the big winning opening may be one, or it may be configured to have a plurality of openings. Further, in this specification, due to the structure of the ball-entering device, the game ball is discharged after entering the ball-entering device, or further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball-entering device (gate type). On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch, it is called "entering ball" or "winning (especially when a prize ball is generated)", and flows down to the downstream game area like a gate type ball entrance. In some cases, it is described separately from "passing". Also, the ball entry device is sometimes referred to as a ball entrance, and the prize winning device is sometimes referred to as a prize prize opening.

In addition, at the lower right of the game area P501, the main control display device P50 which is lighting controlled by the main control board described later, such as the first special symbol display device P51, the second special symbol display device P52, the normal symbol display device P53, etc. are centrally located. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is provided so as to be visible through the opening of the center accessory P540. Above the center accessory P540, etc., there is provided a production accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs a production operation according to the development of the game. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 is provided through which game balls that have flowed down without entering the winning ports of various ball entry devices can pass. A game ball that has entered a prize winning opening of various prize winning devices or a game ball that has flowed into the outlet P790 flows down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the game board P5 in the front and back direction. Then, it is collected in the collection channel (played ball passage) at the bottom of the front frame P2 and passes through the out-ball sensor P792 (shot ball number sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame for detecting the total number of shot game balls. After that, it is discharged out of the game machine.

The first starting winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first start winning device P710 is provided with a first start winning opening P711 into which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 is a trigger for acquiring the random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening P711. A lottery related to the first special symbol is executed after the timing immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has passed.

The second starting winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second start winning device P720 has a second start winning opening P721 into which a game ball can enter, and a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second starting winning opening P721 when winning a normal symbol lottery, which will be described later. A normal electric accessory P770, which is a switching movable body, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721 is the trigger of the random number used for the lottery related to the second special symbol, and based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening P721 A lottery relating to the second special symbol is executed at the timing immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has passed. The second start winning device P721 has an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered into the second start winning port P721 by the action of a normal electric accessory P770, and a game ball enters the second starting winning port P721. It changes to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter. In other words, the second starting winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning port unless it is displaced to the open state, and a predetermined opportunity (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery), which will be described later. When it becomes an open state at , the ease of entering a game ball increases. In addition, the structure of the normal electric accessory P770 is known in various forms, and there are cases where it is not a structure that changes the ease of entering a ball by opening the movable body P771. ” may be expressed as “easy-entering state (easy-entering mode)” and “difficult-entering state (difficult-entering state)” respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left general winning device P730L arranged in the left hitting area P501L and a right general winning device P730R arranged in the right hitting area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P according to the underlying technology, the left general prize winning device P730L is configured as one unit with three general prize winning ports P731La to P731Lc, while the right general prize winning device P730R is a large prize winning device P750 described later. configured as part of Entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P731 triggers the payout of prize balls as with other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and positions of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko game machine, which are assumed, are merely an example, and may be configured such that they are arranged only in the right-handed area P501R.

The normal pattern operation gate device P740 (normal pattern operation port) is provided as a starting entrance ball corresponding to the normal pattern game. This normal figure operation gate device P740 is provided with an operation gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to further flow downstream of the game area of the game board. Passage of the game ball to the operation gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting prize winning device P720, that is, whether or not to operate the normal electric accessory P770. . It should be noted that, as a modification, it is also possible to configure the above-described general winning port P731 to have a function that triggers the normal symbol lottery. It is also possible to provide the function of generating as one winning device (normal figure operation winning port).

The big winning device P750 has a big winning opening P751 (special electric role P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win. It is sometimes called an “attacker (device)”. The big winning device P750 has an open state in which a game ball can enter the big winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, a state in which a special electric accessory is activated P755), and a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening P751. Or it changes to a closed state where it is difficult to enter (for example, a state where the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the jackpot game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by opening and closing operations of the jackpot P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is activated, a series of activation patterns (also called "open pattern") may cause the movable body P756 forming the big winning opening P751 to be in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. have

In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big winning device P750 may have a specific area P760 (referred to as "V zone" or "V area" through which game balls can pass). (referred to as "area", "continuation area", etc.) may be provided. As functions related to this "specific area", (a) activating the probability variation function (described later) after the big win game with the passage of the specific area during the big win game as a trigger, (b) passing the specific area during the small win game to activate the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and grant the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) specified in a specific round during the jackpot game Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not a region has been passed. In addition, an opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided for the "specific area". It may be configured to pass through the specific region P760 or other non-specific regions. Also, during the big hit game or the small hit game, it may have a period during which the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 is valid and a period during which it is invalid.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed, the big winning device P750 is provided in the right area P501R (right hitting area) in the game area P501. Therefore, in the big-hit game or the small-hit game, when the game ball is shot toward the game area P501, the ball can be easily entered into the big winning opening P751 by hitting the right side area P501R, i.e. hitting the right side. It's becoming

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. On the rear side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-to-rear communicating window is mounted for mounting the game board unit P5 in the center. The back set unit P4 includes a storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the gaming facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member. A prize ball payout unit P410 to be put out, a back side passage member P403 for causing the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342, and the like are provided. In addition, on the game ball flow-down path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340, there is a ball removal mechanism (a ball removal operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path that ejects the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever. P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there are a main control board P40 for comprehensively controlling the game progress of the pachinko game machine P, and an effect control board for controlling overall effects according to the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40. An image control board P41 and an image control board P42 for controlling image display according to game development are attached. Note that, in the pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 form an effect display unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there are a payout control board P43 for controlling the payout of game balls, and a power supply for receiving power from the game facility side and supplying power to various control boards and electric/electronic parts. A substrate P44 (not shown) and the like are attached. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a board case made of transparent resin having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. , respectively. These control boards and the electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine are interconnected via harnesses (connector cables) to enable the progress of games and the execution of effects in the pachinko game machine P. .

[Function block]
FIG. 55 shows functional blocks of a pachinko game machine as a premise.

The pachinko game machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU ), a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device for controlling payout of prize balls and shooting of game balls, and a performance control board P41 for controlling performance operations and processes. It is constructed in the form of In addition, the arrows shown in the figure indicate upper transmission/reception relationships by solid-line arrows, and electrical connection relationships by broken-line arrows.

By operating a power switch P47 provided on the board, the power board P44 is connected to a main control board P40, a performance control board P41, a payout control board P43, and various game devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, it generates and supplies the power required for operation. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the settings of the game machine, the power switch is covered with an opening/closing cover to prevent unauthorized operation. protected in good condition.

The main control board P40 includes a first start winning opening P711 (special figure 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special figure 2 starting opening switch P722), a large winning opening P751 (large winning opening switch P752), Various detection switches related to game progress, such as the normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation port switch P742), the general winning port P731 (left side general winning port, right side general winning port) which is another detection switch, and the out port P790 It is also connected to switches and sensors such as the setting key switch P49, the vibration detection sensor P72, and the magnet sensor P73, which are used for managing various games and monitoring fraud. The main control board receives input of information related to the occurrence of various game states from these switches, determines control details related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids, etc. A special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751, and a normal electric accessory driven to make the normal electric accessory P770 easy to enter when winning the normal symbol lottery. Information relating to the driving mode is output to a game device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors and the like connected to the main control board P40 are connected to a terminal called an input port on the main control board, and notify the main control board P40 of the presence or absence of occurrence of various game states based on sensor detection as information, special electric Accessory drive means P70, normal electric accessory drive means P71, and other information output from terminals called output ports, such as a launch permission signal for the launcher P242, are received to control each device.

In addition, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 that perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a round indicator light P54 that notifies the type (number of rounds) of the big hit and the small hit, and the game state. A main control display device P50 that performs various displays such as a status indicator P55 that notifies the and so on. Regarding the "base value", there are various other calculation methods such as data that excludes the winning of the starting prize opening P711, etc. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko game machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to devices outside the gaming machine through an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, and the like, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the gaming machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls and the control state of the main control board transmitted from the main control board P40. In response to the operation of , control relating to shooting of the game ball by the shooting device unit P240 is performed. The payout device P410 has, for example, a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. The launching device (shooting device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one by one to the position where they can be shot by the ball feeding unit P241, and then hits the game ball with the hitting mallet. It is configured to shoot a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48, which is mainly used for initializing the game machine and canceling errors that occur during the game. Operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness and connector used.

The production control board P41 includes the production display device P80, the drive source and position detection sensor (for example, drive motor, initial position detection sensor, production position detection sensor) of the production movable accessory P560, the speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production input device unit P380 (for example, production button P381 which is production operation means P81, production lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), production lamp P82 (“decorative lamp”, “board lamp (P550)”, “frame lamp (P350 )”), and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. Also, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) or the like that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. In addition, in the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41. may be configured to control

Transmission and reception of data between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed by unidirectional data transmission/reception so as to be in one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , it is not possible to request data transmission. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information unless the information generated by the main control board P40 is transmitted. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P assumed here, data transmission and reception are performed bidirectionally between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case between the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, it may be configured to transmit and receive data in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progression]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko game machine P as the underlying technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly divided into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which game balls are easier to obtain than in the normal game state. The "normal game state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to transition to the "special game state". A plurality of states are provided, and among the plurality of normal game states, the state in which it is relatively easy for the player to acquire the right to transition to the special game state (which is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state (low probability/low base state)) State) is expressed as "specific game state". The ``special game state'' corresponds to so-called ``big win game'' and ``small win game'', and the main control board P40 drives the special electric accessory drive means P70 to open the big winning opening P751, and the game balls are acquired. It means a state in which it is easy to

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, the game method and the progress of the game in the normal game state will be explained. It should be noted that the normal game state described here is a description of the "normal game state (low probability/low base state)" (see FIG. 56) excluding the specific game state. The game state will be explained, and the game method, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" in the specific game state will be described later.

As a game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), first, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the game area P501 provided on the game board P5. In the premised pachinko game machine P, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player controls the operation amount of the handle P204 so that the game ball shoots toward the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area. The game is played by operating so that the

When a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game area by the player, the shot game ball flows down the game area P501 and hits a game nail P510 (also called "obstacle nail" or "nail") (not shown) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, the first start winning opening P711 arranged at the substantially lower center position in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel" etc., or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device A ball enters (wins a prize), or enters an out hole P790 as a game ball that has been played without entering any of the winning holes. When the ball enters the first start winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, the main control board P40 sends information (control command ) is output, and the player acquires new game balls by paying out prize balls.

Here, a special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711. , When the ball is entered into the first start winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, in addition to paying out a predetermined number of game balls, the lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is performed. Get a random value to do. Acquisition of the random number is based on the detection of the game ball, the acquisition of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit (hard latch), or the control device of the main control board P40 by software processing. There are methods such as executing processing to obtain random numbers from the random number generation circuit when detecting information on game balls, or obtaining updated random numbers in software (soft latch). It is possible to use them properly according to the random number value to be obtained, or to use them in combination. It should be noted that when the ball enters the general winning slot, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

A lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win/fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "fluctuation pattern lottery". The "win/fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the obtained random number value is a "big hit" or a "loss" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may include a "minor win"). ). The "hit symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning or failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) of the main control display device P50. It is possible to determine one pattern from a plurality of stop display patterns for one lottery result (big win, small win), and "big win" or "minor win" according to the stop display pattern determined here. It is possible to make the execution mode of the special game in . "Variation pattern lottery" is a process for determining at what timing the stop display pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery is to be displayed in the special pattern display device P51 (P52), and the special pattern in the special pattern display device P51 (P52). It determines the time (referred to as "variation display time" and "variation pattern") during which variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is performed. It is common to use different random numbers for the "win/fail lottery", "win pattern lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery". called "random number". In addition, the lottery related to the control of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special figure 2 starting port switch P722, is also the same "special symbol lottery". Also, the explanation of the "special symbol lottery" will be given later.

Returning to the description of the game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area. Then, the game ball is entered into the first start winning hole P711, the lottery (special symbol lottery) relating to the first special symbol is executed, and the special symbol indicating "big win" ("small win") on the special symbol display device. is displayed, a game aiming at acquiring the execution right of the special game is performed.

In the process of the player receiving the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbols is performed according to the time determined by the variation pattern lottery. During this special pattern variable display period, when there is a new start winning hole (first start winning hole P711, second start winning hole P721), a special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. It has a hold function that temporarily stores random numbers corresponding to rights. In the premised pachinko game machine P, as a holding function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start winning hole P711, it is possible to suspend the special symbol lottery up to four times. It should be noted that the holding function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, apart from the holding of the first special symbol, the holding function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol can be set up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random number used for the special symbol lottery.

In this way, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots the game ball to the left area P501L of the game area and executes the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the lottery result of the special game state such as "big win" or "minor win" is won, and the fact that the right to shift to the special game state is acquired is displayed on the special symbol display device. , the game state of the pachinko game machine P shifts to a special game state.

[Special game state]
Next, the game method and progress of the game in the special game state will be explained. The special game state includes "big win (game)" and "minor win (game)". , and the big winning hole P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The big difference is that the "small hit" ends with one operation of the special electric role product, as opposed to being based on the operation of the operating device. Another difference is that in the operation of the special electric role product (jackpot) based on the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, it is possible to make the operation mode more advantageous to the player regarding the operation of the special electric role product P755. Specifically, the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the operating state (big win) of the role product continuous operating device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the small winning is allowed. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, the jackpot will be described as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the underlying technology, is chronologically called a "special game start demo" (in the case of a big win, it is called a "jackpot start demo", a "role combination operation start demo", etc.). In the case of a hit, a performance period called "small win start demo") to inform the player that various special games have been won, and a single time called "round (game)" (also referred to as "unit game") The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the “special game end demo” (in the case of a big win, it is called “big win end demo”, “role combination operation end demo”, etc., and in the case of a small win, it is called “small win end demo” ), which is mainly composed of the game results (such as the number of acquired game balls) during the special game and the period for performing notification related to the type of the normal game state (including the specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the game method during each special game period described above will be described. First, during the “special game start demo” period, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, the big winning opening P751 is arranged in the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the normal game state (low probability/low Even if a game ball is shot into the left area P501L similar to the base state), it is almost impossible to expect the ball to enter the big winning hole P751, so the big winning hole P751 in the special game is in an easy-to-enter state Before the start of the round game In addition, a right-handed notification effect that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area is provided by the production display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and production lamps. Execute using P82. The player adjusts the amount of operation of the handle P204 to increase the shooting intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the shooting position so that the game ball flows down to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. to (perform a right-handed stroke).

During the “round (game)” period, in the pachinko machine P of the underlying technology, the main control board P40 outputs a driving signal to the special electric accessory driving means P70, thereby causing the large winning opening P751 to enter the easy-to-enter state or It is specified that it is more advantageous for the player to be in a state where it is difficult to enter a ball, and to congratulate the player for winning a big win (minor win) in accordance with the execution period of the special game, or to shift to a normal game state after the special game is over. An effect such as an effect suggesting whether or not the player is in a game state is executed. A player shoots a game ball to the right area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the big winning hole P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big winning opening determined based on the type of big win (minor win) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, the game ends when a predetermined "specified number" (which may be expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enter the game. Then, according to the type of special game state being executed (type of big win or small win), when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko machine P, which is the underlying technology, displays the number of game balls acquired during this special game state period, and Acquired in the special game state (acquired without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)) to notify the total number of acquired game balls, or normal game that shifts after the special game state Effects such as the notification of the type of state and the notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-described right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the steering wheel in preparation for a game corresponding to the type of normal game state to which the game is to be transferred from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are assumed, except for some exceptions, when a jackpot game as a special game state is executed, a special game state for the player is called a "specific game state" as a normal game state. The right to transition to is shifted to a state where it is easy to acquire, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated, so-called "Renso".

[Specific gaming state]
Next, a description of the "specific game state" will be given. As shown in FIG. 56, there are roughly three specific game states in the specific game state. And, there are "probability state" and "base state" as elements for classifying those types, and a specific game state is constituted by a combination thereof.

(probability state)
"Probability state" is a function that changes the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the winning lottery in the special symbol lottery. If it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("variablestate","probability variable state" when the winning lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is not activated. There is also), and the state where the probability fluctuation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit in one special symbol lottery is high.

(base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the ratio (expected value) of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal game state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also called "electric support (electric support) state"). . In addition, depending on the specifications of the game machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended shooting position of the game ball is switched, so that "when a predetermined number of game balls are fired, it will be awarded as a prize ball." If the "proportion of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" means that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls increases (it becomes easier to pay out) during the period until the special game state is acquired, so that the consumption of game balls is suppressed and the special This is a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the player can aim to acquire the game state.

"Electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), but mainly a combination of three functions (at least one ). The three functions that make up the “electric chew support function” are “normal symbol probability change”, “normal symbol time saving”, and “open extension (of normal electric accessories)”. "Normal pattern probability variation" refers to a state with a high probability of operating the normal electric accessories in the "normal symbol lottery". "Reduced normal symbol time" refers to a state in which the time from executing a normal symbol lottery to displaying the result of the normal symbol lottery is shortened in the normal symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. "Extension of opening of ordinary electric role" is, for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary electric role is placed in a manner in which the game ball can easily enter the winning opening related to the ordinary electric role P770. It refers to changing so as to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time in which the normal electric accessory is in the easy-to-enter state.

"Normal symbol lottery" is that the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas the normal symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the normal electric accessory P770. It differs in that the execution trigger is the entry of a game ball to the normal pattern operation gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the success or failure, the pattern, and the variation pattern are determined by lottery and that it has a holding function. If you want to express the lottery of the normal pattern lottery, the pattern, and the variation pattern, you can say "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern fluctuation pattern lottery", such as "normal pattern lottery" (or " Ordinary design") is attached to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been explained as elements that distinguish the types of "specific game state", but as an element that constitutes the specific game state, there are also "time reduction state" ("fluctuation time reduction state" , a state in which the "fluctuation time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the variable display time (variation pattern) per special symbol is shortened and the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed per unit time increases. It is an advantageous state in that many special symbol lotteries can be received per unit time. "Time saving state" (fluctuation time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and rarely constitutes a specific game state by itself.

[Specific game state 1: low probability / high base state]
Returning to the description of the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 56 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (1), (8) and (12) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 1 goes back to the specific game state 1 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (2), (7), and (11) are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 1, and (d). The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(2) only) can be mentioned. It should be noted that the "number of games played" refers to, for example, "the number of times a special symbol lottery is executed".

When shifting to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, both the above-described "electric chew support function" and "fluctuation time reduction function" are activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area is the normal figure operation gate device P740, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory A mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive a normal symbol lottery and a special symbol lottery by performing "right-handed hitting" in which a game ball is shot to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is also controlled in the above-described "time saving state" in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) occurs, the player shoots the game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area, Entering (passing) the operation gate device P740 is performed as the first procedure, and by entering (passing) the normal pattern operation gate device P740, the normal symbol lottery is received in the main control board P40. The normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is a hit with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal pattern probability variation function, so the game ball is 1 to the normal pattern operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 occurs. When the normal electric accessory P770 operates, the pachinko game machine P on which the premise is, the second start winning opening P721 that triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol becomes easy to enter, and the player continues the second. As a procedure, a game ball is shot toward the second start winning opening P721. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the execution right of the special game (big win, small win). A lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the execution of the jackpot, the type of jackpot executed, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). In the case of winning a small winning game, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, winning a small winning game (or winning multiple small winning games, or In some cases, it is designed to end with the acquisition of a small winning game. When the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 2: high probability / high base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 56 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (3), (7) and (9) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 56 are (A) to obtain a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 2 is transferred to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are satisfied, transitions are made as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in FIG. These (4), (8), and (10) game state transition conditions are (a) to acquire a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 2, (c) For example, a predetermined number of games has passed.

When moving to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability change function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). It differs in that it is "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of playing in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big win earlier than the special symbol lottery because the probability of winning the big win is high. do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 2 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. If the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends due to the number of games played, normal game state (low probability / low base state), specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), specific game state Go to 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 3: high probability / low base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in FIG. 56 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (5), (10) and (11) in FIG. As the game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 3 shifts to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in FIG. These (6), (9), and (12) game state transition conditions are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 3, (d) The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(6) only) can be mentioned.

When moving to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated "high probability (state)", specific game state 1 and specific game Unlike state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "fluctuation time reduction function" are not activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the normal figure operation gate device P740 in the right side area P501 (right hitting area) of the game area, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), the player hits to the right by shooting a game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area. Also, the probability of winning a hit in the normal pattern lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player proceeds with the game by shooting the game ball to the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since this is a high-probability state, there is a high probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery. The game method and game progress are the same as those in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) except that the jackpot game can be obtained early because of the high value.

The specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 3 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

In addition, the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is different from the board arrangement configuration of FIG. Arrangement configuration of winning devices on the game board, such as by arranging the third start winning port of the type that does not have and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol lotteries can be received in a short time And depending on the control of the time saving state, there may be a game state where "right hitting" is recommended.

As described above, the premised pachinko gaming machine P progresses through a plurality of game states, but does not necessarily have all the game states described above. Therefore, among game machine specifications constituted by combinations of a plurality of game states, etc., game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified below.

Regarding representative game machine specifications ("specs"), examples of the types of game machine specifications related to the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery are "(until the next time) probability change", "ST (number of times cut probability change)". , “V probability variation (also referred to as “ball probability” and “attack round system”)”, and “latency probability variation” can be adopted. The difference in gaming machine specifications due to the difference in the probability variation function is sometimes expressed as "this gaming machine is a '○○ machine (eg: ST machine)'". In addition, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function, by passing through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game, the accessory continuous operating device will then operate (that is, shift to the big winning game). There is also a game machine specification called "small hit V".

[(Until the next time) fixed]
First of all, I will explain “(until the next time) probability change”. "Variable probability until the next time" is generally the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states among the plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko game machine P, "Specific game state 2 ( High probability/high base state) will continue until the next jackpot game right is acquired"Pachinko game machine specifications". In other words, the gaming machine with the “probability change until the next time” is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right to the next big hit game is acquired, and does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. It is

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the "pachinko machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to play the next big hit", the probability variation function continues until the next big hit. It may be called "probability change until next time", but the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. , In this way, it is expressed as "latency probability change" because it is probability change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not operating.

[ST (Variable number of cuts)]
Next, "ST (Variable number of cut probability)" will be explained. "ST" is an abbreviation for "Special Time", and in general, "special game state 2 (high probability / high base state) performs a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of times symbol variation is executed), or the pachinko game machine that will continue until the right to win the jackpot game" is shown.

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the same way as the above-mentioned "probability change until the next time", the game state is a specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). For cases to be controlled, it is also possible to configure so as to have a state called "latency probability change (latency ST)".

In addition, even if it is "ST (variable number of cuts)", the period in which the game state is controlled to ST, such as when the special symbol lottery lottery is "until 10000 times", is substantially in a high probability state If it is a gaming machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until the next time" and "ST (number of times cut probability change)" are different in terms of the end of the probability change function of the special symbol lottery, which distinguishes the "probability change state" as a game machine specification is. On the other hand, as in "V probability variation (" ball probability "" attack round system ")" described below, whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery in the specific game state is activated, that is, regarding the start of execution of the probability variation function, Game machine specifications (“specs”) may be expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a game machine specification called “V probability variation” will be described. "V probability change" is a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the big winning opening P751 during the jackpot game before the game state shifts to the specific game state. ), when the passage of the game ball ("V winning") is detected under predetermined conditions (during the execution of a specific jackpot round, etc.), the probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game The game machine specifications of the pachinko game machine that performs control to shift to the specific game state (specific game state 1 or specific game state 3) are shown. Regarding the “specific region” used for “V probability variation”, it may be particularly referred to as “probability variation function operating region”.

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification that indicates whether or not the probability variation function is activated depends on the game result during the big hit game (depends on whether the game ball passes through the specific area P760). Yes, depending on whether the activated probability variation function ends with the same control as the previously described "probability variation until the next time" or ends with control equivalent to "ST" "V probability variation (V-loop) ” and “V-ST” are used to indicate game machine specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P that adopts "V probability change" as a game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the probability change function does not operate after the jackpot game, and the normal game state and the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability/high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability variation function is activated after the big win game, depending on whether or not the V prize is won, and at the same time, it is possible to change the operation mode of the electric chew support function. As an example, in the "V probability variation (V-loop)" machine, if you win a V prize, the probability variation function and electric chew support function will continue until you win the next big hit, and if you do not win a V prize, the probability variation function will not operate. First, the electric chew support function is limited until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times.

[small hit V]
Next, a description will be given of a game machine specification (spec) called "small win V" as a game machine specification capable of providing a game state advantageous to a player in terms of winning a big win without having a probability variation function.

"Small hit V" is a "specific area P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the game machine specification that activates the accessory continuous operation device following the small winning game, that is, starts the big winning game. be. In other words, it is a game machine specification that allows a big win game to be obtained without obtaining a big win result as a result of a special symbol lottery by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win.

"Small win V" is a "type 1 (pachinko)" game that activates the continuous activation device and special electric accessories as a result of the special symbol lottery, and the special electric accessories while the continuous activation device is not in operation. It is a specification that activates the role continuous operation device when passing through the specific area P760 during operation (during the opening of the big winning hole P751), and is sometimes referred to as "1st class small win V", while the conventional pachinko game It is sometimes referred to as a "mixture of 1 type and 2 types" because it has playability similar to the specifications of so-called "2 types of pachinko" machines.

In general, a pachinko game machine that adopts "small hit V" as a game machine specification does not have a variable probability function (probability variable function), and changes the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of an electronic chew support function. That is, when the electric chew support function is activated, the winning opening related to the normal electric role product P770, which is easy to win, becomes a change trigger for special symbols (for example, winning a small win at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a small win. By constructing a starting winning port, it is easy to win a small win under the condition that an electric chewing support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big win by winning a V prize during a small winning game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the possibility of obtaining a big win by a small win instead of increasing the random number range of the big win like the variable probability function.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical ones, and since there are some other characteristic game machine specifications known, they will be briefly explained below.

(limiter)
"Limiter" is a state in which a specific game state in which the probability variation function or the electric chew support function operates is repeated with the execution of the jackpot game (so-called "continuous" state) occurs, and is predetermined. Even if a jackpot game that should originally operate the probability variation function or the electric chew support function is executed when the set number of repetitions (number of consecutive games) is reached, the probability variation function or the electric chew support function This is a function that limits the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "probability variable limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "time-saving limiter (electric support limiter)". call. A game machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Falling" is a game machine that executes a "falling lottery" that determines whether or not to end the probability variation function each time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. Show specifications. In the situation where the electric chew support function is operating along with the probability fluctuation function, if you win the fall lottery, the operation of the electric chew support function will end when the probability fluctuation function ends, or only the probability fluctuation function will end. However, the operation of the electric chew support function may continue.

In addition, it is possible to combine a plurality of game machine specifications described above. 1) Winning the fall lottery, (2) Performing a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, (3) Acquiring the right to play a big hit, If either of these conditions is satisfied, the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends (shifts to another game state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 governing the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, will be described. In addition, as a pachinko game machine specification (spec), explanation will be made on the premise of a pachinko game machine that adopts "ST (variable number of cuts)". In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "P-s ◯◯" indicating the processing step in the figure is described as "step ◯◯" in the text.

[Main control board power-on processing (main control board main loop processing)]
The main control board P40 of the premised pachinko game machine P first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Here, details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on processing is started in the main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, the initial setting relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the main control board P40, is performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately perform settings necessary for subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power failure information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) are executed. ).

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value ” can be changed, and the flag indicating whether or not the ``setting confirmation process'' for confirming the ``setting value'' is in the state of performing This is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to be established (whether to turn on) in the game stop state setting process to be performed later. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the detection status of the frame open switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is opened with respect to the outer frame), and the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is operated by the player , data including data indicating whether or not the setting key switch P49 is rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), the pachinko game machine P normally shuts down the power when the power was turned off last time, and the control data related to the game state when the power shut-off occurred normally. This is a process for confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is stopped in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later as an error. This is a process of setting (turning on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power failure information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change status", "setting confirmation status", and "unrecoverable status" are displayed. This is a process of setting a flag to shift to one of the game progress disallowed states of "error state". Details of the "game stop state setting process" are described in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko game machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1" Therefore, the processing of subsequent step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the 1 generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004). Operation information of the setting key switch is calculated from the byte data so that it becomes OFF data. Although not shown, whether the result in step 1102 is YES or NO, calculation is performed so that the frame open bit in the 1-byte data is also OFF data.

In the subsequent step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that allows determination of "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko game machine P, the situation where it is determined that "there is a setting change operation" is (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON. and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON. As described above, among the 1-byte data, the information of the frame open switch P131 is set to OFF, and it is determined in this step whether both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, if two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1"; One data may be "0"). Then, if it is determined that there has been a setting change operation, that is, if it is determined YES in step 1104, data indicating "setting being changed" is stored as a game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated ( step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104 , the process proceeds to step 1108 . In addition, when the setting value information stored in the RAM (RAM=Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (in the case of recovery operation from an unrecoverable error state), as the initial setting value The data corresponding to the setting value "1" is set in the setting value storage area (step 1118).

Next, at step 1108, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that requires RAM clearing and setting (change) processing of setting values when the game cannot proceed, such as checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality) or setting value abnormality. refers to The determination of step 1108 determines whether or not to set the game stop state based on the processing result of the power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored during the previous power-off processing. . When it is determined that an error state should be established (when determined as YES in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (steps 1110 and 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112 .

In the subsequent step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the step,
(a) When an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, in the judgment of "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON, are not satisfied,
(a) when the ram clear operation for data clear is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. when it is sufficient,
(c) When the power is turned on without any operations such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "ram clear operation", etc.
Either In these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) are: (a) bit data indicating ON/OFF of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (ON data)"; Either the bit data indicating ON/OFF of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (ON data)" or (c) all 1-byte data is OFF data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there has been a ram clear operation (if YES is determined in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine enters the game ready state after clearing the ram. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except when the RAM clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is. If NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "setting confirmation" ( step 1118). Further, when there is neither a RAM clear operation nor an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 1004) is originally data indicating that the game is not stopped as a game stop state flag. It is set as no-game-stop information.

Regarding the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), if a value indicating some stop state is stored, the main flag which is the game allowable state in the power-on process (step 1000) In the interrupt processing (step 2000) which is the main part of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (steps 1028 to 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the progress of the game described as "basic game progress" These controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process in FIG. 57, the following process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) ends, it is determined whether or not there is a RAM clear operation (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. This processing is executed both when the setting key switch P49 is off and when it is on. If it is determined in step 1010 that the ram clear operation has been performed, a predetermined portion of the memory area of the ram of the main control board P40 is initialized.

In the subsequent processing from step 1014 to step 1020, a processing of setting an effect control command (effect command) for recognizing the state of the game machine from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 when the power is turned on is performed. More specifically, in step 1014, processing is performed to clear from the storage area the effect control commands that have not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off). Then, in step 1016, information about the current game state of the main control board P40 that has returned after power-on is generated as an effect control command. An effect control command indicating the played state is set in an area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of power-on is completed, the necessary data (driving signal ) is output from the output port to the special electric accessory drive means P70 and the normal electric accessory drive means P71. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is processed to set the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the premise pachinko game machine P, the interval at which interrupt processing (FIG. 59, step 2000) to be described later is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process ends, the game shifts to a cyclic process called a main loop in which the player is ready to play, and the cyclic process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
In the main loop processing of the main control board, as shown in FIG. 57, first, at step 1026, processing is performed to prohibit the occurrence of interrupt processing, and until the processing of the main loop is completed (interrupt is permitted at step 1036). until) to limit the execution of interrupt processing.

When the interrupt is disabled, in the following step 1028, a watchdog timer called a CPU for the main control board P40 runs out of control (such as a situation where the process loops and does not proceed) to monitor the occurrence. Clears (initializes) the area that stores the clock information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (for example, whether a power failure signal sent based on a voltage drop from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If a power failure occurs, the current game state is stored, power failure information and checksum information are stored, and power failure processing (step 1032) stops processing of the main control board P40 as a CPU. ). If power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random values are updated in interrupt processing, which will be described later, and this is processing to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to random numbers being updated only in interrupt processing. If there are processes that are executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is also possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating random numbers according to those processes. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final processing in the main loop, and performs processing for enabling interrupts. Immediately after that, the process returns to step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, to disable interrupts. If the CPU of the main control board P40 receives an input indicating the state of the state that the state has been set, an interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (also called "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the premise pachinko game machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and a submodule program provided to be changeable according to the game machine specifications (specs) is universally fixed. are configured to be read out and controlled in the order of The processing for these submodules is briefly described below.

(clear watchdog timer)
At the beginning of interrupt processing, watchdog timer clear processing is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 57, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation processing)
In the input port confirmation process, by confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, information that enables identification of whether or not there is input information as information necessary for judgment in subsequent processes. This is the process to generate. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, and an input signal indicating the operation status (whether touched or not) of the handle P204. , An input signal indicating the game result by detecting a game ball such as a special figure 1 starter switch P712 and a large winning opening switch P752, a magnetic sensor P73, a door open sensor P131, a vibration detection sensor P72, etc. provided for fraud monitoring There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all readings is the input data ("level data") for this interrupt. ) in the RAM of the main control board P40. Of the data read three times, the data that was determined in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms before) is adopted as the level data for the portion that is not the same data in all the readings. If the data cannot be read normally in the above, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) for this interrupt is determined, a comparison operation is performed with the input data for the previous interrupt to generate "rising data" (data specifying the bit where the input data changed from off to on), Stores data specifying the switch that has been switched to ON input by the interrupt this time.

(random number update process)
Random number update process is software This is a process of updating so-called soft random numbers, which are random numbers to be updated (step 2006). In the premised pachinko game machine P, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those in which the random number generation circuit updates the random numbers at the update cycle on the circuit, and those which are updated at the software cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers when obtaining random numbers.

In the random number update process, as described above, the process of updating the soft random numbers is performed.
(a) A random number is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1), and when the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded, the lower limit (or upper limit) is set;
(b) Subtracting (or adding) an arbitrary prime number to a random number, and adding (or subtracting) the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) when the random number range is exceeded,
(c) Repeatedly increment (or decrement) from the random number set as the initial value, and when one cycle of updating is completed, set the separately updated "initial random number" as the new initial value and perform the same update. Repeated ones (also called initial value updating random numbers),
Various update methods can be exemplified. It should be noted that any update method may be adopted as long as the randomness of random numbers can be maintained.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 57) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting changing" or "setting checking". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is first determined whether the bit data indicating that the setting key operation of the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is ON data. If the setting key has not been turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the game stop flag is ON data, the current interrupt Referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated in the input port confirmation process described above), when the setting key switch P49 is turned off, the game stop flag is cleared and the game is enabled. An effect control command for returning (or starting) the effect to the effect control board is set depending on whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Also, in the power-on process (see FIG. 57), if the game stop flag is "changing settings", the role of the "setting change switch" at this interrupt timing is played until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "under change of setting", in the current interruption, when the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated, the "set value" is changed to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the set value. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine P having set value data such that the setting is switched in order from 1 to 6, every time there is start-up data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. Perform processing to increase the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value).

In the premise pachinko game machine P, by providing the processing in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 59), the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch is monitored at the cycle of the interrupt processing. , It is possible to output display data to the display device by the LED output processing described later, and during the power-on processing (see FIG. 57) in which interrupt processing cannot be set separately, a program for periodic monitoring can be omitted. Note that, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmation, control the display device, and update the set values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, the CPU of the main control board reads the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 57) executed when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and determines whether the game is stopped. This is a process for confirming whether or not (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, if the game stop flag data is not 0 but one of the bits is "1 ”, it is determined that the game is in a stopped state (a state in which the game needs to be stopped), and assuming that the game is stopped, part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. 59 to “special electric Accessory control process (step 2028)") are omitted.

In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, in a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting changing", "setting checking", "unrecoverable error" is occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for time management regarding the progress of the game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include management of the variable display time set when the variable display of special symbols is started, operation time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (open time of the big winning opening P751 ) and other timer data update processing triggered by game progress, timing processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in main control display device P50 such as special symbol display devices P51 and P52 and a process for timing a period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer).

The timer data to be updated by the timer update process is stored in the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40, divided by type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer". Each is stored in a storage area.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area that stores the types of individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. In the timer update process, the timer data stored in the storage area is decremented (-1). If the stored timer data is already "0", it will be processed to be "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it will be set to "0", Do not decrement if "0", etc.).

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so in the case of 1-byte timer data, only the managed object that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information managed within one second (when there is little), it is possible to configure only with 2-byte timer data and without 1-byte timer update processing. is. Also, if it is necessary to manage a time value that cannot be managed with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than a "3-byte timer".

(Effective period setting process)
The effective period setting process is a period for controlling the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode for winning holes (mainly the big winning holes P751 and the winning holes related to the normal electric accessory P770) that can be changed to the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode. And, it is a process of setting the valid period in the valid extension period, and setting the invalid period for the other period (when the winning opening is difficult to enter and the valid extension period is not valid). (Step 2016)

In the premise pachinko game machine, the winning of the second start winning opening P721, which is the second starting winning opening P720 provided with the large winning opening P751 as the big winning device and the normal electric accessory P770, is set as the valid period. It becomes the processing to do.

In addition, during the effective extension period, in order to treat the game ball entered at the timing just before the large winning opening P751 or the normal electric role P770 shifts to the difficult entry mode P755) and ordinary electric accessories such as P770 are treated as effective periods even after the control period for executing the opening control has passed. control period.

Further, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, an effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set. The validity period of the specific area is also set.

(Prize monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of game balls to various winning ports (large winning port P751, starting ports P711, P721, general winning port P731) in the pachinko game machine, It is a process of generating information that triggers the process of generating (occurrence of suspension) the right of special symbol lottery for balls and starting entrance balls. (Step 2018)

The contents of the processing are (a) detecting the presence or absence of a winning prize for each of the various winning ports in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004); If there is a winning during the valid period, and if there is a valid winning for each winning slot, (c) a performance control command indicating winning information for each winning slot to be sent to the performance control board P41. setting, (d) updating a counter value (referred to as a "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among operations based on detection of various winning openings); update a counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in ).

In addition, in the winning monitoring process, not only the occurrence of winnings to various winning holes, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting out balls, the operation hole switch P742 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game machine Depending on the specification, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and in addition to the occurrence of the prize ball and the occurrence of the special symbol lottery, the operation of the gaming machine (for example, In this process, presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting information indicating that the operation port switch P742 or the specific area P760 has passed is performed with respect to the effect control board P41.

(Working opening monitoring process)
In the operation port monitoring process, when the start-up data of the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), processing related to the occurrence of suspension related to the normal symbol lottery is performed. conduct. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new reservation. Because it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of reservations and increasing the number of reservations information by 1, the general pattern accuracy random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number Get it from the generator circuit or get the current corresponding soft random number and store it as pending.

(Normal symbol control process)
In the normal symbol control process, normal symbol lottery, normal symbol variation display, and normal electric accessory P770 operation are performed (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on whether the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called normal symbol status or the control state of the normal electric accessory is performed, and control is performed according to the state. As the status of the normal design, "0: Normal design waiting", "1: Normal design changing", "2: Normal design stop display", "3: Normal electric accessory in operation", "4: Normal "Demonstrating the end of electric accessories", and processing is performed according to each state.

<<Normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: normal symbol standby".

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not occurred, so the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the normal symbol fluctuation right has occurred, and it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation start conditions are satisfied, and the normal symbol fluctuation is started. Execute the process related to start.

When it is determined to start changing the normal pattern, after subtracting 1 from the holding number information from the area that stores the holding number information related to the normal pattern lottery, the general pattern success or failure random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number are respectively Call it and perform a general pattern lottery, a general pattern pattern lottery, and a general pattern variation pattern lottery, store the lottery results in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and save the storage area for the pending number information. While performing a process of shifting so as to be processed in the stored order, the normal design status is updated to "1: during normal design fluctuation". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used according to the operation status of the above-mentioned "base state" (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction function), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , There is a tendency that the variable display time of normal symbols tends to be determined to be short.

《Processing during normal symbol fluctuation》
The normal design changing process is a sub-module process called from the normal design control process when the normal design status is "1: normal design changing".

In the normal symbol fluctuation process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined during the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process elapses, that is, the timer that manages the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal Until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process, the normal symbol display device P53 is a process of executing variation display of normal symbols.

More specifically, when the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is not 0, the maximum value of the general pattern display switching counter is "5" every time this process is executed, and the general pattern display switching counter is " 5", a process of storing information on the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device P53. It should be noted that the normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value of "0" at the timing when it reaches the maximum value of "5". That is, the variable display of the normal design is such that the lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4ms×5=20ms). In addition, the switching interval can be set as appropriate, for example, if the maximum value of the normal pattern display switching counter is set to 25, the display pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). be done.

When the normal pattern fluctuation display time ends, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal pattern stop display pattern determined by the normal pattern lottery is displayed on the main control display device. The data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 so as to be stopped and displayed on the normal design display device P53 in P50. Then, the normal symbol fixed time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: during normal symbol stop display".

《Normal symbol stop display process》
The normal symbol stop display process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display process, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer, in which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol fluctuation process, is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0" Then, a setting process for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal pattern stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal pattern lottery is "hit", according to the winning pattern and the operating state of the base state (normal electric accessory extension function) , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the prize counter related to the normal electric accessory P770, etc., and set the normal symbol status to "3: Normal electric accessory in operation ”.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal symbol lottery is "lost", the normal symbol status is updated to "0: normal symbol waiting". I do.

《Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operating process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: normal electric auditors product in operation".

In the normal electric accessory operating process, based on the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 set in the normal symbol stop display process, the opening operation (change to easy entry mode) and closing operation of the normal electric accessory (Change to difficult-to-enter mode) and monitor the establishment of the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory. The end of the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is (a) when the specified number of normal electric accessories winning set as the end condition of the normal electric accessory occurs, (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends This is the case (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessories has ended).

When the condition for ending the operation of the normal electric accessory is established, the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the normal electric accessory is used to measure the extended period of a certain time predetermined corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770. set the time. Then, the time value related to the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration is set to the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: Normal electric accessory end demonstration in progress".

《Demonstration process for ending operation of normal electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is a submodule process called from the normal design control process when the normal symbol status is "4: normal electric auditors product end demonstration".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process, wait until the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation process becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0" When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: Normal symbol standby" is performed.

(Starting door monitoring process)
Starting port monitoring processing, from the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004), when the rising data of the special figure 1 starting port switch P712 and the special figure 2 starting port switch P722 are generated, a special symbol lottery Perform processing related to the occurrence of the hold related to. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 starter switch P712 and the special figure 2 starter switch P722 are detected, check the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit , because it is possible to store a random number as a new hold, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area storing the hold number and increasing the hold number information by 1, the success or failure random number, pattern random number, variation pattern A random number is obtained from the random number generator or the current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as pending.

It should be noted that, in the pachinko gaming machine P, as a premise, there are two types of special symbols, a first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, for each starting port provided on the game board P5, the holding number of the corresponding special symbol and the data of the starting port switch are called, and the pending number is added and the random number is acquired for each starting port. is processed.

In addition, when the starting opening to be processed is composed of the starting opening (electric chew) related to the normal electric accessory, the starting opening winning related to the normal electric accessory P770 is valid in the valid period setting process described above. After judging whether or not it is performed within the period, if it is within the effective period, the above-described processing is performed.

In addition, when storing random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, the obtained random number information is used in advance by using the advance notice judgment value table, and the content of the variation when the variation based on the various random numbers to be withheld is executed in advance. Information that can be guessed is generated, and notified as an effect control command to the effect control board P41 (referred to as "pre-determination command", "pre-determination information", and "pre-reading determination command"). Pre-judgment commands are generated for each of the win/fail random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, and when transmitted to the effect control board P41, the effect control board P41 uses the lottery related to the execution of the "prefetch effect" described later. be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes state information for managing special symbols called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the called special electric accessory, any of the special symbol variation start management (special symbol variation start monitoring control process), special symbol variation process, and special symbol stop symbol display process or

The special symbol status includes "0: waiting for special symbol fluctuation", "1: special symbol fluctuating", "2: missing symbol stopped display", "3: big hit symbol stopped displayed", "4: small hit The status of the special electric role product is "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role product in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", "3 : Big win end demonstration in progress", "4: Small win special electric power in operation", "5: Small win closed", and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress". It should be noted that, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there may be cases where no small win is provided, and in that case, there is no status data related to the small win. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

The special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority order) when there are a plurality of special symbols. As a predetermined order, the second special symbol is preferentially controlled, and in the situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the second special symbol is changed first. The game machine specification processed so as to be started (the second special symbol preferentially fluctuates) is called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control", and the implementation of the pachinko game machine P as a premise In the description related to the form, the processing related to this type is illustrated and described.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the special electric accessary product status is referred to first. If the special electric role product status is data indicating that the big win game or the small win game is in progress (when the special electric role product status is other than "0: waiting for winning"), the first special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: waiting for special symbol variation", the process is completed without performing the process.

In the case of the situation to execute the control of the second special symbol, a process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area storing the timer, and if the result of the decrement is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the update of the timer ends, based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2, a sub-module process, which will be described later, is called and executed. Although it has a timer subtraction process even during the interrupt process, the timer data updated by the special symbol control process is not included in the timer updated by the timer subtraction process, and in the special symbol control process It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.

<<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The special symbol variation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process that is shifted when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol variation".

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol being processed as a target is reserved, and if there is no reservation, the process is finished, and if there is a reservation, the subsequent process is executed. The subsequent process is a special symbol lottery that is performed when the variation starts. In the special symbol lottery, the data stored as set values are first read and inspected to determine whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state etc. is referred to, and the appropriate lottery table is selected. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: during special symbol fluctuation". In addition, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the performance control board P41 as a performance control command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variable performance executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. is used as information for determination processing (lottery processing). The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol fluctuation》
The special symbol fluctuating process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "1: special symbol fluctuating".

In the special symbol variation process, the timer for managing the variation display time of the special symbol is monitored until the variation time of the special symbol determined by the variation pattern lottery passes, and until the remaining variation time becomes "0", every interruption. With the special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24") to be updated, the special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (at the time of control of special symbol 1) to show the variable display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts performs switching processing of the lighting display pattern of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbols becomes "0", it indicates that the variable display of the special symbols has been executed once for an external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko game machine P. Setting of information for outputting an external signal, processing of setting a symbol fixation time for fixed display of a special symbol stop display pattern, and stop display indicating a stop display pattern determined as a result of a win-or-fail lottery and a pattern lottery. Setting of lighting pattern data for displaying the pattern on the special pattern display device P52 (P51) is performed. Then, the special symbol status is set to any one of ``2: Losing symbols are stopped and displayed'', ``3: Big win symbols are stopped and displayed'', and ``4: Small win symbols are stopped and displayed'' according to the result of the lottery.

<<Process during special symbol missing symbol stop display>>
The special symbol lost symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "2: during lost symbol stop display".

In the special symbol lost symbol stop display process, it is checked whether the value of the timer for managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation process has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. Update the special symbol status of the special symbol that is currently running to "0: special symbol variation standby", and the remaining game count of the game state (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery As well as updating, it confirms whether the end condition is satisfied, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, it performs control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state.

<<Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display>>
The special symbol big-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "3: big-hit symbol stop display".

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, it is checked whether the value of the timer managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation processing has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. While updating the special symbol status of the special symbol that is being played to "0: special symbol variation standby", the special electric role product status is updated to "2: large winning opening closed". Furthermore, in order to end the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery, the processing of clearing the remaining number of times information storage area and the operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern, the information in various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot pattern information, and the special electric role product P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set content data.

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, further, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing a big win game effect (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is executed. In addition, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator P56, which is one of the constituent elements of the main control display device P50, indicates a game state in which a right-handed game in which a game ball is shot aiming at the right side of the game area is recommended. Setting of the lighting pattern data for lighting the LED which is lit at times is also performed.

<<Special symbol small hit symbol stop display process>>
The special symbol small-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "4: during small-hit design stop display".

As in the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process is performed with the end of the symbol fixing time, setting data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, and turning on the right hand indicator light P56. Such setting processing is performed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, when a small winning game is executed (stop display of small winning symbols), unlike when the big winning symbols are stopped, the game state related to the special symbol lottery (high probability state or High base state) does not have processing to end, and the game state is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, similar to the processing of the special symbol lost symbol stop display process. Control. In addition, in accordance with these processes, the special electric role product status is updated to "5: Small win closed". Depending on the specifications of the game machine, as a modified example, when a small winning game is executed, the specification is designed to have a process for forcibly ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) in the same way as when the big winning pattern is stopped. is also possible.

When any one of the sub-module processes described above is selectively executed, the process of the first special symbol is performed following the process of the second special symbol. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the special symbol status of the first special symbol. , etc.), the description is omitted because almost the same processing is repeated.

《Entrance order digestion control, parallel control》
In addition, in the explanation of the special symbol control process described above, the explanation was based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but in the case of adopting a game machine specification different from the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made. Alternatively, it is possible to proceed with the special symbol control process in a different process. A brief description of typical examples will be given below.

"Entering ball order digestion control" is a game machine specification in which the reservation information corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order of occurrence. While one pattern is fluctuating, the other is not displayed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved ball corresponding to the first special pattern and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special pattern are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol preferential digestion control" and "entering order digestion", and at the same time both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time. It is a type of game machine specification that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 is activated along with the stop display of one special symbol (when a big hit or a small hit is executed), the other symbol is forcibly lost and the symbol is stopped, or the variable display is performed. A specification that suspends the subtraction of the remaining time is appropriately adopted. As an example, when one special symbol becomes a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed, and when one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is displayed. It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
The special electric role product control process executes submodule processing related to the operation of the special electric role product P755 according to the data content (value) of the special electric role product status (sometimes referred to as the special electric role product status). This is the process of managing the operation of the object (step 2028). In other words, when executing the big winning game or the small winning game, each state in the big winning game or small winning game state is controlled, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751 is controlled.

As described above, the special electric role product status includes "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role item in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", and "3: Demonstrating the end of big win". , ``4: small winning special electric is in operation'', ``5: small winning closed'', and ``6: small winning ending demonstration in progress''.

Among these special electric role product statuses, if the status is "0: Waiting for winning", it is because the player has not yet acquired the right to execute the big winning game or the small winning game by playing the game. , The special electric accessary product control process ends without performing the process.

Then, when the special electric role product status is other than "0: Waiting for winning", one of the processes described later is executed according to the status.

<Process during operation of special electric accessories>
Special electric auditors product in operation process is a process that is executed when the special electric auditors product status is "1: special electric auditors product in operation" or "4: small hit special electric in operation". This process is a process in a state in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the opening of the big winning opening P751 can be controlled).

In the special electric accessary product in operation process, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) whether the specified number of winnings (also called "count") corresponding to the activated special electric accessory has been performed, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as has ended or has ended when either of the following is satisfied. If these conditions are not met, the special electric accessory control process in this interrupt process is terminated without performing subsequent processes. In addition, among the operation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern that opens and closes the big winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round While the timer used for the determination of (a) becomes "0" a plurality of times during the game, after confirming whether or not there is next operation data during one round game, condition (c) " If it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in the current unit game, it is determined that the above (b) is satisfied.

On the other hand, if either of the round game end conditions (a) or (b) is satisfied, as a subsequent process, the closing time of the big winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory. , the special electric accessory status is incremented to be "2: Closed big prize opening". Then, the command data for notifying that the round game has ended is set as the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while closing the big prize mouth》
The large winning opening closing process is a process that is executed when the special electric role product status is "2: large winning opening closed" or "5: small prize closed". This process is a process in a state of being controlled "between rounds" between so-called round games in a special game, and before the start of the first round at the start of a big win game or a small win game When the state is controlled by the state of "big win start demonstration (period)" or "minor win start demonstration (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the winning end demonstration, which will be described later, is executed. This is a process related to the state of being controlled during the waiting period until it becomes possible.

In the big winning opening closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening closing time set in the special electric accessory operating process has passed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time If has not elapsed, the special electric accessary product control processing in this interruption is terminated.

When the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, whether the operation (round game) of the special electric role product P755 whose operation has ended first was the final round game in the current winning game (big winning game, small winning game). It is determined whether or not, and different processing is executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of winning start demonstration). It should be noted that, to determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 operated during this winning game is the maximum number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 in this winning game , and the accumulated data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the winning start demonstration.

When it is determined that the final round game is finished in the processing during closing of the big winning opening, the execution pattern of the winning end demonstration according to the type of winning (the type of special symbol that started the big winning or small winning). (mainly winning end demonstration time data) is read and set. Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to set "3: big win end demonstration in progress" or "6: small win end demonstration in progress", and a production command for executing the winning end demonstration production is set in the production control board P41. to do Furthermore, in order to set the effective extension period of the big winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the effective extending period is stored in the timer that manages the effective extending period of the big winning opening P751, and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end of a game other than the final round game (or at the time of a winning start demonstration) in the processing during closing of the big winning opening, the effect control command for the effect control board P41 is issued to the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify whether there is (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and recommended firing position during winning game Sends information to instruct (right-handed command).

Then, the special electric role product status is decremented and updated to ``1: special electric role product in operation'' or ``4: small winning special electric prize in operation'', and the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening P751 during the round game. Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the operation pattern data of the big winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set as the time value related to the first opening of the big winning opening P751 during the round game (or closing immediately after the start of the round game). and increment the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to the player in response to winning of a game ball in a prize winning hole arranged on the game board P5. The processing contents are configured to execute the following three sub-module processes. (Step 2030)

<<Payment data reception monitoring process>>
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence or absence of a control command related to execution of prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (storing) the transmitted command. . The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). Register 1 is called a status register, and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information has been transmitted normally. It is The other register is called a data register, and stores control content information regarding payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is abnormal, data in the data register is stored as payout control information. store in the area.

<<Payment command request processing>>
In the payout command requesting process, winning counter data for each winning opening storing data on the number of winnings of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed to confirm whether or not there is an unpaid winning. In the confirmation process, each winning hole is confirmed in a predetermined order, and if it is determined that the winning counter data for one winning hole is not "0", the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning hole , a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of game balls to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for a plurality of winning holes is not "0", the number of payout control commands transmitted to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt is limited to one.

<<Payout command control process>>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received the information regarding the number of payouts. It will happen. Until the command reception status is determined in the payout command control process (it is determined whether the command has been received normally or an error has occurred), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is performed by the payout command request process. And it is temporarily interrupted by the flag data set to ON/OFF respectively in the payout command control process.

(abnormality detection processing)
The anomaly detection process is a process for confirming whether or not an anomaly has occurred based on information from a sensor provided for fraud detection in the premise pachinko game machine P. FIG. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, the occurrence of an abnormality is detected based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). This is the process of determining whether or not the In addition to the various sensors, the sensor also detects unplugged harnesses for electrical connection, short circuits on wiring, and the like.

Then, when there is abnormal data for any of the determination information, after storing the corresponding error flag to be turned on, a command for notifying the error information is set as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection determination process, the period during which sensor or switch detection was continuously performed is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is processing for establishing a flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection determination process, when the level data of the target sensor and switch detection data information is ON, the data for counting the continuous ON input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not a start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, a process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the monitored switch is no longer ON data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, if the winning hole detection switch provided in the winning hole continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred, and the error state is controlled and produced. Processing of setting command information for performing error notification to the effect control board P41 as a control command, and generation and output request of signal data for notifying the occurrence of an error to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

Switches to be detected in this process include a touch sensor switch provided on the steering wheel P204 and a switch for fraud detection. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game state display processing)
The game state display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information about the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, output of display contents to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating that it is in an error state, a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) that displays the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery P61, special figure 2 reservation indicator light P62), normal design reservation indicator light P63 that displays the number of reservations related to the normal design lottery, etc. are generated, and the lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and output in the LED output process. Store.

In addition, in the game state display process, when blinking display is required for the LED indicator lights whose lighting is controlled, the lighting pattern switching process is performed by updating the display switching counter for the corresponding LED and comparing the counter value with the threshold value. done. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the number of pending special symbol lotteries can be held up to four, but two LED indicator lights constitute a special symbol holding indicator light (special figure 1 pending indicator light P61 , Two LEDs are provided for each of the special figure 2 pending indicator lights P62), so if there are 3 or more pending numbers, at least 1 LED is not a continuous lighting display, but a blinking display. It is designed to do so.

(output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to a game operation to an electric accessory, which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, or to the payout control board P43. (Step 2038)

More specifically, during normal symbol control processing or during special electric auditors control processing, when the operation pattern of normal electric auditors or special electric auditors is set, by processing during output port output processing, normal electric Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory drive means P71 and the special electric accessory drive means P72 (solenoids in the pachinko game machine).

Also, to the payout control board P43, a control signal (shooting permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the shooting of the game ball based on the player's handle operation is generated by the output port output process and output. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the state of communication with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires the game to be stopped.

(Production control command transmission process)
The performance control command transmission process is a process of outputting a performance control command to the performance control board P41. It is a specification for transmission (step 2040). Regarding the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, a storage area called a ring buffer, which cyclically refers to a storage destination, is used as an area for storing unsent effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next process called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (setting) the effect control command and reading (sending) the effect control command It is a specification to execute writing and reading of the effect control command using information for calculating the address of the storage area where the command is written and the address of the storage area where the command is read.

Also, in the pachinko game machine P, the configuration of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Returning to the description of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing, the description will be given. In the performance control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the information of the write pointer and the read pointer match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no performance control command to be transmitted, and the processing ends. On the other hand, when the data of the write pointer and the data of the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next process.

When it is determined that there is a performance control command to be sent, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next process.

As effect control commands, MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are transmitted P41 to the effect control board in order. First, the MODE data is set to the effect command output port which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform the reading operation is output. The main control board P40 will subsequently output the EVENT data, but in order to ensure a sufficient period until the effect control board P41 receives the MODE data, after performing processing with a waiting time of 26 μs, the MODE data As in the case of transmission, setting of the EVENT data to the output port and output of the strobe signal are performed. When the strobe signal is confirmed, the performance control board P41 generates a performance control command reception interrupt and receives the performance control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(external information output processing)
In the external information output process, the external information output terminal 77 outputs, as a signal, information related to the game status and information related to security, such as the occurrence of an error, to an external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the pachinko game machine P. (Step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set to the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, it transmits a pulse signal that is ON potential for a certain period. Others continue to output an on-potential until a condition for terminating signal output is satisfied.

In the external information output process, first, a signal regarding the game state is generated. As a signal related to the game state, in order to be able to identify the type of the specific game state, in the premise pachinko game machine P, the operating state (probability state) of the probability variation function and the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function By referring to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big win or small win), external output data is output so that the corresponding data is transmitted when each game state is controlled. Update. Note that depending on the specifications of the game machine, the output signal is generated based on information indicating whether or not there is a variable time reduction function, or information indicating that a particular type of jackpot is being won. There may be cases.

As an output signal output in the external information output process, not only a signal relating to the game state but also information based on the occurrence of a predetermined game result is output. For example, the variable display of the special pattern is executed, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed pattern signal") that is transmitted each time it is displayed stopped, and the starting port switch (special 1 starting port switch P712, special 2 starting port switch 722) or the big winning opening switch P752, or every time a game ball is detected entering each winning opening, or the payout of winning balls based on the winning balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Each time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal that is transmitted to the external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and a signal of 1 is transmitted as a pulse signal with a continuous ON potential of 128 ms. After the output of the pulse signal is finished, the pulse signal is output again after outputting an off-potential for a certain period of time.

In the external signal output process, the data in the storage area storing the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the abnormality detection process (step 2032) and comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. are calculated and compared, and if it is determined that a security signal needs to be output, the output data to be set to the output port is updated so as to turn on the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the game progress and game status. (Step 2044)

The LEDs that make up the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol holding indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), the second Special symbol holding indicator P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol holding indicator P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator P54, status indicator P55, right-handed indicator (total It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

In addition, the state indicator light P55 is a collective representation of indicator lights related to a plurality of game states, and in detail, a special figure probability variation indicator light indicating whether the probability variation function is operating or not, and the operation of the normal symbol probability variation function It refers to indicator lights such as the normal map probability indicator light that indicates the presence or absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated), and the error indicator light that indicates the error state.

In the LED output process, 1 byte of the lighting data for the display section of the main control display device is set to the output port for each interrupt processing to light the main control display device P50, and the main control display device P50 is updated for each interrupt processing. LEDs of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interruption are selected based on the value of the digit counter, lighting pattern data corresponding to the gaming situation is selected, and set as display data to control the lighting of each LED. It's like

That is, in the premised pachinko game machine P, the main control display device P50 is used for 32 LEDs, and the main control display device P50 is operated by a dynamic lighting method in which lighting data is output in order using at least four interrupt processes. controlling.

In addition, in the LED output process, in addition to the LED display to be visually recognized by the player as the main control display device P50, lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or an unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P on which the assumption is made, if the game stop flag stores a flag indicating some kind of game stop state, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. , during setting change, during setting confirmation, and during an unrecoverable error, the LEDs constituting the main control display device are all extinguished. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, light emission may be displayed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be configured to light up all the LEDs constituting the .

(Outside area control processing)
Out-of-area control processing includes test signal output processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines (processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines) and performance display device display. It is configured by a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" is that it is a process executed by a program in a storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area stipulated by the pachinko game machine rules.

In the test signal output process, a process of setting information relating to the game result and game state to the output port from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko game machine P to an external test device is performed. In the performance display process, the game state is confirmed, the number of out balls and the ratio (base) of the number of out balls and the number of prize balls are calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. This is the process of outputting.

[Special design lottery]
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. FIG. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of "win/fail lottery", "hit symbol lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery".

(Lottery drawing)
The "win or fail lottery" is a lottery that determines whether or not the special electric accessory P755 will be activated based on the result of the executed special symbol lottery. , "big win", "minor win", or "lose". Depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine P, there are some machines that do not have a "small hit" as a lottery result of the winning lottery. In addition, when configured to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it has a "small hit" as the lottery result of the win or lose lottery for one special symbol, and the lottery result of the other win or fail lottery is "small hit". It may be configured so as not to have "hit".

Win/fail lottery uses a random number called a "win/fail random number" out of the random numbers acquired and stored when a game ball enters the starting port (first starting winning port P711, second starting winning port P721, etc.). lottery. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the range of possible random numbers (random number range) of the success/fail random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", which is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a lottery is performed, the result of the lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with a lottery table (called a "lottery table") used for the lottery according to the game state and set values. process.

FIG. 60 illustrates several lottery tables used for lottery. FIG. 60(A) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a low probability state, and FIG. 60(B) shows a winning lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 60 show win/fail lottery tables in the low-probability state and the high-probability state, respectively, when the set value is "6".

For example, in the situation of executing the winning lottery using the winning lottery table of FIG. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the lottery will be explained.

First, it is determined whether or not it belongs to the jackpot random number range ("0" to "327") as the result of the first lottery. Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number value range "328" of the big hit to be determined from the random number value "1500" of the hit/fail random number of this time is performed. At this time, the result of the subtraction is "1172", which is not a negative value. Therefore, it is determined that the hit/fail random number of this time does not belong to the big hit random number range.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous big hit judgment is compared with the random number range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area for the success or failure lottery result of the success or failure lottery table. . More specifically, the random number range "65043" to be determined is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the hit/fail random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, the information corresponding to the result of "loss" is stored as the result of the lottery.

Hypothetically, if a special symbol lottery is performed in a high probability state with respect to the hit/fail random number "1500" this time, the lottery will be made on the hit/fail lottery table shown in FIG. Determine whether it belongs to the range (“0” to “1639”). At this time, the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the hit/fail random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, so the result of the hit/fail lottery is determined to be a "big win".

The pachinko machine P, which is the premise, adopts a method of judging the lottery result by sequentially comparing the data obtained as random numbers and the random number range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning pattern lottery and the fluctuation pattern lottery, which will be described later. In addition, the lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the obtained random number matches the random number that will be the big hit may be adopted. may be adopted.

(Hit design lottery)
"Hit symbol lottery" receives the lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above, the control contents related to the operation of the subsequent special electric accessory P755, and the lottery table of the fluctuation pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 62 to 64) ) is the process of determining the stop display design of the special design as the lottery result necessary for switching.

FIG. 61 shows a jackpot pattern lottery table (see FIG. 61(A)) used in the winning pattern lottery when the lottery result is "big hit", and when the lottery result is "small hit". , a small winning symbol lottery table (see FIG. 61 (B)) used in the winning symbol lottery, and a losing symbol lottery table (Fig. 61 ( C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used in the winning symbol lottery has a random value range of "1000" ("0" to "999"). 0” to “3”, and the lower 1 byte is represented by “0” to “255”.

To explain the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (the upper byte is "1" and the lower byte is "144"). In the case of the winning pattern lottery for the pattern, using the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. is obtained as a result of the lottery, and when the special symbols are changed and displayed, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device P52) is stopped.

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, when "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device, and when "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol, each of the 5 rounds of the jackpot game. The content of the round game (opening pattern and opening time of the big winning hole P751, etc.) may be varied based on the stop display pattern, and control may be performed to vary the control content in the specific game state that shifts after the jackpot game. It is possible. These jackpot games and control assignments in the specific game state are appropriately determined in order to realize game performance according to the specifications of each pachinko game machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the lottery shown in FIG. After determining the type of jackpot such as 5R probability variable 2", the type of jackpot is determined by performing another lottery from a plurality of patterns to determine the stop display pattern for executing the jackpot of the corresponding type. , and determination of the symbols to be displayed to be stopped, and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two steps.

Also, in the pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in FIG. , the types of winning symbols that can be determined are different. More specifically, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, the possibility of determining "10R probability variation 5" to "10R probability variation 8" is increasing in the second special symbol jackpot, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big win with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easy to win a big win that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 61(B) illustrates a small winning symbol lottery table. The small winning symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery success or failure lottery is "small win", and the lottery method is the above-mentioned big winning symbol lottery table. is similar to

In the small winning symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 61(B), most of them are winning the "small winning 1" symbol, and when the second special symbol lottery result is "small winning". , a "small hit 2" can be determined. It should be noted that one type of small winning pattern may be used, or three or more types of patterns may be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small winning symbols like the pachinko game machine P that is the premise, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game For example, in a pachinko game machine P that adopts a small win V as a game machine specification (spec), to separate a small win game that is easy to win a V in a specific area and a small win game that makes it difficult to win a V. The purpose is to execute a mode such as differentiating the small winning patterns and differentiating the small winning patterns in order to separate the type of the specific game to be shifted after the execution of the big winning game after winning the V prize.

FIG. 61(C) illustrates a lost symbol lottery table. The lost symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery lottery is "lost", and the method of lottery is the jackpot symbol lottery described above with respect to the first special symbol. It is the same as the time of the table, and has a different method for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 61(C) shows only the winning symbol lottery table for the first special symbol. Only in this case, lottery processing is performed, and either "lose 1" or "lose 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "lost 2" pattern is a winning design with a probability of about 6.4% when the 1st special pattern is lost. A special lottery table (not shown) is referred to to facilitate determination of the variation pattern (variation time). For this reason, "losing 2" may be referred to as "reaching loosing pattern" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, does not have a winning symbol lottery table for the second special symbol, and is designed to determine a winning symbol of 1 regardless of the random number of symbols. The table comparison process itself is omitted, and one missing pattern is stored. It should be noted that it is also possible to use a lottery table that always wins one symbol so that a winning symbol is won.

(fluctuation pattern lottery)
The "fluctuation pattern lottery" is a process of randomly determining the fluctuation display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the premised pachinko game machine P, a special pattern lottery is used as the performance time required for notifying the performance display device P80 whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and what the type of the jackpot is in the case of a big win. is determined using a variation pattern table, which will be described later.

FIG. 62 mainly shows a normal game state (low probability/low base medium) and a low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the premise pachinko game machine P, a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game board. It represents the “low base medium fluctuation pattern lottery table” in which it is recommended that

The "ID" shown in FIG. 62 represents information stored as a result of the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the same ID is won. It shows a representative example of the mode of production of variation. "Variation time" is the variation display time value of the special symbol in the target variation pattern lottery result (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special symbol is variably displayed to when it is stopped.

"Holding 1 fluctuation" to "Holding 4 fluctuation" in FIG. Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Hold N fluctuation". That is, the variation pattern lottery for the first special symbols in the low base state is configured to vary the variation pattern table to be used depending on the number of reservations. It should be noted that, when the game ball enters the start winning hole in the state where there is no suspension, it is temporarily stored as suspension for processing, so the variation pattern lottery is executed using the variation pattern table of "Hold 1 variation". be.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of reservations, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of reservations. It should be noted that, although not shown, as a result of the pattern lottery, if "missing 2 (reaching lost pattern)" is determined, even if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, 1 variation that does not depend on the number of reservations It is configured to perform a variation pattern lottery using a pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for loss 2).

"10R probability variation", "5R probability variation", "10R normal", "5R normal" in FIG. is a "big hit", and represents that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting the variation pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 62, since the second special symbol is not the subject of the game in the low base state, the big hit variation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form independent of the big hit symbol, but the big hit of the second special symbol is also expressed. , and may have a plurality of patterns according to the type of the jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the variation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, it is a lottery of the first special symbol, the situation where the variation pattern random number is "30000" and the number of pending balls at the start of variation is 3 (situation where the number of pending is 2 after the start of variation). I will explain the situation where the winning or losing lottery result and the winning symbol lottery are "lose 1".

First, since the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "maintain 3 fluctuation" is used. The lottery process compares (subtracts) the variation pattern random number and the random number range corresponding to the variation pattern ID of each lottery result, similarly to the lottery process in the winning lottery described above, and determines whether the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, at the timing of normal fluctuation B of ID "2", the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as a fluctuation pattern lottery, special After the variation display for 7 seconds is performed as the variation display of the symbols, the missing symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be explained using FIG. The configuration of the variation pattern table in the high base state has a configuration that is the same as the variation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. It is constructed so as to have a table and a table for each jackpot pattern at the time of jackpot. Although FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 are configured so that many variation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and is determined by the low base state and the high base state. It is also possible to configure such that the variation patterns overlap only a few times or do not overlap at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the lottery result of the second special symbol "H3 fluctuation" and "H4 fluctuation" at the time of loss is the shortest fluctuation time of the pachinko game machine P that is assumed. A 2-second variation (variation pattern ID “12”) is configured to be determinable.

Furthermore, as a characteristic point of the variation pattern in the high base state, the 10-second variation of the variation pattern ID "4" is always determined for the lottery of the first special symbol. The reason for configuring the first special symbol with a variation of 10 seconds is that the player's profit in the case of a big hit is large in the big hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot patterns that shift to the probability fluctuation state as the specific game state), and by performing a large number of variable displays corresponding to the second special pattern with priority, the jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. is intended to make it possible to obtain In addition, even if there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage between the first special symbol and the second special symbol jackpot game, the first special symbol is based on the fact that the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted. It is easy to hold the hold established in the normal game state (low base state) until the end of the specific game state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, to avoid the variable display. Another object is to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to cause the first special symbol hold in the low base state, relative to the amount of game balls used to generate the special symbol hold.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a special table for a limited period, and represents a special variation pattern table referred to during a specific period. In FIG. 64, as an example of a special variation pattern table provided in the pachinko game machine P as a premise, a special variation pattern table for three periods is comprehensively described.

More specifically, in FIG. 64, the period from the 1st to the 4th variation after the big hit (the so-called "retained ream" (retained ream), which is a big hit with 4 holds that exist at the time of the big win) period), and the reach variation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the n-th to m-th variation after the big hit, is likely to be selected. Referred to in the high frequency reach table (IDs "52", "53", "54", "72") and the last variable display in the high base state, the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that a different "result variation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") is provided in the premise pachinko game machine P.

Such a special variation pattern table that is referenced for a limited period of time is called a "special variation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the premise pachinko game machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to during a predetermined period after the jackpot game (operation of the special electric role product, in other words, operation of the role product continuous operation device). is doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to change whether or not to refer to them depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern). It is also possible to configure them differently. What kind of special variation pattern table to refer to in what situation can be appropriately set for each pachinko game machine, and the details are not limited to the examples, and if necessary, the details can be explained in a separate description. and

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that performs control related to the effect operation in the pachinko game machine P as a premise will be described. The operation control of the performance control board P41 is less restricted in the model test of the game machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, so it will be explained in the following explanation. It is not limited only to the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can also be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board to main loop processing]
In the premise pachinko game machine P, power-on processing (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 when the power of the game machine is turned on. Here, the details of the power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started in the effect control board P41 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the initial setting process relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the effect control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process is to appropriately perform settings necessary for the operation of the CPU thereafter, and details thereof will be omitted. Since there is a time lag between the completion of the power-on process (Fig. 57) and the power-on process (Fig. 65) of the effect control board, if the effect before the power failure is restored after the power is restored, the operation of the main control board P40 and Since there is a risk of deviation, in the initial processing of the effect control board P41 at the time of power failure recovery, the effect information etc. are often initialized so that the effect that was being executed before the power failure is not executed ("effect called “control board reset” and “sub-reset”).

(Main loop of production control board)
In the premise pachinko game machine P, the main loop process is performed after the initial setting process. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is set so that the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to approximately 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is performed once at a cycle of 16 ms, which is approximately half the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop processing of the effect control board P41, clear processing of the watchdog timer for detecting runaway of the CPU is first performed (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, is designed to monitor the input port even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later. Therefore, monitoring of inputs such as switches, which are necessary monitoring objects in the system, is limited, and monitoring of inputs such as sensors necessary for controlling the effect of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modified example, sensors to be monitored for performance may be checked in the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

The contents of the input port monitoring process are the same as the input port confirmation process of the main control board, from the input data of various sensors, level data is generated and stored, and rising (falling) data is stored. be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs effect device control processing (step 4010), and executes control related to effect operations other than the effect display device P80 (image display). The production devices controlled in this process include lamps P82 ("board lamp (P550)" and "frame lamp (P350)"), speakers P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production movable accessories P560, and the like. An effect operation command corresponding to the content of the effect decided to be executed by a process such as the effect control process (step 4012), which will be described later, is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

This is because the output of the effect operation commands to various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) must be executed (started) in synchronization with the effect image displayed on the effect display device P80 (image display device). , the signal transmitted at regular intervals from the image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 to the effect control board P41 or the signal for forcibly synchronizing is received (the input port monitoring process described above). ), it synchronizes with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and outputs the effect operation command to various effect devices.

In addition, regarding the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 among the effect devices, it is necessary to control the driving means of the effect movable accessory P560 in a shorter period, so the effect set in this process Regarding the motion pattern of the performance movable accessory P560 to be executed by the motion command, sensor monitoring and motion switching are executed even during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 66) of the performance control board P41, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control processing (step 4012) executed in the main loop processing of the effect control board P41 will be described. Effect control processing is based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process to be described later, and the information of the received effect control command itself (such as the lottery result ID of the special symbol lottery) ), input port monitoring processing (step 4008), interrupt processing (FIG. 66), etc., based on flags that are established during other processing, processing to decide by lottery or selection of the content of effects to be executed by various effect devices. is.

The effect control process selects the effect determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the corresponding effect determination submodule process. As an example of the production content determined here, the process of determining the variation production corresponding to the variation of one special symbol based on the command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery (processing to determine the content of notices, reach, and decorative patterns to be stopped), and pre-reading performance (" Based on the information sent as a production control command when executing a pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute a special game (big hit or small hit), the content of the production during the special game is determined. There is a special game effect content determination process and the like.

In addition, the effect control process is not only the process for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also the determination process of the error display content when an error is detected by the effect control board P41 (error transmitted from the main control board). (including determination processing of error display content based on information), adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the player's input operation such as the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 which are the effect operation means P81, and the lamp P82 It also executes the determination of the effect content, such as the light amount adjustment for changing the light emission luminance of the display, and the customization of the effect content and the tendency to determine the effect content.

It should be noted that the processing for determining the contents of various effects performed in the sub-module processing called in the effect control process is often subject to the invention, since the specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used. When the pachinko game machine P executes a characteristic process, the details will be explained in the explanation of the embodiment of the pachinko game machine P which is the object of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis processing (step 4014) will be described as the last processing of the main loop processing.

The effect control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40. and set flags. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing contents according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40. process is executed.

Since there is a possibility that one command (MODE data and EVENT data) will be transmitted for each interrupt processing (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40, the effect control command can Until the period (16 ms) of the main loop processing of the substrate P41 elapses, the analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as long as it can be processed (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. Unlike the interrupt processing of the main control board, the interrupt processing in the effect control board P41 has a plurality of interrupt processing started with different execution triggers (see FIGS. 66(A) and (B)). In addition, priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and if an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, even if the interrupt process is being executed, the higher interrupt process will be executed. controlled by In this description, the production control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 66(A)) and the production control command reception interrupt (FIG. 66(B)) will be described as representatives.

(Production control timer interrupt processing)
Effect control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 66(A)) is interrupt processing executed at a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

Port input/output processing (step 5002) is input from the input port of the effect control board P41 to the sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 and other sensors (input sensor of the effect operation means P81). From the output port, the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the movable accessory P560 is driven according to the operation pattern set in the production device control process. A process for outputting a signal is executed. Also, when data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) for counting the number of times of output is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the update processing for each timer is completed, a comparison operation is performed with a comparison value, and it is determined whether or not the switching condition for the performance operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) A process for storing the flag in the storage area is performed.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) is based on sensor detection data generated in the port input/output process to obtain sensor detection information related to the switching of the effect operation, such as whether or not the condition for switching the effect operation of the effect movable accessory P560 is met. is determined, and processing for switching the operation pattern table is performed, and processing for setting a condition flag for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) is performed.

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for judging whether or not the effect switching condition is established based on the inputs of the effect button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device generated in the port input/output process (step 5002) and the rising data (data indicating that the level data has changed from OFF last time to ON this time) are used to generate effects. It determines whether or not the operating means P81 is operated and how it is operated.

For example, when start-up data is generated as input information for the effect operating means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the effect operating means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. . In addition, if the input is judged only by the rise data, there is a possibility that the effect operation will be switched due to erroneous detection due to electrical noise. It may be determined that the player's operation (sometimes expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") on the effect operation means P81 is triggered by the continuation.

Further, when the ON input level data is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the effect operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined as a "long press (long draw)" operation, It is configured to handle as a special operation. In addition, the falling data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous ON to the current OFF) may be electrically detected as noise when judging whether or not there is a "long press (long pull)" operation. , In this case as well, similar to the measures to prevent false detection described above, after detection of falling data, based on the detection of input of level data (off data) multiple times, input of "long press (long draw)" operation It is also possible to determine the end.

Then, in the premised pachinko game machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means is executed once at a constant cycle (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the processing that assumes that there is a "single press (single pull)" input operation on P81. Execution of repetitive processing assuming that a "single-press" operation has been performed is called an "automatic repeated-press" operation. It should be noted that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation is not limited to the operation content illustrated, but by operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 at the same time or by turning on and off a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button, It is also possible to adopt a method of assuming that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation has been executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

Note that the input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as a valid operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

Multi-task processing (step 5010), depending on the value of the task counter (updated between the value "0" ~ "15") that is updated each time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, effect control generated this time This is a process performed by changing the contents of the process to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate at a cycle of 16 ms, and the processing for each counter value is executed substantially in synchronization with one cycle of the main loop processing. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on a signal (input information is generated by port input/output processing) transmitted from the image control board P42, and the image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operation status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) sends an image control command ("inter-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 so as to execute an image display corresponding to the content of the effect determined in the effect control process P41. ) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the performance control board P41 may be configured by the same board, they are referred to as the image control board P42 for the sake of convenience in this specification.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the effect control board P41 consists of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command designating the pattern of the display content as the image control command. It is configured to send.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is configured to transmit image control commands in the effect control timer interrupt process. It is also possible to configure such that transmission and reception are performed by providing interrupt processing.

(Production control command reception interrupt)
In the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 66(B)), a strobe signal is output in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (FIG. 59) of the main control board P40, and the strobe signal is transmitted to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process that occurs when P41 receives.

When the effect control command reception interrupt is started, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data ends, it is determined whether or not the reception of one effect control command (a combination of MODE data and EVENT data) has been completed (step 5506). It should be noted that the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40 has specific bits of "1" and "0" in the 1-byte data.

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, processing is performed to store the content of the effect control command received this time in the normal lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if the part of the specific bit in the lower 1-byte storage area of the current temporary buffer data before update indicates that it is MODE data, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1-byte storage area. After that, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not a specific bit in the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data, and it is determined that it is EVENT data. In the case, the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506 YES) and proceeds to the next process, and when it is determined that it is MODE data (step 5506 NO), the transmission of EVENT data from the main control board P40 Until receiving the strobe signal based on, it exits the effect control command reception interrupt, performs other processing and waits.

In step 5506, when it judges that reception of the production|presentation control command was completed, it judges whether the sent production|presentation control command was normal (step 5508). This processing is determined, for example, based on whether or not matching data exists in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in a storage area for storing the effect control command received so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process, In the case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display effects]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70, the basic effects in the pachinko game machine P as a premise will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (during display of decorative symbols stopped) during normal game (during low probability/low base), and FIG. It is a figure showing the situation where it is. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 70 shows a game performance during operation of the electric chewing support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). It is a diagram of

(Example of effect display in normal game state)
《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (decorative symbols are being stopped and displayed) during normal game (during low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in such a manner that the player can clearly see them. These three patterns are called "decorative patterns (P801)" (also called "design"), and are dramatic display items displayed corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and the fluctuation of the special patterns. The display changes according to the display. Although only numbers are shown in FIG. 67, each number may be displayed with a decoration image such as a character image. Also, in the case where each number is displayed with a decoration image, the display mode of the decoration image and each number may be changed according to the game state. Such a configuration makes it easier for the player to determine the current game state.

The decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed as one effect for one variable display of the special pattern (one special pattern lottery), except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed, the decorative pattern is variably displayed at high speed (transparent display or non-display depending on the case), and animation and production effect images are displayed. By the production called "notice", the production that raises the expectation of acquiring the right of the big hit game is performed.

The decorative pattern P801 shown in FIG. 67 is scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left pattern (P801a), the right pattern (P801c), and the middle pattern (P801b) in this order. The stop display symbols determined by the effect control board P41 are stopped and displayed for each symbol row. Generally, when the three decorative patterns P801 are stop-displayed in the same manner (zoroshi), a big hit is reported in a dramatic manner. In addition, while one symbol is displayed in a variable manner, other symbols are displayed. The state in which the right and left symbols are displayed in the same pattern (temporary stop display) is called "reach" ("reach state", "reach mode").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scroll display in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the form of the variable display is not limited to the vertical direction, and can be scrolled forward and backward using the horizontal direction and depth ( It is also possible to perform a scroll display operation in a diagonal direction, or to perform a rotation operation on the spot without scrolling and to switch the display in order.

Also, the decorative pattern P801 may be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during one time of variable display of the special pattern. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display showing the result of the special lottery is a stop display displayed at the same timing as the stop display pattern of the special pattern is stop-displayed on the special pattern display device. A stop display at a timing other than this is called a "temporary stop (display)." In addition, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display at the same time may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display of the pattern (main stop). It is configured to rotate, move in directions such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "vibration fluctuation" in addition to temporary stop.

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display may be repeated again, and generally, the re-fluctuation from the state where the symbols other than the jackpot pattern are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo-variation (pseudo-run)" effect. , The re-fluctuation that may change the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot pattern is stopped is called "promotion (fluctuation)" effect. In addition, when the promotion performance is executed, it may be configured not to change to a jackpot pattern that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot pattern, or to not change to a losing pattern.

In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804)” (special symbol). The special design has a meaning in each pattern, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot will be executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-fluctuation effect will be performed, or a specific reach effect (reach mode) Examples include those that suggest that the advance notice effect displayed in the case) will be executed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as the decoration symbol (middle symbol P801b) to be temporarily stopped at the end. A special pattern may be temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern.

《Simple layout (mini layout)》
Three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801 are displayed on the upper right of the screen. This design is also called "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and shows the lottery result of the special design according to the variable display of the special design, similar to the above-mentioned "decorative design". Displayed as a display object.

Unlike the "decorative design", the simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design". In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, one stop display is always performed for one special symbol lottery.

In addition, the variable display of the simple design P802 may be configured to form the same ready-to-win state when the decorative pattern P801 described above is in the ready-to-win state, or to notify the result of the special design lottery. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, it is possible to adopt a simple variable display method such as performing constant display switching until the variable display of the special symbol is in a stopped display state regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

《Reserved display area》
A pending display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the reserved display area P810, a reserved object P811 corresponding to the reserved (random number) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the special symbol lottery right acquired by the player. The example of FIG. 67 shows a state in which three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 67, the earlier the execution timing of the special symbol lottery is (that is, the earlier the hold is), the closer it is to the lower part of the screen in the substantially central direction, and the hold display area P810. The display position of the reserved object located on the rightmost side of the screen is called "H1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, it is "H2 (display area)", "H3 (display area)", and "H4 ( display area)”.

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the reserved display area P810, an object having substantially the same form as the reserved object P811 of the reserved display area P810 is displayed at a higher position and larger in size than the reserved object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the current special symbol variable display from the pending display area, and is called the "variable object display area (P812)". . In addition, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is called "the variable object (P813)", but it may also be called "the pending display", and is differentiated from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810. Therefore, the acronym “applicable” is used.

The display mode of the changing object P813 in the changing object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the suspended object P811. In some cases, the shape may change or disappear (hidden). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same way as the pending display in the pending change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at the timing during the variable display). ).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at approximately the center in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, and are called "simple reserved display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 67, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. .

(Look-ahead effect)
《Pending change lookahead》
Also, in FIG. 67, the reserved object P811 in the H3 display area in the reserved display area P810 is displayed in a manner different from the reserved objects P811 in the H2 and H1 display areas. The premise pachinko game machine P is configured such that the display mode of the 3rd retained object P811 has a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the display mode of the 2nd retained object P811. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending object P811 and displaying it for a specific pending is called "holding change (prefetching)".

In addition, it is not limited only to the mode illustrated in FIG. may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "suspension change (prefetch)", when it is determined that the random value stored as suspension is to be executed, the variable display corresponding to the suspension that is the execution target of the production is started. The production that suggests that there is a high possibility that the pending jackpot, which is the target of execution of the production ahead of time, is called the “pre-reading production” (sometimes referred to as the “pre-judgment production”). I'm in.

Then, when executing the "prefetching effect", the hold determined as the hold that is the execution target of the effect may be referred to as "prefetch target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", etc. , The variable display of special symbols based on prefetch target suspension is referred to as "prefetch target variation", "trigger variation", "culprit variation", and the like.

Here, some representative examples that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified as "prefetching effect".

《Foresight of Opportunity》
"Chance eye look-ahead" is the variation display of the decorative symbols P801 until the variation of the look-ahead target variation is started. It is a production that will be done. As an example of the rule of the stop display mode of the decorative pattern P801 predetermined as the chance eye, (a) when the winning pattern is stopped by combining only the patterns with the same hue of the numerical portion of the decorative pattern, (b) When displayed in a regular stop display mode such as ``1'', ``2'', ``3'', ``5'', ``4'', ``3'', etc. (c) A special number such as "7" or a pattern different from a number such as "first" is stop-displayed as a medium-sized stop display pattern.

《Direction movable role-reading》
"Effective movable accessory look-ahead" reads ahead the effective movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the premise pachinko game machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). This is an effect that makes a lively action from the start of the change until the change display of the target change starts or straddles the look-ahead target change according to the effect operation pattern.

《Zone Transition Look Ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" moves to a special production mode (called "zone") in the variable display of special symbols before the look-ahead target variation starts, and until the look-ahead target variation is displayed, special This is a look-ahead effect suggesting that the possibility of a big win is high by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a special effect mode. For example, "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> big hit", or "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> winning pattern stops and returns to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach effect)
Next, FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a situation in which a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big hit is being performed. As described above, the "ready-to-win effect" is a situation in which decorative patterns (left pattern P801a, right pattern P801c) other than one decorative pattern (middle pattern P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more pattern is displayed. It means an effect in a state in which it is announced that a big win will be achieved if the game is stopped in the same mode.

In many cases, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, has a specification for notifying a big hit by displaying three decorative patterns P801 in the same stop display mode via a ready-to-win effect.

In the example of FIG. 68, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c of the decorative patterns are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the patterns in the middle pattern row during fluctuation. This is a situation where the symbol "4" vibrates violently, and if it switches to "5", it will be a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 68, the left and right decorative symbols "5" are displayed in a smaller size than the decorative symbols P801 during stop display in FIG. The decorative pattern P801b in the row is displayed in a larger size than the decorative pattern P801 during stop display, and is highlighted. At this time, the decorative symbols displayed in small sizes corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c may be called "retreat symbol (P803)" or "reach symbol". In the ready-to-win effect, in addition to the example shown in the figure, whether or not a big hit will be announced depending on how the animation of the advance notice effect (ready-to-win effect) displayed with the variable display of the decorative pattern will end. In some cases, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c, which have already been temporarily stopped and displayed, are displayed (or hidden) in a reduced size in the retracted pattern P803 so as to enhance the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to. ing.

Also, there is a game machine that does not display three decorative symbols P801, and there is also a multi-line reach that simultaneously forms a reach mode of multiple lines, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the ready-to-win effect, there is a ready-to-win effect called “full-rotation ready-to-win” in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variably displayed in the same manner. What is the standard for ready-to-win performance, ``a situation in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same manner, and a state in which it is notified that a big win will occur if one more symbol stops in the same manner''? Depending on the context, a full spin reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach performance.

Also, in FIG. 68, an "effect setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 68, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The production setting display area P850 has a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the game machine P, a light amount adjustment function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decoration lamp P82 of the game machine P, and a production mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and change status of the presentation mode change function for changing the type of notice presentation to be called and for changing the frequency of occurrence of notice presentation.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, but is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation related to the above-described various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function). For example, by operating the cross key P383 in the left/right direction, it is possible to display an effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. In the situation of FIG. 68, when the player further operates the right button of the cross key P383, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value changes from "3" to It is designed to change to "4".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, when adjusting the light amount, it is configured so that the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the up and down direction, and the effect mode change function is performed according to the operation of the effect button. An example of switching the production mode in a predetermined order is given. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of effects during the game, and can be appropriately adopted other than the exemplified method of changing the settings.

In addition, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and a period during which it is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is disabled.

(Example of effect display during jackpot game)
Subsequently, based on FIG. 69, the display mode of the effect in the state of executing the jackpot game in the premised pachinko game machine P will be described.

《Production display indicating the type of jackpot》
At the bottom left of the screen and the top right of the screen in FIG. 69, the decoration pattern P801 that triggered the execution of the big win game is displayed. At the lower left of the screen, similarly to during execution of the ready-to-win production described above, 1 decorative pattern P801 (also called "big hit design (P805)") is displayed in a display mode smaller than the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable display, and the upper right of the screen is displayed. , the simplified design P802 that was displayed when the variable display of the special symbols was completed is displayed continuously.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the type of the jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the jackpot are determined by the type of the decorative pattern P801 that triggered the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred). and the game state after the end of the jackpot (normal game state). Therefore, by displaying the decorative patterns (jackpot design P805, simple pattern P802) that triggered the execution of the big win, the type of the big win and the number of game balls expected to be obtained can be determined even during the big win game. It makes it possible to suggest

Further, as a display indicating the type of jackpot, in FIG. 69, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed below the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"). The letter "MAX" is written in the center of P821. An icon P821 in the figure indicates a jackpot suggested by the character string "MAX", and indicates that a jackpot game of the maximum round of the premise pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "jackpot icon" or a "consecutive (display) icon", and every time the specific game state and the jackpot game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively, and the so-called "consecutive game" is displayed. This is an effect display for informing the player how many times and what kind of jackpot he has won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown in the figure, the pachinko machine P on which the premise is assumed, "00 bonus!" An effect of informing the player of the type of the big win is executed by making a display such as "△△ Chance" (suggesting a big win other than the maximum round).

In addition, for example, even if it is suggested that it is a big hit such as "△△ chance" in which the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the big hit will be performed as "Extra bonus! + 0 rounds" during the big hit round. In fact, it is also possible to execute a "jackpot promotion effect" such as notifying that the jackpot is the maximum round.

It should be noted that the "jackpot promotion effect" is also used when suggesting that a jackpot game is being executed in which a transition to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified jackpot type is performed. There is something. For example, from the production of a jackpot game that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the jackpot game (referred to as "non-probability variation jackpot" and "normal jackpot"), the probability fluctuation function will operate after the jackpot game (" There is an effect display such as switching to the effect of "probable variable big hit", "specific big hit").

<<Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game>>
Next, when executing the big win game, the effect display showing the progress of the big win game will be described. In FIG. 69, as an effect showing the effect display of the big hit, "round display (P820)" executed by displaying the character string "ROUND_〇" on the upper left of the screen, and displaying the character string "TOTAL_○○pt" on the lower right of the screen. "Acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in , and "Count display (P825)" displayed with 10 circular image objects substantially in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, during the jackpot game, in addition to these displays, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed.

《Round display》
"Round display (P820)" is a display indicating what round the round game (unit game) being executed is during the jackpot game. The numerical value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game is started. The example of FIG. 69 shows a situation in which the sixth round game is being played.

It should be noted that the "round display (p820)" does not necessarily need to be synchronized with the actual number of executed rounds during the jackpot game. For example, in the specifications of the "small win V" described above, the small win game is counted as the first round, and the first round of the big win game executed after the V winning is treated as the second round. In another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with a transition to the easy ball entry state for a short period of time, the value of "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening P751 is closed. There may be a case where the substantially executed round is treated as a “substantial round” only when the open pattern of is in a state of easy ball entry for a long period of time.

《Acquired number of balls display》
"Number of winning balls display (P822)" is a special game sandwiched between "Number of winning balls display (P823 * not shown)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls that have been acquired in one big hit game during execution. There is a type such as "accumulated winning ball number display (824)" that displays the number of game balls cumulatively acquired in multiple jackpots. FIG. 69 shows an example in which a 5-digit display of the number of acquired balls, ie, "accumulated number of acquired balls display (P824)" is displayed. It should be noted that the "big hit acquired ball number display (P823)" and the "accumulated acquired ball number display (P824)" may be simultaneously displayed in parallel.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the "number of won balls display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the big winning hole P751 during the big win game. However, as the accumulation target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payout based on the ball entry into the general winning hole P731 and the second start winning hole P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 is accumulated and added. may

In addition, as another modification, the display period of "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" may be displayed not only during the jackpot game but also during execution of a specific game, or "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" , may be extended not only during the big win game but also during the specific game or the small win game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P on which the assumption is made, in addition to the "display of the number of winning balls (P822)", the number of accumulated prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in a special situation such as when the number of payouts has been reached, it is possible to execute an effect of ``display of the number of obtained balls'' to emphasize and notify the player in addition to the ``display of the number of obtained balls'' (for example, ``GET 10000! !”).

《Count display》
"Count display (P825)" indicates how many more balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in this round game. This is a display showing whether the ball has entered the big winning hole P751. The former is displayed as a circular object that is shaded in FIG. 69, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object in two columns at the approximately center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 69, as the sixth round of the game, five balls have been entered into the big winning slot (indicated by white circular objects), and five more balls can be entered (indicated by shaded circular objects). display) is indicated by the count display P825. The count display P825 is reset to its initial state each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 is consecutive to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 depending on the flow of the game balls. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning with the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over winning" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, special light emission of the effect lamp P82, and special effect sound is emitted from the speaker P83. You may notify Further, with respect to the above-described winning ball number display P822, the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of "over winning" may be added or may be excluded from addition.

<<Other production display during jackpot game>>
Next, another effect display that is executed in FIG. 69 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the aforementioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decoration pattern (jackpot layout P805) at the bottom left of the screen is the "Selected Music Display (P854)" indicating the title of the song being played during the current jackpot game. . In the premise pachinko game machine P, the player can arbitrarily select a piece of music to be reproduced by operating the production button P381 or the cross key P383 during the first round or the second round during the jackpot game. have specifications. As for the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image of "can be changed with (up) and (down) keys" is displayed near the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

In addition, the selection of production during such a jackpot game is not limited to changing the music, but it is also possible to change the round production and select the production (production mode) during the specific game after the jackpot game (generally (referred to as “effect customization display (P853)”), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Finally, the "Right shot" and the right arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified layout P802 on the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "Shooting division notification (P830)" (also called "recommended firing position notification" etc.) is. In the premise pachinko game machine P, during the jackpot game, it is a game state in which it is recommended to shoot the game ball to the right side area P501R of the game area, so "Right shot notification (P832)" ("Right shot" , and the right arrow symbol display) are being executed.

The "beating notification" is displayed not only during the jackpot game, but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state changes (occurrence/end of a big win or occurrence/end of a specific game state), a display of a size larger than the split notification P830 shown in FIG. 69 is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen, etc., an effect is executed to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next game state.

It should be noted that in the "beating division notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first division notification image" ("right hitting large display (P831)", " left-handed large display (P833)"), and during the jackpot game or during the specific game state, the recommended firing position in the game state is displayed almost all the time during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "announcement image" ("right shot small display (P832)", "left shot small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "beating split notification (P830)", when detecting a situation in which the game ball is shot at a position other than the recommended shooting position, for example, during a big hit, the left side area of the game area ``Left-handed warning notification'' (``Right-handed attention alerting notification (P835)'' for alerting the player that the game ball should be shot to the right side area P501R of the game area when the game ball is shot to P501L) ) to display a message such as "Please hit right"). In addition, in a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, "Right-handed warning notification" ("Left-handed attention calling notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during specific game state)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during the specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). There are a wide variety of effects displayed in the figure, but the explanation of what was explained in the previous explanation is omitted, and the effects that have not been explained so far, and the differences from the above explanation A description will be given regarding the effect display having.

First, as an effect display that has not been explained so far, as an explanation of the effect display during the specific game state, the "production mode display (P840)" and the "remaining number of games display (P841)" will be explained.

<<Production mode display>>
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display that indicates the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display that indicates that an advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is being drawn according to the state information called the effect mode. . When the presentation mode display is different, it is common that the type of announcement presentation visually recognized by the player is made so that the visual impression is greatly different, although there are some announcement presentations that are partly common. . In FIG. 70, "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, indicating that the game state of the pachinko game machine P as a prerequisite is "ST (variable number of cuts)" (high probability/high base state). ing.

It should be noted that the "production mode display (P840)", in addition to notifying the production mode in the specific game state, may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), or may be displayed in one game When the state has a plurality of production modes, the display may be performed temporarily or continuously until the production mode ends each time a condition for switching the production mode is established.

《Remaining number of games display》
"Remaining game count display (P841)" is the number of times the special symbols are displayed variably until the specific game state ends (the number of special symbol lotteries), and the number of times the special symbols variably displayed until the current production mode ends. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 70, the display "remaining _56" is executed in the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (variable number of cuts)" is executed until the special symbol lottery is executed 56 more times. people are notified.

Next, in the example of effect display in the specific game state shown in FIG. 70, the display that is different from the example of effect display in other game states described above will be described.

《Decorative pattern (specific game state)》
At the center of the screen in FIG. 70, a variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed. As compared with the decorative symbol P801 in the normal game state shown in FIG. 70, the decorative symbol P801 in the specific game state shown in FIG. 70 is displayed in a smaller size.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as the effect display of the specific game state, the effect mode display P840, the remaining game count display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are performed in the upper part of the screen, and the selected music is displayed in the lower part of the screen. P854 and display of the number of balls acquired P824 are performed. In the specific game state, such additional display that is not displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is performed. In the case of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, there is a risk that the display of some symbols overlaps a part of each display, and the visibility of the stop display symbols is reduced. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is made small and simplified so that it is difficult for the display to occur. Further, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative pattern P801, it is possible to adopt a method of reducing the size and not displaying a character image or the like that is displayed along with the number indicating the pattern.

《Reserved display area (specific game state)》
In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen in FIG. A display area is provided for the pending object of "H4". Note that the display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the "RUSH_MODE" rendering mode state.

When the change display shown in FIG. 70 ends and a new change starts in the state, the display of the pending object P811 positioned at the bottom in FIG. The display is controlled so that the display is enlarged.

In addition, although not shown, a description will be given of the "result display effect", which is an important effect displayed during the specific game.

《Result display performance》
The "result display effect" is mainly used in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, when the final variation of the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold that occurred during the specific game state disappears. This is a performance that is performed at the timing when the player recognizes that the “Renso” state has ended, and in the so-called “Renso” state, information on how many times the jackpot game has been won, and how many game balls have been played in total. This is an effect for informing the player whether or not the ball has been acquired (corresponding to display of the number of acquired balls).

<<How to display the final effect>>
Next, a method of displaying a final effect according to the present invention will be described. The fixed effect described below can be applied to the above-described slot machine and pachinko game machine.

<Confirmed production>
The fixed effect is a effect indicating that a bonus or the like has been won. In addition to the bonus, it may also be used for shifting to AT, adding AT (number of times, number of sheets), etc. In the pachinko game machine, it is possible to indicate that a jackpot has been won, that the game will be a probability change, and the like. As for the fixed effect, the display device 32 (the effect display device P80) may display characters, a predetermined background, or the like in rainbow colors, or may display a dedicated character. Furthermore, the final effect is not limited to the case where an image or moving image is displayed on the display device 32 or the like, but also the case where the sound as the final effect is output from the speaker S or the like, or the lighting mode of the lamp as the final effect is emitted from the housing. In some cases, the body lamp (the lamp on the board surface in the pachinko game machine, the frame lamp) may emit light.

In addition, the fixed effect is displayed in any case when it is decided to shift to a jackpot game such as a bonus or AT, etc., when AT is added (number of times, number of sheets) or when a jackpot game is decided. It may be configured to be displayed in any case, or may be configured to be displayed in either case.

FIG. 71 is an example of a case where a character string is displayed in rainbow colors, which is one of the fixed effects. Here, an example will be described in which the rainbow color display (see the drawing if necessary) moves within each character, and the rainbow color display moves over the entire character string.

First, referring to FIG. 71(a), when the characters "Chance" are displayed horizontally from left to right on the display device 32, the rainbow color display moves from left to right within each character, and the rainbow color Describe when the display is displayed to move across the string of chances.

The rainbow color display is displayed using seven colors in order of red→orange→yellow→green→blue→indigo→purple. The display of colors loops, so red appears after purple.

Here, the "chi" of "chance" is red on the left, purple in the center, and indigo on the right. "A" is indigo on the left, blue in the center, and green on the right. "N" is yellow on the left, orange in the center, and red on the right. "su" is red on the left, purple in the center, and indigo on the right.

The rainbow color display moves from left to right, and when viewed from the red of "n" and "su", it is displayed in the order of red→orange→yellow→green→blue→indigo→purple.

Focusing on the colors displayed in each character, three colors are displayed in one character. In order to recognize that the entire character string is rainbow colored, it is preferable to display a plurality of kinds of colors in one character, and at least one character may be displayed in three or more colors. is preferred. However, it is not necessary to be limited to this, and there may be cases where only two colors or only one color is displayed within one character. For example, a character that is smaller than other characters, such as the character "chance", has a narrower displayable range. prone to color.

In addition, if the characters are small, even if seven colors are displayed in one character, it is difficult to see the seven colors, and the appearance may be poor.

Therefore, even if seven colors are not displayed in one character, a plurality of colors (for example, three colors) out of the seven colors can be displayed in one character. You can make it look like you have it.

Note that the same type of color (same color) is not displayed at two locations in one character even if the character is the smallest character size. As described above, the rainbow color display is configured to be displayed in the order of red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple, so the same color may be displayed in multiple places within one character. no.

In this way, even if the display area of one color is enlarged without displaying seven colors in one character, the displayed character string can be seen as seven colors (rainbow colors) as a whole.

In addition, each character is displayed in a plurality of colors, and adjacent characters are configured such that the colors on the same one end side are different colors. For example, comparing ``chi'' and ``cha'' in ``chance'', the left side of ``chi'' is red and the left side of ``cha'' is indigo. The right side of "Chi" is indigo, and the right side of "Cha" is green.

The colors on the left side of ``Chi'' and ``Cha'' are different because they are red and indigo. On the other hand, the right side of "Chi" and the left side of "Cha" are both indigo blue and are the same. In this way, adjacent characters have different colors on the same side (left side and left side), but different colors on the side (right side and left side) of neighboring characters are displayed in such a way that the rainbow color display moves. can be of the same color.

If the above-described configuration is not adopted, there is a risk that a character string consisting of a plurality of characters may appear to be an effect of individual characters rather than the character string as a whole.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the entire character string so that it looks like a seven-color effect, rather than the individual characters.

It should be noted that in one game machine, it is not necessary to configure all cases where the character string is displayed in rainbow colors as described above. In other words, in the above example, the character strings are lined up horizontally and the rainbow color display also moves horizontally, but the character string is displayed diagonally and the rainbow color display also moves diagonally like the character string. may be displayed to Also, the display direction of the character string and the direction in which the rainbow color display moves may be different. For example, there may be a case where the character strings are arranged horizontally and the rainbow color display moves vertically.

Next, referring to FIG. 71(b), when the characters "Chance" are displayed horizontally from left to right on the display device 32, the rainbow color display moves from bottom to top within the characters, and "Chance ” is displayed as if the rainbow color display moves across the entire character string.

Here, the lower side (W1) of the character string of "Chance" is displayed in red, the middle side (W2) in purple, and the upper side (W3) in indigo blue.

As explained in FIG. 71(a), the rainbow color display is displayed in the order of red→orange→yellow→green→blue→indigo→purple. , the middle (W2) changes to red, and the upper (W3) changes to purple.

If the same color is not displayed in the horizontal direction (eg, W1) of a plurality of characters, and different colors are displayed for each character, it may be difficult to see rainbow colors (difficult to recognize by the player). Therefore, in order to display rainbow colors that are easy to see (easy to recognize by the player), a fixed configuration (arrangement of colors) is required.

Therefore, the same color is displayed in the horizontal direction (example: W1) of multiple characters, and by matching the color movement in the vertical direction over the entire character string, it is recognized that the entire character string is displayed in rainbow colors. can be made easier.

<Movement speed of rainbow display>
The speed at which the rainbow color display moves may be determined arbitrarily, but may be, for example, a speed at which the rainbow color does not rotate once in one display. Since the character display time in the effect displayed on the display device 32 is relatively short (approximately 2 seconds to 5 seconds), the movement speed is set so that the rainbow color display does not rotate once during the display of the character string. The player can be made to recognize the rainbow color without any burden.

<Comparison with the rainbow color emission mode of housing lamps (frame lamps and board lamps in pachinko game machines)>
Next, the rainbow display of the character string described above and the rainbow emission of the housing lamp are compared. Specifically, the rainbow color display of the character string and the start timing of the rainbow color emission of the housing lamp are compared.

Comparing the start timing of the rainbow color display of the character string and the rainbow color emission of the housing lamp, both can be started at almost the same timing. It is started at a timing slightly earlier than the color display.

This is because the housing lamps (frame lamps, etc.) are controlled by the sub-control means 1000, and the rainbow color display of the character string is controlled by the image control means according to the instructions of the sub-control means 1000. This is because display takes more time to start processing.

<When an error occurs during rainbow color display (and rainbow color emission)>
Next, a case where a predetermined error (eg, reel rotation failure) occurs while the character string is being displayed in rainbow color on the display device 32 and the housing lamp is emitting rainbow color light will be described.

If a predetermined error (e.g. reel rotation failure) occurs while the character string is being displayed in rainbow color and the housing lamp is emitting rainbow color, if the reel is rotating, the character string is displayed in rainbow color and the housing lamp The rainbow light emission continues until the reels are completely stopped, and when the reels are completely stopped, an error display is performed on the display device 32 and the housing lamp is switched to the error light emission mode.

Concretely, it demonstrates using FIG.72(a). The description is started on the assumption that the reel is rotating.

In FIG. 72(a), first, at timing t1, a character string is displayed in rainbow color (hereinafter referred to as "rainbow character") and the housing lamp emits rainbow color (hereinafter referred to as "rainbow light emission mode"). ).

Next, at timing t2, a predetermined error occurs. At this timing, no error display is performed on the display device 32 . Similarly, the housing lamp does not enter the error light emission mode.

Next, at the timing t3, after the error occurred at the timing t2, the rainbow characters are being displayed (also referred to as the rainbow characters are being displayed) and the rainbow light emitting mode is being output (the rainbow It is also called in the light emission mode).

Next, at timing t4, the display period of the rainbow character ends.

Next, at timing t5, the rainbow character display period ends at timing t4, so the rainbow characters are not displayed, and only the rainbow light emission mode continues.

Next, at timing t6, the reels are completely stopped, the display device 32 starts to display an error, and the housing lamp starts to output in an error light emission mode.

In this way, even if a predetermined error occurs while the character string is being displayed in rainbow color ("rainbow character") and the housing lamp is emitting rainbow color light ("rainbow light emission mode"), the error will immediately occur. Instead of using the display or the error lighting mode, if the error display or the error lighting mode is performed after the reels are completely stopped, the bonus etc. may be lost due to an error in the middle of one game. You can ease the anxiety that you don't.

Next, it demonstrates using FIG.72(b). The start timing of the error light emission mode is different from that in FIG. 72(a).

In FIG. 72(b), first, at timing t1, the rainbow characters are being displayed and the rainbow light emission mode is being performed.

Next, at timing t2, a predetermined error occurs. At this timing, no error display is performed on the display device 32, but the housing lamp is in the error light emission mode.

Next, at the timing of t3, since the predetermined error has occurred at the timing of t2, the rainbow characters are being displayed and the error lighting mode is being output (also referred to as the error lighting mode).

Next, at timing t4, the display period of the rainbow character ends.

Next, at timing t5, the rainbow character display period ends at timing t4, so the rainbow characters are not displayed, and only the error light emission mode continues.

Next, at timing t6, the reels come to a complete stop, the display device 32 starts to display an error, and the housing lamp continues to emit an error light.

In this way, it is also possible to configure so that only the output of the error lighting mode is started at the timing when an error occurs.

As a result, the hall clerk can grasp the game machine in which the error occurs at the timing when the error occurs.

<When an error occurs on a pachinko machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, an example in which an error occurs during the rainbow character display and the rainbow light emission mode in the pachinko game machine as the premise will be described. The rainbow characters are displayed on the effect display device P80, and the rainbow light emission mode is output by the frame lamp (and/or the board surface lamp).

<When an error occurs on a pachinko machine 1>
First, a case where a frame open error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 73(a). The frame open error is an error that occurs when the frame open switch P131 (switch for detecting that the front frame is open with respect to the outer frame) is turned off. In addition, the explanation is started on the premise that the special symbol is being changed.

First, at timing t1, the rainbow character display is in progress and the rainbow light emission mode is in progress.

Next, at timing t2, a frame open error occurs. At this timing, the rainbow characters continue to be displayed, but the frame lamp changes to an error light emission mode indicating an error, and an error sound is started to be output from the speaker P83.

An error display may be displayed together with the rainbow characters on the effect display device P80. At least a part of the error display and the rainbow characters may be displayed overlapping, or may be displayed in different display areas without overlapping.

Next, at timing t3, since the frame open error has occurred at timing t2, the rainbow characters are being displayed, the error light emitting mode is in progress, and an error sound is being output (also referred to as an error sound).

Next, at timing t4, the display of the rainbow character ends.

Next, at timing t5, since the display of the rainbow characters has ended at timing t4, the rainbow characters are not displayed, and the output of the error light emitting mode and the error sound continues.

Next, at timing t6, the frame (front frame) closes. At this point, the frame open error is resolved. An error tone is in progress.

Here, the error light emitting mode and the output of the error sound for the frame open error will be supplemented. When a frame open error occurs, the frame lamp repeats the predetermined pattern of error light emission until the frame is closed, and continues until 30 seconds have passed since the frame was closed. In the speaker P83, an error sound ("the door is open" sound + the sound of "beep") is repeated until the frame is closed, and is continued until 7 seconds have elapsed after the frame is closed. It should be noted that when an error display (eg, "the door is open") is displayed on the effect display device P80, the error display may be terminated as soon as the frame closing is detected.

Next, at timing t7, since 7 seconds have not elapsed since the frame was closed, the error light emitting mode and the error sound continue to be output.

Next, at the timing of t8, a big hit game is started. Here, even if 7 seconds have not passed since the closing of the frame, when the big win game is started, the frame lamp becomes the big win light emitting mode. As for the output of the speaker P83, similarly, even if 30 seconds have not passed after the frame is closed, when the big win game is started, the output of the error sound is finished and the output of the sound of the big win game is started.

In this way, even before a predetermined period (7 seconds after the frame is closed for the frame lamp, 30 seconds after the frame is closed for the speaker P83) after the error is resolved, the big win game, which is a happy state for the player, starts. In this case, by starting the output related to the big hit game, the player's desire to play can be continued.

Even if the jackpot game is started, the error light emission mode may remain until 7 seconds have elapsed after the frame is closed. Likewise, even if the jackpot game is started, the output of the speaker may remain an error sound until 30 seconds have passed after the frame is closed. In this case, even if the error has been cleared, the hall clerk can easily recognize that the error has occurred.

<When an error occurs at a pachinko machine 2>

First, the case where a magnetic error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 73(b). Note that the magnetic error is an error that occurs based on the fact that the magnetic sensor P73 is on. A magnetic error is an error of higher importance than a frame open error. As with FIG. 73(a), the explanation is started on the premise that the special symbol is changing.

First, a magnetic error occurs at timing t1. At this timing, the effect display device P80 starts to display an error, the frame lamp starts to emit an error light, and the speaker P83 starts to output an error sound. When a magnetic error occurs, the error notification (error display, error light emission mode, error sound) continues until the power is turned off.

Next, the timing of t2 is after the magnetic error has occurred at the timing of t1, so the error indication is being displayed (also referred to as error indication), the error light emitting mode is in progress, and the error sound is in progress.

Next, the timing of t3 is the display start timing of the rainbow characters.

Next, at the timing of t4, since the display of the rainbow characters is started at the timing of t3, the rainbow characters are being displayed, the error is being displayed, the error light emitting mode is being performed, and the error sound is being made. It should be noted that the lamp of the effect movable object does not emit light while the magnetic error is occurring, and is extinguished (no output) in neither the error light emission mode nor the light emission mode due to the effect. The error display and the rainbow character display may be displayed in an overlapping manner, or may be displayed in separate display areas without overlapping.

Next, at the timing of t5, it is the display end timing of the rainbow characters.

Next, at the timing of t6, the display of the rainbow character ends at the timing of t5, so the error display is in progress, the error light emission mode is in progress, the error sound is in progress, and the effect movable object lamp is turned off.

Next, at the timing of t7, a jackpot game is started.

Next, at the timing of t8, the jackpot game has started, but the frame lamp, the speaker, and the lamp of the effect movable object do not start the output regarding the jackpot game. In other words, the error light emission mode, the error sound output, and the lamp extinguishing of the effect movable object continue. It should be noted that the effect display device P80 continues the display of the error display, and starts displaying a movie of the big win game and the effect.

Next, at the timing of t9, the power is restored (the power is turned on after being turned off). This cancels the magnetic error. It should be noted that the game state returns to the jackpot game state.

In this way, when an error of high importance occurs, the fact that a big win will occur can be made clear by displaying the rainbow characters on the performance display device P80 without notifying that the big win will occur by means of the frame lamp, the speaker, etc. The occurrence of an error of high importance can also be notified by a frame lamp, a speaker, or the like.

In addition, when a magnetic error occurs, the game may be stopped and the magnetic error may be canceled by turning off the power supply. In this configuration, when a magnetic error occurs, the display device 32 displays, for example, "Magnetic error detected" on the entire screen, the frame lamp emits an error light, and the speaker outputs an error sound. and the lamp of the production movable object is not output.

<Supplement>
In addition to the frame lamps and the lamps of the movable objects, the gaming machine may be provided with lamps. For example, a lamp may be provided on the sub-switch 20 of the slot machine PS1 or the effect button P381 of the pachinko game machine P, or a lamp may be provided on the side of the game machine (slot machine PS1, pachinko game machine P). Some or all of these lamps may be made not to emit rainbow colors when a big hit is announced.

For example, when a teammate character wins in a battle effect displayed on the display device 32 (effect display device P80), when a rainbow character is displayed, the sub-switch 20 (effect button P381) is operated to display a big hit or the like. When it is done, the case where the production movable object moves and shows a big hit etc. is mentioned.

There is no problem even if all or part of the sub-switch 20, the effect button P381, the lamps provided on the side of the game machine, etc. are made to emit rainbow colors. For example, when the sub-switch 20 (effect button P381) is operated to display a big hit or the like, the lamp of the sub-switch 20 (effect button P381) emits rainbow colors and is provided on the side of the gaming machine. The lamp can also be configured not to emit rainbow colors.

<<Period during which songs can be changed and period during which volume can be changed>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a period in which music can be changed and a period in which volume can be changed will be described. FIG. 74 is an example of a display screen displayed on the display device 32 when music can be changed. It should be noted that although the configuration of the slot machine described above is exemplified, it can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines.

The currently set song title is displayed at the lower left of the display screen. Here, along with the song name "ABC", "♪" indicating the song name is displayed, and "♪:ABC" is displayed to indicate that the current song is set to "ABC". showing.

On the display screen, above the display of the music name, there is a display indicating that the music can be changed. Here, in order to indicate that the song can be changed by operating the left switch or right switch of the sub cross-key switch 21, the left switch and right switch portions of the image imitating the sub cross-key switch 21 are blacked out. An image is displayed along with the text "You can change the music with" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "music change suggestion image")).

At this time, the volume can also be changed, but there is no indication on the display screen that the volume can be changed. A display indicating that the volume can be changed may be provided. For example, in order to indicate that the volume is changed by operating the upper switch or the lower switch of the sub cross key switch 21, an image in which the upper switch and the lower switch of the cross button are painted black is displayed in the lower right of the display screen. may be displayed together with the text "You can change the volume with".

When changing the volume, an operation sound is output for each operation of the upper switch or the lower switch, but when changing music, an operation sound is not output for each operation of the left switch or the right switch. In other words, the operation sound of the upper switch or the lower switch when changing the volume is provided, but the operation sound of the left switch or the right switch when changing the music is not provided. The operation sound when changing the volume may be the same for the upper switch and the lower switch, or may be different. Also, a sound output for each volume may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a period in which music can be changed and a period in which volume can be changed will be described.

First, the case where the music is changed will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a).

First, the music is changed at timing t1.

When the music is changed at the timing of t1, the music cannot be changed again until a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) elapses. However, it is possible to change the volume even before the predetermined period has elapsed.

Next, a predetermined period of time elapses at timing t2.

When a predetermined period of time elapses at timing t2, the music can be changed again. Note that the volume change is of course possible even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Next, the case where the volume is changed will be described with reference to FIG. 75(b).

First, a timing volume change at t1 is performed.

When the volume is changed at the timing of t1, it is possible to change the music volume again even before a predetermined period (for example, two seconds) elapses. After the volume is changed, the music can be changed even before the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Next, a predetermined period of time elapses at timing t2.

Even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed at the timing of t2, it is possible to change the volume again, and it is also possible to change the music.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the change in the display screen displayed on the display device 32 when the music is changed, the period during which the music can be changed/impossible, and the period during which the volume change is permitted/impossible will be described. . It should be noted that the configuration will be described assuming that the volume can be changed by operating the upper switch or the lower switch.

When (a)
1: A song change suggestion image is displayed. 2: A song name "ABC" is displayed. 3: A song can be changed. 4: Volume can be changed.

Next, when the right switch is operated, the music is changed and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) is started. The predetermined period is, as described with reference to FIG. 75, a period during which the song cannot be changed again. The music can be listened to at a predetermined timing during a period (predetermined period) in which the music cannot be changed again. In other words, the music is reproduced and can be listened to before the predetermined period of time elapses. Depending on the song, the time until it becomes viewable may be longer than the predetermined period.

Specifically, when (b)
1: A song change suggestion image is displayed. 2: A song name "DEF" is displayed. 3: A song cannot be changed. 4: Volume can be changed. That is, in (b), the music has been changed from (a), and since it is within the predetermined period, the music cannot be changed again. However, the music change suggestion image is continuously displayed without being erased.

Next, the right switch is operated before the predetermined period elapses. However, since it is still within the predetermined period, the music is not changed.

Specifically, when (c)
1: A song change suggestion image is displayed. 2: A song name "DEF" is displayed. 3: A song cannot be changed. 4: Volume can be changed. That is, in (c), although time has passed since (b), these states do not change.

Next, when the upper switch is operated, the volume is increased by one step, and an image indicating the volume (hereinafter referred to as "volume image") is displayed on the display screen. An image in which the volume is raised by one level is displayed as the volume image.

Specifically, when (d)
1: A song change suggestive image is displayed 2: A song name "DEF" is displayed 3: A song cannot be changed 4: Volume can be changed 5: A volume image (volume 5) is displayed. That is, in (d), the volume is changed from (c) and a new volume image is displayed. Note that the display period of the volume image can be arbitrarily set, and may be a period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) or a period equivalent to the predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Alternatively, it may be a period longer than the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

Then, a predetermined period of time elapses. Note that the sub cross key switch 21 is not operated.

Specifically, when (e)
1: A song change suggestion image is displayed. 2: A song name "DEF" is displayed. 3: A song can be changed. 4: Volume can be changed. That is, in (e), the volume image is erased from (d), and it becomes possible to change the music again.

Next, when the right switch is operated, the music is changed and the predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) is started again.

Specifically, when (f)
1: A song change suggestion image is displayed. 2: A song name "GHI" is displayed. 3: A song cannot be changed. 4: Volume can be changed. That is, in (f), the music is changed from (e), and since it is within the predetermined period, the music cannot be changed again.

Next, when the lower switch is operated, the volume is decreased by one step, and the volume image is displayed on the display screen. An image in which the volume is reduced by one level is displayed as the volume image.

Specifically, at (g),
1: A song change suggesting image is displayed 2: A song name "GHI" is displayed 3: A song cannot be changed 4: Volume can be changed 4: A volume image (volume 4) is displayed. That is, in (g), the volume is changed from (f), and a new volume image is displayed on the display screen. Further, since it is within the predetermined period, it is not possible to change the music again.

When the volume is changed by operating the upper switch or the lower switch of the sub cross-key switch 21, a predetermined operation sound is output. is configured so that the predetermined operation sound is not output when the music is changed by operating the .

In addition, in a game state different from the game state described above, when the song cannot be changed and the operation of the left switch or right switch of the sub cross-key switch 21 is valid, the left switch or right switch of the sub cross-key switch 21 The configuration may be such that an operation sound can be output when the right switch is effectively operated. For example, if the operation of the left switch or the right switch of the sub cross-key switch 21 is effective while the menu screen is being displayed, and the left switch or the right switch of the sub cross-key switch 21 is effectively operated at this time, The configuration may be such that a specific operation sound is output.

Similarly, the upper switch or lower switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 is in a game state different from the above-described game state, and when the volume cannot be changed and the upper switch or lower switch of the sub cross-key switch 21 is operated. is valid, an operation sound may be output when the up switch or the down switch of the sub cross key switch 21 is effectively operated. For example, if the operation is valid while the menu screen is being displayed, etc., and if the upper switch or the lower switch of the sub cross key switch 21 is effectively operated at this time, the specific operation sound or the special operation sound different from the specific operation sound may be configured to output.

<Feature 1>
The above example has feature 1 below.
- Music change After a music change (left switch or right switch operation), the music can be changed when the left switch or right switch is operated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
After a change of music (operation of the left switch or right switch), the music cannot be changed even if the left switch or right switch is operated before a predetermined period has elapsed.
• Volume change After a predetermined period of time has passed after a volume change (operation of the upper switch or the lower switch), the volume can be changed when the upper switch or the lower switch is operated.
After changing the volume (operation of the upper switch or the lower switch), the volume can be changed when the upper switch or the lower switch is operated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In other words, in changing the music, once the music is changed, it is configured so that it cannot be changed again until a predetermined period of time has passed. It is configured so that it can be changed again even if there is

In this way, by making the activation timing of the music change switch and the activation timing of the volume change switch different, it is possible to prevent operation errors. For example, even if the user intends to change the volume after changing the music and presses the upper switch or the lower switch, it is possible to prevent the music from being changed due to detection of the operation of the left switch or the right switch.

<Feature 2>
The above example has feature 2 below.
The song name is visible (output possible) even during the period when the song cannot be changed again (from the song change to the elapse of a predetermined time). Also, at a predetermined timing during a period (predetermined period) in which the music cannot be changed again, at least part of the music can be viewed.

By securing the time during which the intro part can be viewed when changing the music, the player's selectivity of the music can be improved by not only visually recognizing the title of the music but also listening to the music.

<Feature 3>
The above example has feature 3 below.
When changing the volume, an operation sound is output for each operation of the upper switch or the lower switch, but when changing music, an operation sound is not output for each operation of the left switch or the right switch.

Since the operation sound (change sound) of the left switch or the right switch is not output when the music is changed, the sound of the music can be prevented from being disturbed. When changing the volume, the player can easily adjust the volume by outputting an operation sound (changed sound) with the volume changed by operating the upper switch or the lower switch.

<Supplement>
Note that once the music is changed, the music cannot be changed again for a predetermined period of time, but the music change suggestion image is continuously displayed on the display screen. As a result, the player is not bothered by the display and disappearance of the music change suggestion image. Also, it is possible to clearly show that the music can be changed in the current game state.

<<Available configurations>>
The example described above can also be provided with each of the following configurations. Note that each of the following configurations may be provided in combination as long as there are no obstructive factors.

<Additional configuration 1>
Even if the first error occurs during automatic repeated hitting (hold down the subswitch 20 or effect button P381), the automatic repeated hitting continues without interruption, but if the second error occurs, interrupted.

The first error is an error of relatively low importance (first error < second error) such as frame open error or full tank detection error, and the second error is an error of relatively high importance such as magnetic error. .

<Additional configuration 2>
It is possible to change the volume during auto repeated hits.

In other words, even if the volume is changed during automatic continuous tapping, the automatic continuous tapping continues.

<Additional configuration 3>
If the volume is changed during auto-punching, the volume image is displayed, and the volume image is not cleared based on the pummeling detection.

In other words, the volume image is not erased by auto repeated tapping, and the volume image is erased after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses.

<Additional configuration 4>
After the volume is changed and the volume image is displayed, even if an effect that allows auto-rolling occurs, the volume image will continue to be displayed (it will not be hidden), and then auto-rolling will start. However, the volume image continues to be displayed (not hidden).

In other words, the display of the volume image will not be erased due to the occurrence of an effect that enables automatic repeated hitting while the volume image is displayed, or due to the start of the automatic repeated hitting. The volume image is erased after a predetermined period (eg, 2 seconds) elapses.

<Additional configuration 5>
The sound volume image has a higher display priority than the button image and the effect generated by button pressing (continuous hitting).

Since the display priority of the volume image is higher than the display priority of the button image and the effect that occurs when the button is pressed (continuously), the volume image was displayed at the same time as the button image and the effect that occurs when the button is pressed (continuously). However, since the player can visually recognize the volume image, the player can easily adjust the volume to a desired level.

<Additional configuration 6>
The volume image has a higher display priority than the music name display.

Since the display priority of the volume image is higher than the display priority of the music name, even if the volume image is displayed at the same time as the music name, the player can visually recognize the volume image. easier to adjust.

<Additional configuration 7>
Equipped with a button repeated effect that can operate the effect button (sub switch 20, effect button P381) multiple times, the button repeated effect is executed without spanning the fluctuation (game), while the volume change straddles the fluctuation (game). It is viable. In other words, it is possible to change the volume even when the fluctuation is stopped (when the pattern is fixed, when the next fluctuation is waiting) or when the reel is completely stopped. You can continue to do it later. Furthermore, in other words, the volume can be changed when the variation is stopped or when the reels are completely stopped, the volume image is displayed when the volume is changed, and the volume image can be continuously displayed after the variation is started or after the reel rotation is started.

By configuring in this way, the volume is changed when the fluctuation is stopped or when the reels are completely stopped, and immediately after that, the fluctuation is started or the reel rotation is started, so that the volume during the game can be confirmed. Since the volume can be changed even after the start of the game, the volume can be further changed if the volume is not the desired volume.

<Additional configuration 8>
Equipped with a repeated button-hitting performance enabling multiple operations of the performance buttons (the sub-switch 20 and the performance button P381), and the repeated button-hitting performance is executed over the variation of the big win, the big win game, the game for notifying the bonus, etc., and the bonus game. On the other hand, the volume change (volume screen) can be executed across the big hit variation, the big hit game, the game that notifies the bonus etc. and the bonus game.

By configuring in this way, even if the volume is changed in the game that notifies the big hit variation, bonus, etc., and the big win game or bonus game is started after that, the volume can be changed even in the big win game or the bonus game. If the volume is not the desired one, the volume can be changed immediately, and the volume during the game can be appropriately changed according to one's liking.

<Additional Configuration 9>
Even if the power is turned on while the volume change button (up switch or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21, left button or right button of the cross key P383) is pressed, the volume is not changed.

With this configuration, if the power is turned off due to an instantaneous electric shock or the like and the button used to change the volume is accidentally pressed when the power is restored, the volume will be changed as soon as the power is restored. You can prevent it from slipping.

<Additional Configuration 10>
The production buttons (sub-switch 20, production button P381) can be automatically hit repeatedly, but the volume change buttons (upper switch or lower switch of the sub cross key switch 21, left button or right button of the cross key P383) cannot be automatically hit repeatedly. Not valid.

By activating the auto-continuous button-press effect, it is possible to save the player from having to operate the buttons. . Therefore, by not validating the automatic repeated hits when changing the volume, the player can check the volume step by step, thereby preventing an unintentional sudden increase in volume.

It should be noted that the volume change button (the upper switch or lower switch of the sub cross key switch 21, the left button or the right button of the cross key P383) and the above-described song change button (the upper switch or the lower switch of the sub cross key switch 21). etc.), the automatic repeated hits may be enabled. In this case, it can be assumed that the detection speed of automatic repeated hitting of the effect button is faster than the detection speed of automatic repeated hitting for volume change or music change. In the case of automatic repeated hitting of the performance button, the detection speed is set to be a rapid repeated hitting, and the change in volume and change in music can be set at a speed that can be set as intended by the player.

<Additional configuration 11>
The volume change button (upper switch or lower switch of the sub cross key switch 21, left button or right button of the cross key P383) is provided with the first button (upper switch of the sub cross key switch 21, right button of the cross key P383) right button) and a second button (lower switch of the sub cross key switch 21, left button of the cross key P383) for decreasing the volume, and when one of the buttons continues to be operated, the other button is operated, the operation of the other button is valid.

For example, if the lower switch of the sub cross-key switch 21 for decreasing the volume is pressed while the upper switch of the sub cross-key switch 21 for increasing the volume is pressed, the lower switch of the sub cross-key switch 21 is pressed. is effectively detected to decrease the volume. With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively reflect the player's latest button operation.

Also, even while the effect button (sub switch 20, effect button P381) is being pressed, the volume change button (upper switch or lower switch of the sub cross key switch 21, left button or right button of the cross key P383) is pressed. In such a case, the volume can be changed by activating the depression of the volume change button.

<Additional configuration 12>
A specific operation enables or disables the volume change, but the specific operation does not enable or disable the light amount change.

For example, if the power is turned on while the effect button P381 is pressed, if the setting key switch is turned on after the power is turned on, a predetermined button (for example, right stop switch) is pressed, the administrator menu is displayed, and although it is possible to enable/disable the volume change in the administrator menu, it is possible to enable/disable the light amount change for adjusting the light amount of the predetermined lamp of the game machine. Cannot be disabled.

In other words, changing the amount of light is always effective, and the player can always adjust the amount of light to his liking. Therefore, the player can prevent epilepsy or the like by himself by adjusting the amount of light according to his own constitution, physical condition, or the like.

<Additional configuration 13>
When the light amount change button is pressed, light is emitted in a predetermined lamp pattern different from the lamp pattern used for the production.

The light amount change button may be the same as or different from the volume change button.

The predetermined lamp pattern when changing the light intensity is a pattern with a slower flashing speed than the lamp pattern in a specific production, a pattern with fewer lamps lit than the lamp pattern in a specific production, a pattern with a single emission color, etc. be. As a result, the player can distinguish between the lamp pattern for effect and the lamp pattern for changing the light quantity, so that the light quantity can be easily changed.

<< power supply line >>
Next, referring to FIGS. 77 to 82, in each of the slot machine and the pachinko game machine, from the power supply (power supply board) to the main control board (also referred to as "first main control board"), sub control About the power supply line for supplying power (voltage) to the board (effect control board), payout control board (including the board for controlling the hopper 44, sometimes referred to as the "second main control board"), etc. explain.

<Slot machine power line configuration 1>
First, configuration 1 of the power supply line (power supply harness) of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG.

Power (voltage) is supplied from the power supply device 39 to the main control board 100, the sub-control board 1000, the hopper 44, and the like.

The power supply device 39 and the main control board 100 are connected by a power line L1, and power is supplied from the power supply device 39 to the main control board 100 via the power line L1.

The power supply device 39 and the sub control board 1000 are connected by a power line L2, and power is supplied from the power supply device 39 to the sub control board 1000 via the power line L2.

The power supply 39 and the hopper 44 are connected by a power line L3, and power is supplied from the power supply 39 to the hopper 44 via the power line L3.

Here, when comparing the lengths of the power line L1 and the power line L2, the power line L1 is shorter than the power line L2. This is because the main control board 100 is a board for controlling the progress of the game, and is required to have a structure that is more resistant to noise than the sub-control board 1000 for controlling the effects. If the length of the power supply line is short, the risk of noise is reduced accordingly. preferably configured to

Further, comparing the thicknesses of the power supply line L1 and the power supply line L2, the power supply line L1 is thinner than the power supply line L2. This is because, just as the length changes the risk of noise, the thickness also changes the risk of noise. If the power line is thin, the risk of noise is reduced accordingly. Therefore, comparing the power line L1 connected to the main control board 100 and the power line L2 connected to the sub control board 1000, the power line L1 is configured to be thin. preferably.

Further, comparing the lengths of power supply line L1, power supply line L2, and power supply line L3, power supply line L3, power supply line L1, and power supply line L2 are obtained in order from the shortest. The hopper 44 is controlled by the main control board 100 (main control CPU) because it is a device that pays out medals and is related to the progress of the game. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the power supply line L3 to be as short as possible. Therefore, the power lines L1 and L3 for supplying power to the devices (main control board 100, hopper 44, etc.) relating to the progress of the game are power sources for supplying power to the sub-control board 1000 for simply controlling the effect. It is preferable to configure it to be shorter than the line L2.

In addition, the power supply 39 and the main control board 100, the power supply 39 and the sub control board 1000, the power supply 39 and the hopper 44 are connected without passing through a board on which another CPU is mounted (hereinafter also referred to as a CPU mounting board). They are directly connected by a power line L1, a power line L2 and a power line L3.

In the case of a configuration that passes through other CPU-mounted boards, if noise occurs in a part of the power supply line, it may affect the other CPU-mounted boards and cause malfunctions. In addition, when a problem occurs in a board due to overcurrent, etc., it is necessary to replace the board, but the procedure for replacing the board (for example, the main control board) where the serial number of the CPU is managed is troublesome and time consuming. It takes. Since the amusement arcade cannot operate during the period required for this replacement procedure, this is a problem directly linked to profits, and it is preferable to have a configuration that allows replacement as quickly and simply as possible, or that does not require such troubles.

Therefore, it is desirable that the power supply device 39 and the CPU-mounted board are directly connected to each other without going through another CPU-mounted board. It should be noted that there is no problem in the configuration of the game machine even if another CPU mounting board is provided between the power supply device 39 and the CPU mounting board.

<Pachinko machine power supply line configuration 1>
As configuration 1 of the power supply line of the pachinko game machine, the configuration can be substantially the same as configuration 1 of the power supply line of the slot machine described above. Configuration 1 of the power line of the pachinko game machine will be described below with reference to FIG.

Power (voltage) is supplied from the power board P44 to the main control board 40, the performance control board P41, the payout control board P43, and the like.

The power supply P44 and the main control board P40 are connected by a power line L1, and power is supplied from the power supply 39 to the main control board 40 via the power line L1.

The power supply device P44 and the effect control board P41 are connected by the power line L2, and power is supplied from the power supply device 39 to the effect control board P41 through the power line L2.

The power supply P44 and the payout control board P43 are connected by a power line L3, and power is supplied from the power supply 39 to the payout control board P43 through the power line L3.

Comparing the lengths of the power supply line L1 and the power supply line L2, the power supply line L1 is configured to be shorter than the power supply line L2. This is because the main control board P40 is a board for controlling the progress of the game, and is required to have a structure that is more resistant to noise than the performance control board P41 for controlling the performance. If the length of the power line is short, the risk of noise is reduced accordingly. Therefore, when comparing the power line L1 connected to the main control board P40 and the power line L2 connected to the effect control board P41, the power line L1 is shortened. preferably configured to

Further, comparing the thicknesses of the power supply line L1 and the power supply line L2, the power supply line L1 is thinner than the power supply line L2. This is because, just as the length changes the risk of noise, the thickness also changes the risk of noise. If the power line is thin, the risk of noise is reduced accordingly. Therefore, comparing the power line L1 connected to the main control board P40 and the power line L2 connected to the effect control board P41, the power line L1 is configured to be thin. preferably.

Furthermore, comparing the lengths of power supply line L1, power supply line L2, and power supply line L3, power supply line L3, power supply line L1, and power supply line L2 are obtained in order from the shortest. The payout control board P43 is related to the progress of the game in order to control the payout of game balls. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the power supply line L3 to be as short as possible. Therefore, the power lines L1 and L3 for supplying power to the devices (main control board P40, payout control board P43) related to the progress of the game are used for supplying power to the effect control board P41 for simply controlling the effect. It is preferable to configure it to be shorter than the power supply line L2.

In addition, the power supply device P44 and the main control board P40, the power supply device 39 and the effect control board P41, the power supply device 39 and the payout control board P43 are connected to the power line without going through a board (CPU mounting board) on which another CPU is mounted. They are directly connected by L1, power line L2 and power line L3. The reason is the same as that explained in the configuration 1 of the power supply line of the slot machine, so the explanation is omitted. Similarly, there is no problem in the configuration of the game machine even if another CPU mounting board is provided between the power supply P44 and the CPU mounting board.

<Slot machine power line configuration 2>
Next, configuration 2 of the power supply line (power supply harness) of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG.

The power supply 39 and the main control board 100 are connected, and the power supply 39 and the sub control board 1000 are connected. , a relay substrate 500 is provided. The relay board 500 is provided for distributing power to the main control board 100 and the sub control board 1000, and is not equipped with a CPU.

That is, the power supply 39 and the main control board 100 are connected via the relay board 500, the power supply 39 and the sub control board 1000 are also connected via the relay board 500, and the power supply 39 and the relay board 500 are connected to the power supply line. Power is supplied from the power supply device 39 to the main control board 100 by connecting the relay board 500 and the main control board 100 by the power line L1, and the relay board 500 and the sub-control board 1000 are connected by the power line L2. Power is supplied from the power supply device 39 to the sub control board 1000 by being connected. Since the supply of power from the power supply device 39 to the hopper 44 is the same as that of the configuration 1 of the power line of the slot machine, the explanation is omitted.

Comparing the lengths of the power supply line L1 and the power supply line L2, the power supply line L1 is shorter than the power supply line L2, similar to the configuration 1 of the power supply line of the slot machine.

As for the thickness, the power line L1 is configured to be thinner than the power line L2 in the same manner as the configuration 1 of the power line of the slot machine.

The relay board 500 is provided in the cabinet PS3 and is provided near the main control board 100 . By configuring in this way, the length of the power supply line L1 can be shortened.

<Configuration of pachinko machine power supply line 2>
As configuration 2 of the power supply line of the pachinko game machine, the configuration can be substantially the same as configuration 2 of the power supply line of the slot machine described above. Configuration 2 of the power line of the pachinko game machine will be described below with reference to FIG.

The power supply board P44 and the main control board P40 are connected, and the power supply board P44 and the effect control board P41 are connected. is provided with a relay board P45. The relay board P45 is provided for distributing the power supply to the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41, and the CPU is not mounted.

That is, the power board P44 and the main control board P40 are connected via the relay board P45, the power board P44 and the sub-control board P41 are also connected via the relay board 45, and the power board P44 and the relay board P45 are connected to the power supply line. Power is supplied from the power supply board P44 to the main control board P40 by connecting the relay board P45 and the main control board P40 by the power supply line L1, and the relay board P45 and the sub control board P41 are connected by the power supply line L2. Power is supplied from the power board P44 to the sub-control board P41 by being connected. Since the supply of power from the power supply board P44 to the payout control board P43 is the same as the configuration 1 of the power supply line of the pachinko game machine, the explanation is omitted.

Comparing the lengths of the power line L1 and the power line L2, the power line L1 is shorter than the power line L2 as in the power line configuration 2 of the slot machine.

As for the thickness of the power line L1, the power line L1 is thinner than the power line L2 in the same manner as the configuration 2 of the power line of the slot machine.

The relay board P45 is provided near the main control board P40. By configuring in this way, the length of the power supply line L1 can be shortened.

<Slot machine power line configuration 3>
Next, configuration 3 of the power supply line (power supply harness) of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG.

In configuration 3 of the power supply line of the slot machine, the power supply line L1 and the power supply line L2 are bundled together by a tube T. Also, the power supply device 39 and a payout control board 200 for controlling the hopper 44 are connected by a power line L3. Note that the payout control board 200 is provided on the back side of the hopper 44 .

Even with such a configuration, it is possible to disperse the risk of burning some power lines due to overcurrent. Specifically, by separating the power line L1 related to the main control board 100 and the power line L3 related to the payout control board 200, it is possible to avoid being involved in an accident of the other power line.

<Pachinko machine power supply line configuration 3>
Next, configuration 3 of the power supply line (power supply harness) of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG.

In configuration 3 of the power supply line of the pachinko game machine, the power supply board P44 and the main control board P40 are connected by the power supply line L1, and the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41 are connected by the line group LG including the power supply line. there is In addition, the power supply board P44 and the payout control board P43 are connected by the power supply line L3.

That is, power is supplied to the main control board P44 through the route of power supply board P44→main control board P40, and supplied to the effect control board P41 through the route of power supply board P44→main control board P40→effect control board P41. be done. It is supplied to the payout control board P43 through the route of the power supply board P44→the payout control board P43.

Thus, by separating the power line L1 for the main control board P41 and the power line L3 for the payout control board P43, it is possible to avoid being involved in an accident of the other power line.

In addition, the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 are connected by a line group LG including a power supply line (power supply harness). A signal wire (signal wire harness) for transmission is included.

The power harness and the signal wire harness have the same thickness. There is a so-called hanging goto as a fraudulent act in a gaming machine. This hanging goto is configured to operate by extracting power from the power supply line. Therefore, making it difficult to distinguish between the power supply harness and the signal wire harness of the line group LG is an effective countermeasure.

<Other configurations>
<Additional configuration 1>
Overcurrent countermeasures are applied to each board. In particular, the main control board (100, P40), which performs the main control regarding the progress of the game, has more countermeasures than the other boards (for example, the sub control board 1000 (performance control board P41), the payout control board P43). Many overcurrent countermeasure circuits and countermeasure parts are introduced.

For example, the main control board may have more capacitors, larger capacity capacitors, or more fuses than other boards.

Generally, the voltage supplied to the main control board is a lower voltage than the voltage supplied to the sub control board (performance control board). Nevertheless, overcurrent countermeasures in the main control board are stronger than those in the sub control board (performance control board).

As described above, the procedure for replacing the main control board requires a lot of labor and time. Therefore, many countermeasures are taken to prevent failures from occurring in the main control board.

<Additional configuration 2>
Next, configuration 1 of the power cable applicable to the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG.

By inserting the power plug of the power cable EC into a general power outlet, a current is supplied to the power board P44 and converted into a predetermined voltage by the power board P44.

As shown in FIG. 82, the power cable EC starts from the power board P44 and extends from below the power board P44 toward the hinge mechanism side. is provided to reach a position where

In this way, since the power cable EC is provided on the side opposite to the side that is opened when the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked by the key, it is difficult to commit fraud from the side that is opened. become.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the power supply cable EC to be used illegally to cause a power failure. Since settings can be changed when recovering from a power outage, preventing unauthorized power outages is an important countermeasure.

<Additional configuration 3>
Further, the power cable EC is fixed at a position substantially horizontal to the sphere tank by means of a fixture (clamp made of resin or nylon, etc.) so that the tip of the power cable EC having the power plug extends rearward. provided in

The power plug of the game machine is inserted into an outlet provided on the so-called island facility of the game parlor. Therefore, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, it may drop into the ball tank and cause ball clogging.

With the above configuration, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, the power plug can easily fall backward from the position fixed by the fixture, and can be prevented from falling into the ball tank.

In other words, even when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, jamming is less likely to occur.

In this specification, as gaming machines, configurations of reel-type gaming machines (slot machines) and pachinko gaming machines are mainly exemplified, but the present invention can also be applied to various gaming machines such as parrots and casino machines.

The technical contents described above for explaining the present invention can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Middle reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Middle stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation instruction lamp 24a: Left operation instruction lamp 24b: Center operation instruction lamp 24c: Right operation instruction lamp 25: Bet number display lamp 25a: 1 bed lamp 25b: 2 bed lamp 25c: 3 Bed lamp 26 : Credit number display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Winning number display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Seal container 32 : Display Device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout port 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board P : Pachinko game machine P1 : Outer frame P2 : Front frame P3 : Glass frame P4 : Back set unit P5 : Game board P40 : Main control board P41 : Effect control board P42 : Image control board P43 : Payout control board P44 : Power board P47 : Power switch P48 : Ram clear switch P49 : Setting key switch P50: Main control display device P51: First special symbol display device P52: Second special symbol display device P80: Effect display device P81: Effect operation means (P380 effect operation unit, P381 effect button, P382 lever, P383 cross Key)
P82: Production lamp (P350 frame lamp, P550 board lamp)
P83: Speaker (P141 panel speaker, P371 upper speaker)
P560 : Production Accessory P710 : First Startup Winning Device P720 : Second Startup Winning Device P730 : General Winning Device P740 : Normal Figure Operation Gate Device P750 : Large Winning Gate Device P755 : Special Electric Accessory P770 : Normal Electric Accessory

Claims (1)

a display device for displaying a performance;
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Equipped with production control means for performing control related to production,
A character group can be displayed on the display device to indicate that a predetermined game state can be entered or that the predetermined game state will continue,
When the main control means determines to shift to a predetermined game state or to continue a specific game state, the display pattern of the character group is determined by the effect control means,
In the predetermined aspect of the display pattern of the character group, each character constituting the character group is displayed with a plurality of colors,
The color display in the predetermined mode is displayed by moving in the vertical direction within the character group,
At a predetermined timing, a color displayed at a predetermined vertical end of a predetermined character in the character group and a specific character adjacent to the predetermined character in the character group at a predetermined vertical end. Machines that are different in color from the color displayed on the machine.

Images